JP7508790B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines and slot machines, reserve the right to play a variable game that notifies the result of a jackpot lottery, and display the number of reserved rights as a reserved image such as an icon on a pattern display device such as a liquid crystal display. In addition, the reserved image generally indicates the expectation that the lottery result for the reserved right will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation) by the display mode such as color or pattern, and the display mode changes until the variable game for the reserved right is started.

In addition, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the pattern display device, a variable display image in the same manner as the reserved image is displayed for the variable display. And, when the right to execute a variable game is reserved, the variable display image is displayed together with the reserved image, for example, in a position adjacent to the reserved image.

In addition, the display mode of the reserved image and the variable display image, such as color and pattern, i.e., the probability of a big win suggested to the player, changes until the variable game corresponding to the target image is completed. This makes it possible for the player to progress through the game while anticipating the changes in the reserved image and the variable display image, thereby improving the interest of the game.

JP 2015-205036 A

However, when the variable play corresponding to the target image among the reserved images and the variable display images ends, the display mode of the reserved image or the variable display image becomes meaningless. Not only that, but when the display mode for the target variable is one with a high probability of winning, if the lottery result is notified by the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern, the player may feel a helpless sense of disappointment and helplessness in response to the display mode with a high probability of winning, which may lead to a decrease in interest in the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the attention and interest of players in the game and improve their motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed;
A display means (341) for displaying the result of the transition determination by a stationary display of a predetermined pattern (decorative pattern) displayed in a variable manner;
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to start the variable display of the predetermined pattern up to an upper limit number;
a pattern change execution means (51) for executing a variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right reserved by the reservation means (41) when a start condition for variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right is established;
a means (51) for setting a reserved information display area (75) in the display means (341) capable of displaying reserved information corresponding to the number of the rights reserved by the reservation means (41) and an expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to the special game state in a predetermined display mode;
A means (51) for setting a previously changed information display area (77) capable of displaying a predetermined number of previously changed information corresponding to the change display in which the change display of the predetermined pattern has started in a specific display mode in the display means (341);
Equipped with
the predetermined display mode includes at least a first display mode (e.g., blue), a second display mode (e.g., green) having a higher expectation level than the first display mode, and a third display mode (e.g., red) having a higher expectation level than the second display mode;
a means for restricting a change from the second display mode to the third display mode when the pending information displayed in the pending information display area (75) is in the second display mode, and restricting a change from the second display mode to the first display mode;
a predetermined state generating means (51) for generating a predetermined state which is more advantageous to a player when the changed information corresponding to a specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77) than when the changed information corresponding to the reserved information displayed in the third display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77);
Equipped with
The predetermined display mode of the pending information is different from the specific display mode of the changed information.

1 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an example of an opening and closing door provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4 . 5 is a diagram showing an example of an opening/closing door, a crane device, and a game ball retention section provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X1-X1 in FIG. 6. A diagram to explain the specific period for which game balls are retained in the game ball retention section, the prescribed period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball port of the Kluen device, and the specified period for displaying specific information indicating a non-set value on the seven-segment display section. 10A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 of FIG. 8, and FIG. 10B and FIG. 10C are cross-sectional views taken along the line X3-X3 of FIG. FIG. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of how numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit, and FIG. 11(C) is a diagram showing an example of how alphabets are displayed on the 7-segment display unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a memory area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance information display device of a main control device. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing examples of display on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example on a setting value display unit of the performance information display device. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a main timer interrupt process executed by the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for start winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of Figure 20. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the first pending command setting process executed in the start winning process of Figure 21. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for variable game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 23. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for data setting processing executed in the variable game control processing of Figure 24. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for variable start processing executed in the variable game control processing of Figure 24. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a setting value change process executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a sub timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for display order setting processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34 . FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a numeral display order determination table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 35 . 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34 . A figure showing an example of a first stop pattern selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 37. A figure showing an example of a performance pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 37. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34 . 41 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a seven-segment display control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 . FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a seven-segment display control information storage area set in the voice lamp control device. 11A and 11B are diagrams for explaining an example of control of a seven-segment display unit and an example of updating a seven-segment display unit control information storage area. 6A and 6B are diagrams for explaining a control example of a seven-segment display unit. 11A and 11B are diagrams for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display unit control information storage area. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an ending additional image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 . A figure showing an example of screen transition during the ending presentation of a jackpot game. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a setting value suggestion process executed by a voice lamp control device of an amusement machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a seven-segment display control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48 . A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an ending additional image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of Figure 48. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display order setting process executed by a voice lamp control device of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 51 . FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 53. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 53. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55 . 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56 . 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56 . 11 is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation situations. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing an example of screen transition on the pattern display unit in a standby state. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a standby state screen transition process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55 . 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a standby state screen transition process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55 . 63 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG. 62 . FIG. 13 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 64. 6A and 6B are diagrams showing examples of turning on and off a lamp display unit. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34 . 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of updating a seven-segment display control information storage area set in the voice lamp control device. FIG. A figure showing an example of screen transition during round play when the lamp display unit is controlled during a jackpot game. A figure showing an example of a display screen during the ending presentation of a jackpot game. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of the lamp display unit. A figure showing an example of a table used in a main control device of a gaming machine related to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for data setting processing executed in the variable game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 73. Figure 75 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first reserved image display section, a changing image display section, and a previously changed image display section that are set in the pattern display section in a normal game state, and Figure 75 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second reserved image display section and a changing image display section that are set in the pattern display section in a special game state and a time-saving game state. A figure showing an example of a change in the pending image in the first pending image display section. Figure 77 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the pattern combination level and the pattern combination type in the already-changed image display section, and Figure 77 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the pattern combination type and the profit information in the already-changed image display section. A figure showing an example of the transition of the display mode until a changed display image corresponding to a pending image in the first pending display area in the first pending image display unit is displayed in the first changed image display area in the changed image display unit. A figure showing an example in which a joker pattern is displayed in the first already-changed image display area in the already-changed image display section. A figure showing an example of when a rare pattern is displayed in the first already-changed image display area in the already-changed image display section. A figure showing an example of when a changed image is erased from the changed image display section. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of Figure 82. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of Figure 82. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a first pending image addition process executed in the command determination process of Figure 84. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a changed image shift process executed in the command determination process of Figure 83. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a changed image shift process executed in the command determination process of Figure 83. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a changed image shift process executed in the command determination process of Figure 83. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a changed image shift process executed in the command determination process of Figure 83. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the changed image deletion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of Figure 82.

The following describes the first to fifth embodiments of the present invention with reference to the attached drawings to facilitate understanding of the present invention. Furthermore, each of the following embodiments is an example of the present invention and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[General configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, Fig. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, Figs. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and Fig. 4 is a front view of a gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions of front/rear, left/right, and up/down used in this embodiment are defined by the front/rear direction D1, the up/down direction D2, and the left/right direction D3 shown in Figs. 1 to 3.

As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in a gaming hall by fixing the outer frame 14 to an island facility (not shown) in the gaming hall. Note that in this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as reel-type gaming machines (slot machines), arrange ball gaming machines, and jan-ball gaming machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed relative to the outer frame 14 by having its left end portion rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11 by having its left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11. The back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12 by having its left end portion rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operating button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illumination section 27.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper tray 23. The operation button 20 is equipped with an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) that switches the input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described below depending on whether or not it is pressed. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 (operated or not operated). This operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button performance that is executed in response to the player's operation of the operation button 20 during a predetermined operation acceptance period in a variable game performance executed in a variable game that clearly shows the player the lottery results in a jackpot lottery.

The location of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, but may be any location on the front frame 11 as long as the location is operable by the player. The number of operation buttons 20 is also not limited to one, but may be two or more.

In addition, instead of the operation button 20, a touch panel may be provided that displays touch keys and accepts operation of the touch keys by the player. The operation button 20 may also be equipped with a jog dial. In these cases, the operation of the player on the touch panel or panel 25 during the variable game presentation will be reflected in the operation button presentation, etc.

The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that is operated by the player to launch game balls. In the gaming machine 10, basic play is performed by launching game balls from the game ball launch mechanism 32 (described below) with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the launch handle 22 is being operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the play area every 0.6 sec.

The upper tray 23 is disposed below the panel 25 and is used to store game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 132 of the dispensing mechanism 130 described below, and to lead the stored game balls in a single row to the game ball launching mechanism 32. The lower tray 24 is disposed further below the upper tray 23 and is used to store surplus game balls on the upper tray 23.

The panel 25 is made of colorless, transparent or colored, transparent glass or synthetic resin, allowing the player to view the game board 31 in the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and perform an audio output effect that outputs sound. Note that the installation position of the speakers 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. The illumination unit 27 also has built-in light sources such as indicator lamps and LEDs, and performs lamp effects by changing the lighting color and flashing modes such as turning on and off.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As described above, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball launching mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Note that in FIG. 2, the surface of the game board 31 is omitted for the sake of simplicity.

The control unit 33 is provided on the rear side of the game board 31, and has a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In the game machine 10, commands (control signals) for instructing the control content are sent in one direction from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, an outlet 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a crane device 37, a game ball retention section 38, and a seven-segment display section 39.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. After being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that do not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the outlet 318.

2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and guides the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 one by one onto the launching rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means that launches the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may also be a mechanism that launches game balls using other driving means, such as a motor, instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the outlet 318 have openings formed therein that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. The back side of the game board 31 is provided with ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 12) that can individually detect the entry of game balls, corresponding to the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, respectively. The game balls that pass through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the outlet 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 and are detected by the outlet ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12), which will be described later. The variable winning hole 316 is provided in the center of the right side of the game board 31, and the game balls shot into the right area of the game board 31 can enter the variable winning hole 316. The game balls that pass through the through-hole 316b of the variable winning hole 316 are guided to the crane device 37 by the guide path 316c (see FIG. 6) described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which the game balls can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) that can individually detect the game balls that pass through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, the game balls shot into the right area of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317, and when the passage of the game ball through the through gate 317 is detected, a normal winning lottery is executed to determine whether or not to open the second winning hole 315.

The entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 are input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command to the payout control device 7 to pay out game balls according to the detection results of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, the detection of the entrance of a game ball by the entrance ball sensors 313a to 316a may be referred to as winning. In addition, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection results of the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here corresponds to the number of launched game balls launched onto the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32.

Furthermore, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) sets a special out ball detection command indicating that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the cranes device 37 described below, and transmits this special out ball detection command to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. 23. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

Note that the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensors capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls using other detection methods.

The second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric device (electric device) 315b that switches between restricting and not restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315. The electric device 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. On the game board 31, the electric device 315b opens to allow game balls to enter the second winning opening 315, and the electric device 315b closes to restrict the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315.

Furthermore, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 that switches whether or not the game ball is restricted from entering the variable winning opening 316. The opening/closing door 319 is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, the opening/closing door 319 allows the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the closing of the opening/closing door 319 restricts the game ball from entering the variable winning opening 316. The opening/closing door 319 is moved to a position that opens the variable winning opening 316 in a round game in the opening/closing execution mode in a jackpot game, and is otherwise kept waiting in a position that closes the variable winning opening 316. As a result, the game ball 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 in a round game in a jackpot game can enter the variable winning opening 316.

5 and 6, the opening and closing door 319 has a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of mounting parts 319d for rotatably mounting the opening and closing door 319 to the game board 31, and when the opening and closing door 319 is in the operating position, it protrudes slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31. As a result, when the opening and closing door 319 is in the operating position, it can receive the game ball 99 that is shot out to the right area of the game board 31. The pair of guard walls 319b extend from the left and right edges of the base 319a, preventing the game ball 99 received by the base 319a from falling off the left and right sides of the base 319a. In addition, the pair of guides 319c guide the game ball 99 received by the base 319a to the variable winning opening 316. The pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable winning opening 316, forming a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. The variable winning opening 316 has a through-hole 316b that discharges the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. This through-hole 316b communicates with a guide path 316c provided on the back side of the game board 31. The guide path 316c extends in the vertical direction D2 and has a lower opening. The game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 enters the variable winning opening 316 and is guided to the crane device 37 via the through-hole 316b and the guide path 316c. The guide path 316c is provided with a ball entry sensor 316a. As a result, the game ball 99 that enters the variable winning opening 316 is detected when it passes through the through-hole 316b and is introduced into the guide path 316c. This ball entry sensor 316a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331. As a result, the detection result of the ball entry sensor 316a is input to the main control unit 331, and the main control unit 331 can detect that the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning opening 316.

In the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensor 314a or the ball entry sensor 315a detects the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, a jackpot lottery is held by the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 then controls the display of the main display section 36 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. The lottery result by the main control unit 331 is also transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34, etc. according to the lottery result.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a detect the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls is 10 when the ball enters the general winning opening 313, the number of prize balls is 3 when the ball enters the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, and the number of prize balls is 10 when the ball enters the variable winning opening 316. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game machine 10 transitions to a jackpot game state (special game state), and the round game (unit game) described below in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or 16 times), so that a large number of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

When a game ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. If the lottery result is a win, the game transitions to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot game state includes a 5R jackpot game state (5R normal jackpot game state and 5R variable jackpot game state) and a 16R variable jackpot game state. The 5R jackpot game state is a game state that includes an open/close execution mode in which the variable winning slot 316 is opened for five rounds (unit games) until a predetermined time has elapsed or until an upper limit number (e.g., 9) or more of game balls enter the variable winning slot 316. The 16R jackpot game state is a game state that includes an open/close execution mode in which 16 rounds of play (unit play) are played, and is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot game state, as more prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in the approximate center of the game board 31. This pattern display section 341 displays still or moving images, and the display content of the pattern display section 341 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the pattern display section 341 performs various image presentations such as a variable display presentation of decorative patterns according to the lottery results in a jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to a ball entering the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, and a variable game presentation performed in conjunction with the variable display presentation. In addition, the pattern display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, the decorative pattern changing display performance in the pattern display section 341 is performed by scrolling multiple types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" in sequence vertically, horizontally, diagonally, etc. Note that secondary patterns such as other letters or designs may be displayed between the decorative patterns. Also, in this embodiment, there are no secondary patterns, and there are nine types of decorative patterns from "1" to "9."

In the gaming machine 10, in variable play, the display of changes in decorative patterns is executed so that the change in all decorative patterns stops after a preset display time has elapsed from the start of the display of changes in patterns in the pattern display section 341. More specifically, in the display of changes in decorative patterns, first, all decorative patterns change along a preset direction of change (e.g., horizontally, vertically, etc.), and the change in multiple decorative patterns stops in sequence. Then, when the change in decorative patterns on all lines has stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the display of changes in the decorative patterns ends.

When the display of the decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 is finished, the decorative patterns are displayed in one or more valid lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative patterns indicates or suggests the result of the lottery in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, if the lottery result is a "5R jackpot", a "16R jackpot", or a "5R normal jackpot", the decorative patterns of the same type are displayed in a lined up on the valid lines, and it is indicated that there is a jackpot. In addition, the type of jackpot may be indicated by the combination of the decorative patterns on the valid lines, but this is not necessarily the case. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", a state in which a pattern combination of, for example, "777", which is set as a pattern combination indicating a 16R jackpot, is displayed in a lined up on the valid lines, or a state in which a combination of the same decorative patterns other than "777" is displayed in a lined up on the valid lines. In addition, if the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot", a state in which a combination of decorative symbols, such as "333", which has been set as a combination of symbols indicating a 5R special jackpot, is lined up on the valid line, or a combination of the same decorative symbols, such as "777" or "333", other than the combination of symbols indicating a 16R special jackpot or a 5R special jackpot, is lined up on the valid line. In addition, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", a combination of the same decorative symbols, such as "222" or "444", which has been set as a combination of symbols indicating a normal jackpot, is lined up on the valid line. In addition, if the lottery result is a "miss", a state in which a combination of different decorative symbols (such as "323" or "723") is lined up on the valid line is displayed.

In addition, in the symbol display section 341, along with the display of the decorative symbols in the variable play, a variable play presentation is displayed that suggests the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. If the lottery result is a "16R variable jackpot" and a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a 16R variable jackpot is displayed along an effective line, a suggestive presentation is executed as a variable play presentation that suggests a 5R variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot. In this case, in the jackpot game presentation, a promotion presentation is executed that clearly shows that the lottery result for the variable play is a 16R variable jackpot. Similarly, if the lottery result is a "5R variable jackpot" and a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a variable jackpot is displayed along an effective line, a suggestive presentation is executed as a variable play presentation that suggests a 5R normal jackpot. In this case, during the jackpot game presentation, an advancement presentation is executed that clearly indicates that the lottery result for that variable game is a 5R guaranteed jackpot.

Furthermore, when the game state transitions to a jackpot game state, the pattern display section 341 displays jackpot game effects including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

It is also possible to provide a magnet sensor or a radio wave sensor (both not shown) on the game board 31. The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 or the variable winning hole 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior when an attempt is made to illegally guide a game ball to the first winning hole 314 or the variable winning hole 316 using a magnet. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior when an attempt is made to illegally input radio waves to the ball entry sensors 314a and 315a to falsely detect the entry of a game ball. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves, for example, from 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

As shown in FIG. 4, the Kroon device 37 distributes game balls that enter the variable winning opening 316 to either the normal out ball opening 378 or the special out ball opening 373 (see FIG. 7 and FIG. 8), which will be described later. Here, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the opening and closing door 319, the Kroon device 37, and the game ball retention section 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is an oblique view of the Kroon device 37, and FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view along the X1-X1 cutting line in FIG. 6.

As shown in Figures 6 to 8, the crane device 37 is dish-shaped and has a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 that surrounds the bottom wall 371. The bottom wall 371 is circular in plan view and has a high bottom portion 371a, a low bottom portion 371b, and a left-downward inclined portion 371c provided between the high bottom portion 371a and the low bottom portion 371b.

The high bottom 371a constitutes the right side portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined downward to the right. The high bottom 371a is provided with a special out ball passage 374 having a special out ball port 373 (special discharge port). This special out ball passage 374 is adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and is provided so as to extend in the up-down direction D2 at the center of the high bottom 371a in the front-rear direction D1. This special out ball passage 374 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. In addition, a first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. This first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retention section 38. The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375a and a lower opening 375b connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The lower opening 375b is provided to the right of the upper opening 375a, and releases the game balls 99 in the special out ball passage 374 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball retention section 38.

It is also possible to provide the first guide member 375 with a function of retaining game balls 99 that cannot be retained in the game ball retention section 38. In this embodiment, a number (specific information) corresponding to a non-set value, which is a game setting value other than the set value, which is a game setting value set in the game machine 10, is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 during a specified period (see FIG. 9) (the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period). In this embodiment, since the number of segments of the 7-segment display section 39 is 7 (excluding the dot point DP), one non-set value can be reliably identified with 7 pieces of information. Also, since the game setting value has 6 stages from 1 to 6, there are 5 non-set values, and therefore all non-set values can be identified with 35 pieces of information. In other words, the game machine 10 is required to be able to present at least 35 pieces of information (a prescribed number). Therefore, it is preferable that the game ball retention section 38 is configured so that a prescribed number or more of game balls 99 can be retained in a specific period (see FIG. 9) described later. However, depending on the arrangement of various members of the gaming machine 10, it may be difficult to configure the game ball retention section 38 to retain a prescribed number or more of game balls 99. In this case, by giving the first guide member 375 a function of storing game balls 99, it is possible to retain a number of game balls 99 that is difficult to achieve using only the game ball retention section 38, using the first guide member 375. This makes it possible to retain a prescribed number or more of game balls 99 in a specific period, and information necessary to identify all non-set values is presented. Similarly, the game balls 99 may also be retained in the special out ball passage 374 to which the first guide member 375 is connected. As a result, when it is difficult to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 due to the arrangement of various components, even by providing the first guide member 375 with a function to retain game balls 99 as well as the game ball retention section 38, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 by using the special out ball passage 374. As a result, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 for a specific period of time, and there is a possibility that the information necessary to identify all non-set values will be presented.

On the other hand, it is also possible to set a limit on the number of game balls 99 that are retained during a specific period. For example, it is possible to set the limit to the specified number (to make the limit equal to the specified number). In this case, for example, when a number of pieces of information (individual pieces of specific information) corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 are presented, information for identifying all non-set values during one specific period may be presented. Also, when a number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that satisfy a specified condition among the game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373, for example, the number that wins the lottery, is presented, information on an expected number according to the probability of winning the lottery is presented, and since the expected number of pieces of information is basically smaller than the specified number, there is a possibility that all of the information necessary to identify all non-set values may not be presented. This makes it possible to prevent the set value from being identified by the entry of game balls 99 into the special out ball port 373 during one specific period, and as a result, it is possible to prevent a player from ending play on the gaming machine 10 early when the set value is low (when the probability of a jackpot is low).

As a means for setting a limit on the number of game balls 99 retained during a specific period, for example, a configuration is adopted in which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, the first guide member 375, and the special out ball passage 374, and when a limited number of game balls 99 enter the special out ball passage 374, the game balls 99 are positioned near the special out ball opening 373 (causing ball clogging) to limit the entry of game balls 99 into the special out ball passage 374. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to limit the number of game balls 99 retained during a specific period to the limited number using a simple mechanical configuration without requiring a complex configuration or control.

On the other hand, the game ball retention section 38 has a retention lane 381 that is inclined downward to the left as described below. In other words, the first guide member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention section 38. The game ball 99 that enters the special out ball port 373 will not enter any of the various winning ports 313 to 316, and will not pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, the game ball 99 that enters the special out ball port 373 is treated as an out ball when it is no longer expected to enter any of the various winning ports 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it is introduced into the special out ball passage 374 (when it is detected by the special out ball sensor 384).

The low bottom 371b constitutes the left side of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined so as to be lower toward the center. The low bottom 371b is provided with a normal passage 376 having a normal out ball port 378. This normal passage 376 is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction D2, except for the portion along the peripheral wall 372 in the low bottom 371b, at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c. This normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99 that enters through the normal out ball port 378 to the back side of the game board 31, and is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a larger opening area than the special out ball port 373. In addition, a second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376. This second guide member 377 collects the game balls 99 that pass through the normal passage 376 to the back side of the game board 31, similar to the game balls that pass through the opening of the out port 318. The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12) and counted as out balls.

In such a Krun device 37, the game ball 99 that is shot out to the right area of the game board 31 and received by the opening and closing door 319 as described above is guided by the guide path 316c. Then, the game ball 99 guided to the Krun device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372. This delays the flow of the game ball 99 down in the Krun device 37. Then, most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 enter the normal out ball port 378, for example, by reducing their kinetic energy or by colliding with the peripheral wall 372 of the Krun device 37 or other game balls 99. The game ball 99 that enters the normal out ball port 378 moves through the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 and is guided to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

Meanwhile, some of the game balls moving on the bottom wall 371 have their direction of movement changed by collisions with the periphery of the normal out ball opening 378 or with other game balls, and enter the special out ball opening 373. The game ball 99 that enters the special out ball opening 373 is released toward the game ball retention section 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375.

Here, the probability of the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 entering the special out ball opening 373 is set to, for example, 0.5% to 5%, preferably 1% to 3%. In other words, the expected number of balls entering the special out ball opening 373 per round of play for 10 rounds is set to, for example, 0.5 to 5, preferably 1 to 3. By setting the ball entry probability or the expected number of balls entering within such a range, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the set value too early, while making it possible to identify the set value realistically. This makes it possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine 10 from being terminated when the set value is identified early, such as when the set value is low, while preventing the game on the gaming machine 10 from being terminated due to boredom caused by the inability to identify the set value.

In this embodiment, the special out ball port 373 is provided at the high bottom 371a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal out ball port 378 has a larger opening area than the special out ball port 373, so that the special out ball port 373 is significantly more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter than the normal out ball port 378. However, instead of or in addition to all or part of these, it is also possible to make it more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball port 373 by other means. For example, it is possible to provide an obstruction means for obstructing the game ball 99 from entering the special out ball port 373 in the periphery of the special out ball port 373. As the obstruction means, for example, an obstacle that obstructs the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball port 373, such as a wall portion surrounding the special out ball port 373, a means for generating a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 in the periphery of the special out ball port 373, and a means for forming an air curtain by spraying air in the periphery of the special out ball port 373 are conceivable.

In addition, an opening/closing section may be provided to open and close the special out ball opening 373, and this opening/closing section may make it difficult for a game ball to enter the special out ball opening 373. In this case, the special out ball opening 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out ball opening 378, and the normal out ball opening 378 may be formed to have the same or approximately the same opening area as the special out ball opening 373.

The distribution means for distributing the game balls 99 that enter the variable winning opening 316 to the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 is not limited to the crane device 37, and may be other means. For example, the balls may be distributed to the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 by adjusting a rotating member or a rotating member such as a switching valve, or the arrangement of nails driven into the game board 31.

As shown in Figures 4 and 8, the game ball retention unit 38 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 and retains the game ball 99 until a specific period has elapsed. After the specific period has elapsed, segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 described below are controlled, and a number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 until the specified period has elapsed. Here, Figure 9 is a diagram for explaining the specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention unit, the specified period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball port of the Kluen device, and the specified period for displaying specific information indicating a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit.

Note that, in the following, with reference to FIG. 9, a specific period is described as a period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, a predetermined period is described as a period during which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 is cumulatively counted, and a "prescribed period" is described as a period during which all or part of a number (specific information) indicating a non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period. However, the "specific period" is not limited to the period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, and the "prescribed period" is not limited to the period during which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 is cumulatively counted. In other words, the "specific period", "prescribed period", and "prescribed period" include at least the periods described below.

9(A) and 9(B), the specific period during which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention section 38 is from the start of the jackpot game (opening) to the end of the open/close execution mode in the jackpot game (the start of the ending), and a specific period is set for each jackpot game that is started in a predetermined period. That is, the start of the specific period is the time when the jackpot game starts, and the end of the specific period is the time when the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game ends (the start of the ending). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(A), in the case of winning a normal jackpot in the low probability mode (when the first hit is a normal single jackpot), the specific period is from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game. Also, as shown in FIG. 9(B), when a special jackpot is won in low probability mode (when the first win is a special jackpot and a jackpot streak begins), for all jackpot games that are played until the jackpot streak ends with a normal jackpot game when a normal jackpot is won in high probability mode, a specific period is set from the start of each jackpot game to the end of the open/close execution mode for that jackpot game. In other words, in a jackpot streak, multiple specific periods are set corresponding to the number of jackpot games played during the jackpot streak.

In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot or the timing of winning, the number of segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39, which corresponds to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during a specific period of one jackpot game, are controlled to be turned on and off at the end of the jackpot game, which is the specified period. In other words, the specified period is set as a period during which the 7-segment display unit 39 displays numbers indicating game setting values (multiple non-set values) other than the game setting value (set value) that specifies the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery set in the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot, based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period.

If the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 during a specific period of one jackpot game is 7 or more and less than 14, a number specifying a game setting value (multiple non-set values) other than the game setting value (set value) that specifies the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery set in the jackpot lottery set in the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending (specified period) after the specific period of the jackpot game has elapsed, according to the display order set in the display order setting process of Figure 36 described below. In addition, in the ending (prescribed period) after the specific period of the jackpot game, if the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 during the specific period of one jackpot game is 14 or more and less than 20, two numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order on the 7-segment display unit 39, if the number is 21 or more and less than 28, three numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order, if the number is 28 or more and less than 35, four numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order, and if the number is 35 or more, five numbers (all numbers) specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order. Note that if the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 during the specific period of one jackpot game is less than seven, no numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the ending (prescribed period) after the specific period of the jackpot game.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, each time a jackpot game is executed, one to five numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values can be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 described later based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 during a specific period, and the set value can be specified by displaying the numbers specifying the five non-set values. For example, the number 1 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 1 is a non-set value, the number 2 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 2 is a non-set value, the number 3 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 3 is a non-set value, the number 4 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 4 is a non-set value, the number 5 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 5 is a non-set value, and the number 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 6 is a non-set value. Also, the five numbers 2 to 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to identify that the non-set values are game set values 2 to 6, and therefore the user can determine that the set value is game set value 1. Similarly, the five numbers 1, 3 to 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to determine that the set value is game set value 2, the five numbers 1, 2, and 4 to 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to determine that the set value is game set value 3, the five numbers 1 to 3, 5, and 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to determine that the set value is game set value 4, the five numbers 1 to 4 and 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to determine that the set value is game set value 5, and the five numbers 1 to 5 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to determine that the set value is game set value 6.

It is also possible to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all segments A to G become the control objects. For example, if segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, when segment A, the first control object, is turned off, the candidates for the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 are "1" and "4". When segment F, the sixth control object, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". In other words, the numbers "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when segment F, the sixth control object, becomes the control object before all segments A to G become the control objects. When segment A, the first control object, is turned on, the candidates for the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 are "2", "3", "5", and "6". Then, when segment B, the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined that the number is either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined that the number is either "5" or "6". Furthermore, when segment C, the third control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "3", and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2". In other words, the numbers "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, the third control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control targets. Furthermore, when segment E, the fifth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "6", and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5". In other words, the numbers "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when segment E, the fifth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control targets. That is, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, which is the third control target, is turned on or off, the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized at the stage when segment E, which is the fifth control target, is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized at the stage when segment F, which is the sixth control target, is turned on or off. In this embodiment, even if a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 become control targets, control for displaying the number of the next priority is not started unless all segments A to G become control targets. As a result, in order to identify all non-set values, more specific conditions need to be satisfied than when control for displaying the number of the next priority is started at the stage when the number corresponding to the non-set value can be grasped. As a result, the difficulty level until all non-set values are identified and thus the difficulty level for recognizing the set value can be increased, so that the set value is prevented from being recognized in a short game time. Therefore, even if the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly learning the set value, which prevents a decrease in playing time on the gaming machine 10 and suppresses a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, when a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 become the control target, control to display the number of the next priority may be started. For example, when the priority of numbers is "1" → "2" → "3" → ..., when it is grasped that the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 is "1" by making segment F, which is the sixth in the control order for the number "1", the control to display the number "2" of the next priority may be started without making segment G, which is the seventh in the control order, the control. However, when segments A to G are controlled to display the number to be displayed next after all segments A to G become the control target, even if the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can be recognized before all segments A to G become the control target, control of segments A to G to display the number to be displayed next is not started until all segments A to G become the control target. Therefore, even if the player recognizes a number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all segments A to G become the control target, information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 to identify the number already recognized by the player until the display of the next number to be displayed begins. In other words, if the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A to G have become the control target, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease during the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. In contrast, if control to display the next number with priority is started when a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 become the control target, segments A to G that do not contribute to guessing the non-set value will not become the control target after one non-set value is identified. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to segments A to G being unnecessarily controlled.

On the other hand, the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode for the normal jackpot. That is, the start of the predetermined period is the time when the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started, and the end of the predetermined period is the time when the opening and closing execution mode for the normal jackpot game is ended (the time when the ending of the normal jackpot game is started). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9 (A), when a normal jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first hit is a normal jackpot and a single jackpot), the predetermined period is from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening and closing execution mode for the jackpot game. That is, in the case of a single jackpot, the predetermined period coincides with the specific period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention section 38. Also, as shown in FIG. 9(B), when a probability variable jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first hit is a probability variable jackpot and a jackpot streak is started), the specified period is the period from when the probability variable jackpot game for the first hit that triggers the jackpot streak to start, to when the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot that triggers the jackpot streak to end, is ended. In other words, in the case of a jackpot streak, the specified period does not coincide with the specific period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention section 38, and is set to multiple periods according to the number of jackpot games that start within the specified period.

When a jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game will not be ended in the middle of the jackpot game or in the middle of a jackpot winning streak. Therefore, a specific period for which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38 is set for each jackpot game, thereby preventing the player from ending the game before the specific period ends. In addition, a specific period for which the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the croon device 37 is cumulatively counted is set from the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open/close execution mode for the jackpot game for a normal jackpot, thereby preventing the player from ending the game before the specific period ends. In the jackpot game, at the ending (prescribed period) after the specific period has elapsed, the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled based on the number of game balls 99 staying in the game ball retention unit 38 during the specific period (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37), and information that allows the non-set value to be specified or guessed (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value) is displayed, and at the ending after the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot has elapsed, information that allows the non-set value to be specified or guessed (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value) is displayed in accordance with the cumulative number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 during the specified period. This prevents the game from ending before the timing at which the non-set value can be specified or guessed, even if a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set value other than the set value can be specified or guessed continues playing the game. Therefore, even if a player does not know the timing at which non-set values can be identified or guessed, the non-set values can be identified or guessed, and by identifying all non-set values, it becomes possible to identify the set values. In addition, it is possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior by other players who play aiming for the timing at which non-set values can be identified or guessed.

In addition, by setting a specific period for each jackpot game that starts in a predetermined period, in the case of consecutive jackpots, the predetermined period is set spanning from the first jackpot to the last jackpot game of the consecutive jackpots. Therefore, in the case of consecutive jackpots, the predetermined period is longer than in the case of a single jackpot, and the more jackpot games are played, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, in the case of consecutive jackpots, the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is more likely to be greater than in the case of a single jackpot, and in the case of consecutive jackpots, the more consecutive jackpots there are, the more likely the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 will be greater. As a result, the more consecutive jackpots there are, the greater the expected value of the game value that can be acquired, and the more information can be obtained to identify or guess the non-set value, making it easier to guess or identify the non-set value and ultimately the set value.

The start of the specific period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention section 38 may be set during a jackpot game, and may be the time when the opening and closing execution mode starts (the opening of the first win ends), not limited to the start of the jackpot game. The end of the specific period may be set during a jackpot game, and may be set during the ending to which the game normally transitions after a jackpot. Preferably, the specific period is set as one section including the opening and closing execution mode for one jackpot game. This allows information for identifying a non-set value to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 after the specific period has elapsed, based on the number of specific conditions that are established in response to the game ball 99 entering the variable winning port 316 in the opening and closing execution mode (based on the number of game balls 99 that have passed through the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37). As a result, in the open/close execution mode, the player can enjoy playing by focusing on whether or not the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373, and after the open/close execution mode ends, that is, after a specific period of time has elapsed, the player can enjoy playing by focusing on the content displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 and identifying or guessing the non-set value based on the displayed content.

The start of the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is not limited to the time when the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode) starts, but may be set to the jackpot game. Preferably, it may be the time when the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode), for example, the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode) starts (the opening of the first hit ends). In this way, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the jackpot game for the first hit, a predetermined period is always set for one first hit, regardless of whether it is a single jackpot or a consecutive jackpot, so that at least one opportunity to guess or identify a non-set value for one first hit is guaranteed.

On the other hand, the end of the specified period is not limited to the end of the open/close execution mode of the normal jackpot game, but may be set during the jackpot game, for example, at the ending of the jackpot game, typically at the ending of the normal jackpot game. The end of the specified period may also be the end of the normal jackpot game (the end of the ending of the jackpot), or the end of the time-saving mode to which the mode is switched after the normal jackpot. In addition, although the present embodiment is described assuming a loop probability variable machine, in other types of gaming machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, and type 1 and type 2 mixed machines, the specified period may be set according to the type of the machine. For example, in a V-ST machine, if there is no V win on the first hit (normal jackpot), the specified period is set in the same way as for a normal jackpot on a loop probability variable machine, and if there is a V win on the first hit (probable probability variable jackpot), the start of the specified period is the start of the first jackpot game or the start of the open/close execution mode, and the end of the specified period is the end of the open/close execution mode on a jackpot without a V win, or the end of a set number of jackpot draws in the high probability mode.

The specified period may also be set to the period during which variable play is executed (the period from the end of a jackpot game to the start of a jackpot game) regardless of the jackpot game. For example, the specified period may be set according to the type of condition (specific condition) under which all or part of the specific information (numbers) indicating a non-set value is displayed, and may be set to the period during which the player stays in the normal game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode) (the period from the end of the time-saving mode to the start of the next jackpot), the period during which the player stays in the time-saving mode (the period from the end of a normal jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game), the period during which the player stays in the low probability mode (the period from the end of a normal jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game), the period until a specified number of jackpot lotteries are drawn in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the period until a specified number of jackpot lotteries are drawn in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, or the period until a specified number of jackpot lotteries are drawn in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Examples of the period include a period until a normal winning lottery is drawn, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the general winning port 313 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the first winning port 314 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the second winning port 315 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, and a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are shot onto the game board 31 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. The predetermined period may also be set for each variable game. That is, the predetermined period may be set from the start of the variable game (the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern) to the end of the variable game (the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern). In this case, the entire period of one variable play may be the specified period, or a portion of one variable play may be the specified period. When a portion of one variable play is the specified period, the specified period may be the period from the start of the display of the decorative pattern to when the decorative pattern reaches a ready state, the period from the start of the display of the decorative pattern to when a development performance such as a special ready state begins, the period from when the decorative pattern reaches a ready state to when a development performance begins, the period from when the decorative pattern reaches a ready state to when a development performance ends, the period during which a development performance is executed, etc.

In this way, by setting a predetermined period during which variable play is executed, it becomes possible to identify or guess non-set values and recognize or guess set values even outside of the period during which jackpot play is executed. This makes it possible to enjoy the progress of play while identifying or guessing non-set values (set values) during the period during which variable play is executed.

When the predetermined period is set as the period during which the variable game is executed, the distribution means such as the Krun device 37 may be provided in a position (for example, the left side area of the game board 31 (above or below the general winning hole 313) or the central area (above or to the side of the first winning hole 314)) where the game ball 99 shot into the left side area of the game board 31 is distributed to the normal out ball hole 378 and the special out ball hole 373 when a left shot is performed in which the game ball 99 shot into the left side area of the game board 31 is shot normally. In this case, the non-set value (set value) can be identified or guessed without performing a special shot (right shot that shoots the game ball 99 into the right side area of the game board 31). This allows the player to enjoy identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while playing the game normally, without reducing the probability of the game ball 99 entering the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314.

The start of the specified period may be set when the main power supply for the gaming machine 10 is turned on, depending on the type of specific condition. The end of the specified period may be set when the main power supply for the gaming machine 10 is turned off, depending on the type of specific condition.

The specific condition is that, instead of the game ball 99 distributed by a distribution means such as the Krun device 37 entering the special out ball port 373 during a specified period, the game ball 99 passes through a specific area other than the special out ball port 373, such as the game ball 99 passing through the through gate 317 or the game ball 99 entering one of the various winning ports 313 to 316.

In addition, the game balls 99 that enter the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314, or that pass through the through gate 317, may be guided to a distribution means such as the Krun device 37, and a specific condition may be that the game balls 99 distributed by the distribution means enter the special out ball hole 373. In this case, too, it is possible to enjoy identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while playing the game as usual, without performing any special shooting.

The specific condition may also be the occurrence of a specific event that may occur during the progress of the game. In this case, the specific event may be either an advantageous or disadvantageous circumstance for the player. If the specific event is an advantageous event for the player, the player may further obtain all or a portion of the specific information indicating a non-set value (set value) in addition to the benefit obtained from the occurrence of the specific event. On the other hand, if the specific event is an disadvantageous event for the player, the player may further obtain all or a portion of the specific information indicating a non-set value (set value) as a remedy for the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the specific event. Specific events may include, for example, winning the jackpot a predetermined number of times (including once) or more (a jackpot game being played a predetermined number of times (including once) or more), winning a special jackpot or regular jackpot a predetermined number of times (a special jackpot or regular jackpot game being played a predetermined number of times (including once) or more), reaching a predetermined number of consecutive jackpots (winning a special jackpot a predetermined number of times in succession before winning a regular jackpot), reaching a predetermined number of jackpot draws before winning a jackpot, winning more than the upper limit of 99 balls (over-winning) during a round of play in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game, etc.

The specific event may be the execution of a specific effect that is set in advance in a variable game or a jackpot game. The specific effect in this case is not particularly limited, and may be set to any of a non-reach effect and a reach effect, and may be set to any of an opening effect, a round game effect, and an ending effect. Typically, the specific effect may be a premium effect in which a jackpot or a guaranteed jackpot is confirmed in a variable game effect, or an effect that indicates that a reserved consecutive win will be executed after the end of the jackpot game in a jackpot game (the reserved wins include the lottery result of the jackpot at a specific time point of the jackpot game, such as the start of the jackpot game, the start of the open/close execution mode, the end of the open/close execution mode, or the end of the jackpot game). Furthermore, the specific event may be a stop display or a provisional stop display (intermediate stop display) of a decorative pattern in a specific combination on the pattern display unit 341. For example, in the symbol display section 341, when the decorative symbol is stopped at "777", when it is stopped at a specific out-of-reach number such as "767", when it is stopped at a specific non-out-of-reach number (variable number) such as "367", and when a development effect such as a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed as a reach effect, a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development effect will be executed is possible. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development effect will be executed, for example, such as "7 development 7", where the decorative symbols on the left and right are temporarily stopped (intermediate stop display) in a reach state, and a symbol indicating that a development effect such as "development" will be executed as the center symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, the specific condition may be the occurrence of multiple specific events of a specific combination.

The specific condition may also be satisfied in relation to a set value. In other words, the specific condition may include a set value, and may be satisfied, for example, when a specific event occurs at a specific set value. In this case, while the type of specific condition depends on the set value, the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 is determined by the set value, as described below. Therefore, the numbers indicating non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in different orders depending on the type of specific condition. This makes it possible to set the display order for each set value, for example, based on whether the probability of winning a jackpot is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple numbers indicating non-set values for each set value.

In addition, the specified period during which the specific information or a part of it (special information) indicating a non-set value is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied is not limited to being set for each ending of a jackpot game, and may be set at other times, depending on the relationship with the specified period, the relationship with the specific period, or the relationship with a specific condition. For example, the specified period may be only the ending of a 5R normal jackpot game, in which the end of the specified period is typically set after the passage of a specified period as described in the second embodiment below, or may be other than a jackpot game, for example, after the end of a jackpot game. In addition, when the specified period is set to the execution period of a variable game, the specified period may be, for example, the start of the change of the decorative pattern in the variable game, the timing of the temporary stop display when the decorative pattern is in a reach state, the timing when the development performance such as the super reach performance or the special reach performance starts, or during the execution of the development performance. In other words, the specified period may be set to the period during which a variable game is executed. When the specified period is set to the period during which a variable game is executed, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating a non-set value together with the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, when the result of a big win lottery is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by displaying a changing decorative symbol, it is also possible to simultaneously display specific information on the symbol display unit 341. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the variable game by displaying the specific information.

Here, Fig. 10(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line in Fig. 8, Fig. 10(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line in Fig. 8 when the stopper portion 383 described below is in the upper limit position, and Fig. 10(C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line in Fig. 8 when the stopper portion 383 is in the lower limit position. The configuration of the game ball retention portion 38 will be described below with reference to Figs. 6 and 8 in addition to Fig. 10.

As shown in Figures 6, 8, and 10, the game ball retention section 38 retains game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 for a specific period of time, and includes a retention lane 381, a discharge lane 382, and a stopper section 383.

The retention lane 381 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 and allows the game ball 99 to stay. The retention lane 381 is open at the top and inclined downward to the left. The retention lane 381 has a depth dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and at least a part of the game ball 99 that has stayed in the retention lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4). This makes it possible to visually confirm that the game ball 99 has been retained in the retention lane 381, and also makes it possible to visually confirm the number of retained game balls 99, that is, the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 within a specific period. In addition, it is preferable that the retention lane 381 is formed transparently using resin or the like. This makes it easier to grasp the number of game balls 99 that have been retained in the retention lane 381. Instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 visible, the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed. The number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed, for example, by the number of lit lamps, or by displaying an image on the pattern display unit 341.

The discharge lane 382 is connected to the left end of the retention lane 381 and guides the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 to a predetermined location, such as a position where they can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

In addition, the discharge lane 382 is provided with a special out ball sensor 384. This special out ball sensor 384 detects the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 when they move along the discharge lane 382. In other words, the special out ball sensor 384 is used to count the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls that enter the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 within a specific period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the MPU 41 monitors the output from the special out ball sensor 384, so that the MPU 41 determines whether the game balls 99 have moved along the discharge lane 382. In addition, when the special out ball sensor 384 detects a game ball 99, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command and transmits this special out ball detection command to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives a special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls and controls the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of special out balls and the setting value (see the command determination process of FIG. 37 and the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40).

The special out ball sensor 384 may be, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor, but the game ball 99 may be detected by other detection methods (for example, an optical sensor). The special out ball sensor 384 may also be connected to the sound lamp control device 5. In this case, the special out ball detection command is not set in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, but the sound lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384.

The stopper portion 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is moved up and down between an upper limit position and a lower limit position by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. The upper limit position is a position where the tip protrudes upward, and when the stopper portion 383 is at the upper limit position, it is possible to retain the game ball 99 in the retention lane 381 (see FIG. 10(B)). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip does not protrude upward, and when the stopper portion 383 is at the lower limit position, it is possible for the game ball 99 in the retention lane 381 to be discharged via the discharge lane 382 (see FIG. 10(C)). The game ball 99 guided to the discharge lane 382 is then guided to a position where it can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

The means for allowing the game ball 99 to be retained in the retention lane 381 and for allowing the game ball 99 in the retention lane 381 to be discharged to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the stopper portion 383 that can move up and down, and may be other means such as a stopper portion that can move forward and backward, or a stopper portion that can rotate between an upright state and a prone state. Also, the game ball 99 may be retained by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 may be discharged by releasing the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force. Furthermore, by configuring the retention lane 381 to be movable up and down, it is possible to realize a state in which the game ball 99 is retained and a state in which it is discharged. For example, the retention lane 381 may be configured to wait at a lower position than the discharge lane 382 to retain the game ball 99, while the retention lane 381 may be configured to move to a higher position than the discharge lane 382 to move the game ball 99 to the discharge lane 382. Alternatively, an opening may be provided in the game board 31 through which the game ball 99 can be discharged to the rear side of the game board 31, and the retention lane 381 may be configured to be movable up and down between a position where the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 and a position where the game ball 99 can be discharged from the opening to the rear side of the game board 31. Also, instead of the retention lane 381, a box-shaped movable body may be moved to set the game ball 99 in a state where it can be retained in the movable body and a state where it can be discharged to the rear side of the game board 31.

Here, FIG. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a seven-segment display unit 39 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of numbers displayed on the seven-segment display unit, and FIG. 11(C) is a diagram showing an example of alphabets displayed on the seven-segment display unit.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), the seven-segment display unit 39 is made up of seven segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each segment A to G and dot point DP can be individually turned on and off, and can display at least the numbers 1 to 6 as shown in FIG. 11(B), and at least the letters A to F as shown in FIG. 11(C). In this embodiment, the seven-segment display unit 39 displays numbers (specific information) indicating each of the multiple (six) game setting values (numerical information) corresponding to the jackpot probability (see FIG. 14(A) and FIG. 14(B)) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, other than the game setting value (setting value (predetermined numerical information)) set to determine the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10, by lighting or turning off each of the segments A to G. Specifically, in the seven-segment display unit 39, when the non-set value is the game setting value 1, the segments B and C are lit to display the number 1, when the non-set value is the game setting value 2, the segments A, B, D, E, and G are lit to display the number 2, when the non-set value is the game setting value 3, the segments A to G are lit to display the number 3, when the non-set value is the game setting value 4, the segments B, C, F, and G are lit to display the number 4, when the non-set value is the game setting value 5, the segments A, C, D, F, and G are lit to display the number 5, and when the non-set value is the game setting value 6, the segments A, C to G are lit to display the number 6. In this embodiment, when the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed, the dot point DP is lit to clearly indicate that the number corresponding to the non-set value has been displayed.

In addition, the numbers corresponding to non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 are displayed in an order that is determined when the main power is turned on (when the power is turned on) or when the set value is changed, as described below (see Figures 35 and 36). Also, as described below, the control order for turning on or off each of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 is set (fixed) to segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment E, segment F, and segment G.

In the seven-segment display unit 39, the segments corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 during a predetermined period (the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during a predetermined period) are controlled to be turned on and off, as described below, and a number or a part of a number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Here, the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 indicates a non-set value other than the set value after the game set value. Therefore, the part of the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 does not indicate the game set value, but indicates a part of specific information indicating a non-set value, and corresponds to an indication of special information. In other words, the special information is displayed using a part of the multiple segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39. In this way, by displaying not only the number indicating the non-set value but also a part of the number (special information) on the seven-segment display unit 39, the player can not only identify the non-set value when a number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, but also guess the non-set value based on the part of the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Therefore, even if no numbers are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, players can enjoy guessing the non-set value based on part of the number, which increases the fun of the game.

In addition, whether or not each segment A to G is a control target in the seven-segment display unit 39 may or may not be clearly indicated to the player. When it is clearly indicated that each segment A to G is a control target, it is easier to guess the set value compared to when it is not clearly indicated. In this embodiment, the control order of each segment A to G is fixed, so a method is adopted that does not clearly indicate that each segment A to G is a control target, making it difficult to guess the set value. When it is clearly indicated to the player that each segment A to G is a control target, for example, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the segment is a control target by making the controlled segment blink, or to clearly indicate to the player that the segment is a control target by lighting it in a color different from when the controlled segment is lit.

In addition, the 7-segment display unit 39 may display information for identifying the non-set value with an alphabet corresponding to the non-set value. For example, the letter A may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 1, the letter B may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 2, the letter C may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 3, the letter D may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 4, the letter E may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 5, and the letter F may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 6 (see FIG. 11(C)).

The main display unit 36 includes a normal symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, a first reserved number display unit 364, and a second reserved number display unit 365, which are located in the upper right corner of the game board 31.

The normal symbol display section 361 includes a pair of LEDs representing normal symbols (normal symbols), and displays the result of a normal symbol winning lottery, which is triggered by winning through the through gate 317 and determines whether or not to open the electric role 315b, by a combination of turning on and off the LED pairs. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the LED pairs (displaying a normal symbol in a variable manner) when a player wins through the through gate 317, and displays the result of the normal symbol winning lottery by turning on or off each LED after the variable display time has elapsed.

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a seven-segment display device as the first special symbol (first special symbol), and displays the result of the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be played, which is triggered by a win in the first winning slot 314, by a combination of lighting and extinguishing seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the seven-segment display device to flash (display the first special symbol in a variable manner) in response to a win in the first winning slot 314, and displays the result of the jackpot lottery by lighting or extinguishing each segment after the variable display time has elapsed.

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a seven-segment display device as the second special symbol (second special symbol), and displays the result of the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be played, which is triggered by a win in the second winning port 315, by a combination of lighting and extinguishing seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the seven-segment display device to flash (display the second special symbol in a variable manner) in response to a win in the second winning port 315, and displays the result of the jackpot lottery by lighting or extinguishing each segment after the variable display time has elapsed.

The first reserved number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reserved number N of the first special chart, which is displayed in a variable manner due to a winning entry into the first winning slot 314, by the number of lit LEDs.

The second reserved number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reserved number M of the second special chart, which changes in display due to a winning entry into the second winning slot 315, by the number of lit LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3 , the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140 .

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23. When the upper tray 23 is saturated with game balls, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.

As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the power supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level and supplies it to the control device and drive means provided within the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control unit 331]
12, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transitioning to a preset jackpot game state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is a calculation device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 41 also has a built-in ROM 411 and RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Also, some or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main control device 4 and outputs control signals from the main control device 4. The input/output I/F 42 is also connected to the ball entry sensors 313a-317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384. The MPU 41 determines whether balls have entered the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316, and whether the game ball 99 has passed through the through gate 317, based on the detection signal from the ball entry sensor 313a-317a. The MPU 41 also counts the number of out balls (number of shot balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. The input/output I/F 42 is also connected to the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the shot control device 8, and the power supply control device 9.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands to the audio lamp control device 5, such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot play start command, a round play start command, a round play end command, an ending start command, a jackpot play end command, a special out ball detection command, and a setting value change command.

The variation pattern command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and includes information regarding the jackpot type if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 of the variation start process in FIG. 26 described below, based on information stored in the reserve storage area 412b described below, when the main display unit 36 starts displaying the varying patterns. The variation pattern command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command separate from the variation pattern command.

The first and second hold commands are commands that notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery results, fluctuation pattern, and hold number N or hold number M in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold when the hold number N or hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described below increases. The first and second hold commands are set based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described below when there is an increase in the hold number N or hold number M (step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process in FIG. 22 described below).

The shift command is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the win/lose information indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 or the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 has shifted when the reserved number N or reserved number M decreases. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process in FIG. 25 described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game is about to start, i.e., that the game state is about to transition to a jackpot game state, and is set in the game state transition process in the main process of FIG. 23 described below when transitioning to the jackpot game state. In addition, since the jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game is about to start, by receiving the jackpot game start command, the voice and lamp control device 5 can know that not only the jackpot game is about to start, but also that the opening is about to start. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the voice and lamp control device 5 may know that the opening is about to start by the opening start command.

The round game start command is a command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 of the start of each round game in the open/close execution mode in the jackpot game, and of round number information indicating which round the round game is, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process in FIG. 23 described later. Note that the sound lamp control device 5 can know that the opening ends and the open/close execution mode starts by the round game start command, but it is also possible to set an opening end command at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command, or to set an open/close execution mode start command at the start of the open/close execution mode. Also, a command indicating the round number of the round game that is about to start may be set separately from the round game start command at the start of the round game, and the command may be sent to the sound lamp control device 5.

The round play end command is a command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 that the corresponding round play is to end in the open/close execution mode during jackpot play, and is set in the jackpot play control process in the main process in Figure 23 described below.

The jackpot game end command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is ending, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later.

The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the cranes device 37, and is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20 described later. The voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a specified period based on the special out ball detection command, and determines the control content in the 7-segment display unit 39.

The setting value change command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the setting value has been changed and the changed setting value, and is set in step S1710 of the setting value change process in Figure 27 described below.

Note that commands other than those mentioned above may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

The main control device 4 also includes an oscillator circuit and a frequency divider circuit as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillator circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillator circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution period of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 (described below) is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the divider circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (e.g., 4 msec), and the MPU 41 starts and executes the main timer interrupt process described below every time the clock signal rises (or falls). Note that the oscillator circuit and divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply operating clocks for the main controls in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. A clock signal may also be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for the processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the voice lamp control device 5, etc. The RAM 412 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

Now, referring to FIG. 13, the storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform the jackpot lottery and the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 performs the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time, etc., using the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the reserved storage area 412b, and the electric role reserved area 412c of the RAM 412.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used to select a jackpot, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, and a reach random number counter C3 used to determine the type of miss. The lottery counter 412a also includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variable type counter CS1 that determines the variable display time in the main display unit 36 and the pattern display unit 341. The lottery counter 412a also includes a normal win random number counter C4 used to select whether the electric role 315b of the second winning port 315 is in an open electric role state, and a normal win initial value counter CIN2 used to set the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they will be simply referred to as counters.

Counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referenced by the MPU 41 when drawing big wins and setting the variable display time, etc.

The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of variable play in which a jackpot lottery is held based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA and the first special symbol display unit 362 displays a variable display and a stop display may be referred to as a first special symbol play. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is held based on the values stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the second special symbol display unit 363 displays a variable and stationary display may be referred to as a second special symbol game.

When a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as the winning/losing information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in one of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as the winning/losing information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in one of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB. The winning/losing information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 41, which functions as the determination means of the present invention, by executing a process according to the control program. In addition, a lottery counter 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, etc.) may be provided separately for each of the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is stored in one of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA and the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB.

Therefore, in addition to the lottery results of the jackpot lottery for the 19 variable games executed based on the win/lose information stored in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 and the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variable display time) of the variable pattern display displayed on the pattern display unit 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the winning/losing information is stored in an available area in the order of priority from the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. The number of holding areas NAA in which winning/losing information is stored is stored as the holding number N.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning slot 315, the winning/losing information is stored in the free area in the order of priority of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. The number of holding areas REB1 to REB4 in which winning/losing information is stored is stored as the holding number M in the holding number storage area NAB.

In other words, the gaming machine 10 can hold up to four pieces of winning/losing information as winning history for the first winning slot 314 and the second winning slot 315, using a total of eight memory areas corresponding to the maximum number of reserved jackpots in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4.

In another embodiment, a holding area with a maximum holding capacity of eight is provided in common to the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315, and in this case, it is possible to hold a total of up to eight pieces of winning/losing information as winning history. The process of storing the winning/losing information is performed by the MPU 41 by executing a process according to the control program.

The execution area AE is a memory area used to move the winning/losing information stored in the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the display of changing patterns in the main display unit 36 and the pattern display unit 341 begins. Specifically, the winning/losing information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE with priority, and when there is no winning/losing information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB and the number of reserved items memory area NAB is 0, the winning/losing information in the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

In addition, in another embodiment, if the difference between the reserved number M stored in the reserved number memory area NAA of the first reserved storage area REA and the reserved number N stored in the reserved number memory area NAB of the second reserved storage area REB is 2 or more, the value of the reserved area with the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. In another embodiment, the win/loss information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one round of variable play, the MPU41 performs a lottery for a big win based on the numerical information stored as win/lose information in the execution area AE. At this time, if the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the win/lose information stored in the second reserved area REA2 shifts to the first reserved area REA1, the win/lose information stored in the third reserved area REA3 shifts to the second reserved area REA2, and the win/lose information stored in the fourth reserved area REA4 shifts to the third reserved area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the winning/losing information stored in the second reserved area REB2 shifts to the first reserved area REB1, the winning/losing information stored in the third reserved area REB3 shifts to the second reserved area REB2, and the winning/losing information stored in the fourth reserved area REB4 shifts to the third reserved area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 637, and is reset to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1 (0 to 738). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b when the game ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

The random number value that will result in a jackpot is set to two types, corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode, which is a guaranteed jackpot state, according to the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table storage area in ROM 411. Here, FIG. 14(A) shows an example of the low probability mode win/lose table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 14(B) shows an example of the high probability mode win/lose table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 14(A) and FIG. 14(B), a plurality of win/lose tables are provided as a low probability mode win/lose table and a high probability mode win/lose table, in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot probability) varies according to the game setting value. The low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table each include six win/lose tables corresponding to the six game setting values 1 to 6. The game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1 have a higher jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, in that order, which is advantageous for the player.

At game setting value 1, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 206 (0-205) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 821 (0-820) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/318.1 (206/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/79.9 (820/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

In game setting value 2, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 212 (0-211) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 845 (0-844) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, in game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/77.6 (845/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

In game setting value 3, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 218 (0-217) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 869 (0-868) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, in game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/75.4 (869/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

At game setting value 4, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 224 (0-223) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 893 (0-892) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/292.6 (224/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/73.4 (893/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

At game setting value 5, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 230 (0-229) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 917 (0-916) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/284.9 (230/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/71.5 (917/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

At game setting value 6, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 236 (0-235) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 941 (0-940) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/277.7 (236/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/69.6 (941/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a random number other than the ones that result in a jackpot win, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

Here, the low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table share the same random numbers that will result in a jackpot in a jackpot lottery for the same game setting value, but it is also possible that the random numbers that will result in a jackpot are not the same. Also, the random numbers that will result in a jackpot may not be consecutive values, but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

Although six low probability mode win/lose tables and six high probability mode win/lose tables are provided corresponding to the six game setting values, it is sufficient if there is at least one win/lose table for each mode. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six levels. It is also possible to provide multiple low probability mode win/lose tables corresponding to multiple game setting value levels, while providing one high probability mode win/lose table. In other words, it is also possible to provide multiple game setting value levels for the low probability mode, and not provide multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode, with a uniform jackpot probability. Of course, it is also possible to provide a uniform jackpot probability in the low probability mode, and multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 19, and is reset to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b when the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two jackpot types, the special jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area in the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 14(C) is a diagram showing an example of the allocation table. In the example shown in FIG. 14(C), when the type of variable play is the first special symbol play triggered by winning the first winning slot 314, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 numbers from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that will result in a 16R probability variable jackpot is 5 numbers from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of variable play is the second special symbol play triggered by winning the second winning slot 315, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R probability variable jackpot is 5 numbers from 0 to 4, the number of fourth random numbers that will result in a 16R probability variable jackpot is 10 numbers from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability machine in which the probability of a probability jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Also, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a 16R probability jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that in the first special symbol game. That is, in the probability jackpot game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric role 315b is high), the expected value of winning game balls in the case where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is set higher than in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric role 315b is low).

In this embodiment, an individual allocation table is set for the first winning slot 314, which triggers the first special symbol game upon winning, and the second winning slot 315, which triggers the second special symbol game upon winning. The allocation probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball wins into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, but it is also possible that the allocation probability of the jackpot type is the same for the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop probability machine, and it is also possible to configure it as a so-called ST machine, V-ST machine, type 1 and type 2 mixed machine, etc.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R sure jackpot", a "16R sure jackpot", a "5R normal jackpot", or a "miss".

Here, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened is repeated five times during the jackpot game. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R variable jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game is repeated 16 times during the jackpot game.

In the case of a 5R or 16R guaranteed jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a guaranteed jackpot game state, which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning the jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric roler 315b. In this embodiment, the guaranteed jackpot game state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R guaranteed jackpot", a "16R guaranteed jackpot", or a "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a time-saving game state in which the game is in a low probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is low and in a high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric device 315b is high. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) continues until the results of the jackpot lottery a preset number of times, such as 50 or 100 times, have been notified to the player, or ends when the player is informed that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot before the specified number of times has elapsed.

Incidentally, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine, rather than a loop probability variable machine, after the end of the jackpot game during the probability variable jackpot, a preset number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 50 times, 100 times) are executed in the probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), and if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot before the specified number of times has elapsed, the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, as another embodiment, a lottery for falling from the probability variable game state to the time-saving game state or the normal game state can be considered in variable play. Note that if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, there is no transition to the jackpot game state or the time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 will be described as having three types of jackpots: a 5R special jackpot, a 16R special jackpot, and a 5R regular jackpot. However, the invention is not limited to this, and other jackpot types, such as a 2-round special jackpot, a 2-round regular jackpot, and a 16R regular jackpot, may also be considered.

The reach random number counter C3 is incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and is reset to 0 after it reaches a maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b when the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stopping result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a miss. Specifically, the miss type table stored in the miss type table storage area in the ROM 411 sets the values of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to three types of miss types: a front-back miss reach in which the final stopping symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, a non-front-back miss reach in which the final stopping symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and a complete miss in which no reach occurs.

Here, FIG. 14(D) is a diagram showing an example of a miss type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14(D), the random number value for a front or rear miss reach is 0 to 8, the random number value for a reach other than a front or rear miss is 9 to 38, and the random number value for a complete miss is 39 to 238. Note that in variable play in which a 5R special jackpot, a 16R special jackpot, or a 5R regular jackpot is won, that is, in variable play that transitions to an open/close execution mode, the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, the term "reach" refers to a state in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating a big win is likely to occur between the start of the display of the symbols in the symbol display section 341 and the stop display of the symbols. In one example, the same symbols are displayed in two of the three stop positions on the pay line in the symbol display section 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining stop position changes. In addition, during the reach change state in the symbol display section 341, a story presentation process is executed in which a video of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, and a player-participation type operation presentation process is executed in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the presentation. Note that, during the execution of these presentation processes, the display of the variable symbols in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged form.

The electric reel opening counter C4 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 250, and is reset to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. The electric reel opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric reel holding area 412c in the RAM 412 when a game ball enters the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the electric reel 315b will be opened for a predetermined time, based on the value of the electric reel opening counter C4 stored in the electric reel holding area 412c. For example, a win is considered when the electric reel opening counter C4 is between 0 and 199, and a loss is considered when the electric reel opening counter C4 is between 200 and 250.

The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 199, and is reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the pattern variation display displayed on the pattern display unit 341 according to the lottery result of the big win lottery. In this way, by determining the variation pattern type, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the rough variation game presentation type such as high-speed variation presentation (basic presentation, non-reach presentation), normal reach presentation, super reach presentation, and special reach presentation according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern by referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a special jackpot variation table, or a miss variation table prestored in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these variation tables may be provided separately for the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Also, a special jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R special jackpot and the 16R special jackpot.

Here, Fig. 15(A), Fig. 15(B) and Fig. 15(C) are diagrams showing examples of a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a special jackpot fluctuation table and a miss fluctuation table. As shown in Fig. 15(A), Fig. 15(B) and Fig. 15(C), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the special jackpot fluctuation table and the miss fluctuation table, a fluctuation pattern is previously associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the MPU41 refers to the normal jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R normal jackpot", the special jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot" or a "16R special jackpot", and the miss fluctuation table when the lottery result is a "miss", respectively, to identify the type of fluctuation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(A) and FIG. 15(B), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the guaranteed jackpot fluctuation table, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Here, when the fluctuation pattern "01" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the normal reach performance pattern with a fluctuation display time of 30 s as the fluctuation type (performance pattern type), and the normal reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variable game performance is a normal reach performance. Also, when the fluctuation pattern "02" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the super reach performance pattern with a fluctuation display time of 60 s as the fluctuation type (performance pattern type), and the super reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variable game performance is a super reach performance. Furthermore, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach presentation pattern, which has the longest variation display time of 90 seconds, as the variation type (presentation pattern), and executes the special reach presentation pattern on the symbol display unit 341. The special reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a special reach presentation.

As shown in FIG. 15(C), in the miss variation table, the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern is determined for each stop type at the time of miss (reach of miss before and after, reach other than reach of miss before and after, complete miss) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of miss is reach of miss before and after or reach other than miss before and after, one of the variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of miss is complete miss, one of the variation patterns "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach performance pattern (non-reach performance pattern) with a variation display time of 7 s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the non-reach performance pattern is executed in the pattern display unit 341. Furthermore, when the variation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach presentation pattern (non-reach presentation pattern) with a variation display time of 10 seconds as the variation type (presentation pattern type), and the non-reach presentation pattern is executed on the symbol display unit 341.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the losing variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "04", a losing pattern variable display is executed in which the variable display stops at a losing symbol without a notice effect in which a character, message, etc. is displayed. Also, in the gaming machine 10, as the losing variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "05", a losing pattern variable display is executed in which the variable display stops at a losing symbol accompanied by a notice effect in which a character, message, etc. is displayed. Also, when the losing variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "05" is executed, a player participation type operation effect in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected may be executed as a notice effect.

The types of variation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C). In addition, a special jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R special jackpot and the 16R special jackpot.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach presentations with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach presentations executed in the normal reach presentation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "01", and one of the normal reach presentations selected from among them is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of super reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the super reach effects executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "02", and one of the super reach effects selected from them is executed. The super reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is higher than in the normal reach effect, and the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is lower than in the special reach effect.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of special reach effects with different characters and stories are prepared as the special reach effects executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "03", and one of the special reach effects selected from them is executed. The special reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is an effect that develops from, for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation level) of winning the jackpot is higher than with the normal reach effect or the special reach effect.

In addition, the presentation patterns corresponding to the variation patterns may include player participation type operation presentations, such as an operation presentation in which the operation status of the player on the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, for example, a single operation presentation in which a single operation is reflected in the presentation, a rapid-fire operation presentation in which the rapid-fire operation of the player on the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, and a long press operation presentation in which the operation of the player long-pressing the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation.

Then, when the MPU 41 identifies a variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 and the symbol display section 341 of the main display section 36, it inputs a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "A01" to "A03" in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added before the variation pattern "01" to "03". Also, if the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "B01" to "B03" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R special jackpot is added before the variation pattern "01" to "03". Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "16R guaranteed jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the fluctuation pattern commands "C01" to "C03," which have a "C" before the fluctuation pattern "01" to "03," indicating that it is a 16R guaranteed jackpot. If the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 outputs one of the fluctuation pattern commands "D01" to "D05," which have a "D" before the fluctuation pattern "01" to "05," indicating that it is a miss. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and determines the details of the fluctuation mode, such as the fluctuation type and performance type, displayed on the pattern display unit 341, based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, plays a sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the fluctuation display, and turns on, blinks, or turns off the illumination unit 27.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process to determine the variation pattern (variation display time) for the variation display in the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured with an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big win lottery. In addition, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed in the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes.

Here, FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The game information storage area 412d stores game information related to game history, ball output performance, etc. In this embodiment, the game information storage area 412d stores the game information such as "number of out balls", "number of balls paid out from the general winning port", "number of balls paid out from the first winning port", "number of balls paid out from the second winning port", "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port", "set value", "base information", "sequential role ratio information", "role ratio information", "cumulative number of jackpot lotteries", "number of unit jackpot lotteries", "number of jackpots", and "number of consecutive misses". Of this game information, "set value", "base information", "sequential role ratio information", "role ratio information", and "number of unit jackpot lotteries" correspond to game information (performance information) related to ball output performance.

The "number of out balls" is the cumulative number of game balls that have been released onto the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a count of the number of out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20, which will be described later.

The "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the general winning port 313 in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). When a winning into the general winning port 313 is detected by the ball entry sensor 313a in normal game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to a winning into the general winning port 313 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the first winning port 314 in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). When a winning into the first winning port 314 is detected by the ball entry sensor 314a in normal game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning into the first winning port 314 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the second winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the second winning port 315 in the time-saving play state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). When a winning into the second winning port 315 is detected by the ball entry sensor 315a in the time-saving play state, this "number of balls paid out from the second winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning into the second winning port 315 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the variable winning port 316 during a jackpot game state. When a winning into the variable winning port 316 is detected by the ball entry sensor 316a during a jackpot game state, this "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to a winning into the variable winning port 316 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "setting value" is used to select the low probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(A)) and high probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (win/lose determination). In other words, the "setting value" specifies the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and high probability mode. In this embodiment, six setting values (six types of low probability mode win/lose tables (see FIG. 14(A)) and high probability mode win/lose tables (see FIG. 14(B)) with different jackpot probabilities) are prepared as described below. The "setting value" is updated during the setting value change process in FIG. 27 described below.

"Base information" is information about the "base", which is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and this "base" is the ratio of the combined number of paid balls of the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" and the "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" to the "number of balls out" in the normal game mode. The "base" can be expressed mathematically as "base" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the general winning port" + "number of balls paid out from the first winning port") / "number of balls out". "Base information" includes information about the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the 60,000 ball base B2 before last. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the 60,000 ball base B2 before last are updated each time the number of balls out reaches 60,000 balls in the specific performance information update process of Figure 28 described below (steps S1805 and S1806). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the number of out balls two balls before that reaches 60,000 balls is the second previous 60,000 ball base B2, and each is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. Also, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. Also, when the counter value of the number of out balls is calculated as the current base BL until it reaches 60,000 balls, the "base information" stores the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port", "number of balls paid out from the first winning port", and "number of out balls" for base calculation, in addition to the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port", "number of balls paid out from the first winning port", and "number of out balls" described above.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes the "current base BL", the "previous 60,000 ball base B1", and the "second-previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball bases are kept as history, but it is also possible to keep three or more past 60,000 ball bases as history. In addition, the "base information" may include the cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present.

The "continuous feature ratio information" is information on the "continuous feature ratio," which is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable feature port to the total number of balls paid out from all the feature ports (general feature port 313, first feature port 314, second feature port 315, and variable feature port 316) that pay out prize balls. The "continuous feature ratio" can be expressed mathematically as "continuous feature ratio" = 100 x "number of balls paid out from variable feature port" / "total number of balls paid out." The "continuous feature ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described below. In this embodiment, the "continuous feature ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous feature ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "sequential feature ratio information" may be the consecutive feature ratio for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100 times), the period until a certain number of jackpot draws are performed in normal game mode (e.g., 1,000 times), or the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "sequential feature ratio information" may include both the cumulative consecutive feature ratio and the consecutive feature ratio for a certain period.

The "functionality ratio information" is information on the "functionality ratio," which is the ratio of the combined number of balls paid out from the second winning port and the variable winning port to the total number of balls paid out from all winning ports (general winning port 313, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, and variable winning port 316) that pay out prize balls. The "functionality ratio" can be expressed as a formula: "functionality ratio" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the second winning port" + "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port") / "total number of balls paid out." The "functionality ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described below. In this embodiment, the "functionality ratio information" is stored as the cumulative functionality ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "function ratio information" may be the function ratio for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100 times), the period until a certain number of jackpot draws are performed in normal game mode (e.g., 1,000 times), or the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "successive function ratio information" may include both the cumulative function ratio and the function ratio for a certain period of time.

The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is the number of jackpot draws that have been performed in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) since the gaming machine 10 was started before the opening of the gaming hall until the present. In other words, the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is also the cumulative number of times that the pattern change display of the first special pattern display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 has been executed in response to a winning entry into the first winning slot 314 in the normal game mode. The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is incremented by one each time the pattern change display of the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 of the change start process in FIG. 26, which will be described later. In addition, the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "unit number of jackpot draws" is the number of times a jackpot draw is received triggered by winning the first winning slot 314 (the number of times the pattern change display of the first special pattern display unit of the main display unit 36 is executed) per a certain number of negative difference balls in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). In this embodiment, the certain number is "250 balls", and the difference balls is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "number of balls paid out to the general winning slot" and the "number of balls paid out to the first winning slot" from the "number of out balls". In other words, the "unit number of jackpot draws" is the number of times the first special pattern change display of the first special pattern display unit 362 is displayed (the number of times a jackpot draw is received) on average for 1000 yen when 250 balls are lent for 1000 yen at a game hall. The "unit number of jackpot draws" may be the number of times a jackpot draw is received per a certain number of "out balls" in the normal game state. The "number of unit jackpot draws" is updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described later. In this embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot draws" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "number of unit jackpot draws" may be for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpot draws (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot draws (for example, 1,000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state, or a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, both the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws and the number of unit jackpot draws in a certain period may be stored as gaming information as the "number of unit jackpot draws".

The "number of jackpots" is the number of times that a jackpot has been drawn in the jackpot lottery conducted from the time the gaming machine 10 was started before the opening of the amusement hall until the present time. The "number of jackpots" is incremented by one each time the gaming state is transitioned to a jackpot gaming state in the gaming state transition process executed in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23 described below. In addition, the "number of jackpots" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "number of consecutive misses" is the number of consecutive misses in the jackpot lottery in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and is cleared to 0 when the lottery result is a jackpot. When the pattern change display on the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 in the change start process in FIG. 26 described later, if the result of the win/loss determination based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S1603 is a miss, the "number of consecutive misses" is incremented by one, and if the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot, the "number of consecutive misses" is cleared to 0. In this embodiment, the "number of consecutive misses" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "number of consecutive misses" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "setting values" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a setting value display section 45, a setting value change operation section 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a schematic example of a performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10, and is provided in a position that is visible when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see FIG. 3). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of multiple (four in this embodiment) seven-segment displays 431-434, and is referred to as a four-digit seven-segment display. It is preferable that the performance display monitor 43 is provided in the main control device 4, but it may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, or may be provided in another component of the game other than the main control unit 331. It is also possible to display the "base information" by using the first special symbol display section 362 and/or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

The seven-segment displays 431-434 are capable of displaying the numbers "0" through "9" and the letters "A" through "F." When displaying the letter "B" on the seven-segment displays 431-434, a dot is lit up to display "8." in order to distinguish it from the number "8," and when displaying the letter "D," a dot is lit up to display "0." in order to distinguish it from the number "0." Additionally, when displaying any of the letters "A" through "F," it is also conceivable to light up a dot to clearly indicate that it is a letter.

The performance display monitor 43 has four seven-segment displays 431-434, of which the two leftmost seven-segment displays 431, 432 are identification segments that display the "base type" as an abbreviation, and the two rightmost seven-segment displays 433, 434 are ratio segments that display the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the two leftmost seven-segment displays 431, 432 display the abbreviation for the current base BL, "BL", as "8." and "L", while the two rightmost seven-segment displays 433, 434 display the base value "31" as "3" and "1". In other words, the four seven-segment displays 431-434 display "8.", "L", "3", and "1" from the left, respectively.

The performance display switch 44 is operated to switch the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four seven-segment displays 431 to 434) on and off collectively by pressing it, and is provided in a position that allows easy operation when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44 turns the power on, and pressing the lower half turns the power off. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn the power on, electricity is supplied to the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434, enabling the display of base information on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn the power off, electricity is cut off to the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. The performance display switch 44 may be provided somewhere other than the main control device 4.

Here, FIG. 18(A) is an example of display on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 18(A), when the performance display switch 44 is off, the seven-segment displays 431-434 are turned off, and the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIG. 18(B) to FIG. 18(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, the "base information" is displayed repeatedly at regular intervals in the following order: current base BL → previous 60,000 ball base B1 → previous 60,000 ball base B2 → current base BL, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off. In the example shown in FIG. 18(B), the current base BL is 28%, in the example shown in FIG. 18(C), the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and in the example shown in FIG. 18(D), the previous 60,000 ball base B2 is 32%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18(A), when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the seven-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed.

The programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, such as a program to calculate the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and a program to display the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 in sequence at regular intervals on the performance display monitor 43, are stored in a ROM 47 provided in the main control device 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. This reduces the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store the programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. The programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may also be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

In addition, the performance display monitor 43 may display other performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d, such as "continuous feature ratio information" or "feature ratio information," instead of or in addition to the "base information."

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a seven-segment display, and may be configured with other types of display, such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 17, the setting value display unit 45 displays the above-mentioned setting values for selecting the low probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(B)) to be referenced in the jackpot lottery, and is configured with a 7-segment display. Note that the setting value display unit 45 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured with other types of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display, and the setting value may be displayed using the performance display monitor 43.

The set value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off when pressed, and when the power of the 7-segment display is on, it allows the set value to be changed by rotating the unit. The set value change operation unit 46 has a function as a contact switch that is turned on and off by pressing the unit, for example, and a function as a rotary switch that switches the contact by rotating the unit (by a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of the display on the set value display unit 45 of the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 19(A), when the setting value display unit 45 is turned off and the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the seven-segment display is energized and a number is displayed on the setting value display unit 45. The number displayed at this time is the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicates the current setting value. In the illustrated example, the setting value is "1". On the other hand, when the setting value display unit 45 is turned on and the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the power to the seven-segment display is cut off and the setting value display unit 45 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 19B, when the setting value display unit 45 is turned on, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated. In the illustrated example, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is increased by rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the right, and the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is decreased by rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the left. When the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the setting value display unit 45, the changed number is stored as the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Therefore, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the number corresponding to the desired setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45 and the power supply of the 7-segment display is turned off, the number displayed immediately before the power supply was turned off is determined as the setting value. This allows the MPU 41 to perform a jackpot lottery based on a low-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(A)) or a high-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(B)) that is selected according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412.

The method of changing the set value is not limited to the method of rotating the set value change operation unit 46 and then turning off the power of the set value display unit 45. For example, the method may involve rotating the set value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) to determine the set value, repeatedly or long-pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) to change the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 and then turning off the power of the set value display unit 45, or inserting a key into a keyhole provided on the main control unit 4 or the like and turning the key to change the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 and then removing the key.

Here, the performance information display device 4A equipped with the setting value display unit 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. The control unit 33 is also provided on the rear side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Therefore, the setting value display unit 45 is provided on the rear side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the game board 31 relative to the front frame 11, it is possible to select a state in which it is visible from the outside of the gaming machine 10 (the front side of the front frame 11) and a state in which it is not visible. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 cannot be seen, while by opening the game board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 can be seen. As a result, when a player plays a game on the gaming machine 10, the setting value display unit 45 cannot be seen unless the game board 31 is opened, and the player is prevented from learning the setting value from the numbers displayed on the setting value display unit 45. When the setting value display unit 45 is lit, it is turned off by pressing the setting value change operation unit 46. Therefore, by keeping the setting value display unit 45 turned off during the business hours of the gaming hall, it is possible to prevent the player from learning the setting value from the setting value display unit 45, even if the setting value display unit 45 is made visible by opening the game board 31 due to ball jamming on the gaming machine 10 or the like.

On the other hand, when the setting value display unit 45 is turned off, pressing the setting value change operation unit 46 turns it on, and the number corresponding to the setting value is hidden. Therefore, outside the business hours of the gaming hall, by opening the gaming board 31 to the front frame 11 and pressing the setting value change operation unit 46, the setting value display unit 45 turns on, allowing the setting value to be confirmed based on the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45, and the setting value can be changed by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. This ensures the confidentiality of the setting value during business hours, while allowing the setting value to be changed outside business hours with a simple operation.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in Figure 12, the sub-control unit 332 is equipped with a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and performs pattern variation display and performance display in the pattern display section 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The voice and lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51 and an input/output I/F 52. The MPU 51 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 51 also includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512 built therein.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp blinking patterns used in variable game presentations and big win game presentations. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

The sound lamp control device 5 inputs commands (control signals) to the display control device 6 based on commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4 by executing processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 using the MPU 51, and controls the display of the symbol display unit 341. The sound lamp control device 5 also controls the playback sound output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, when executing the variable game presentation and the big win game presentation described below, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the playback sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Then, commands such as a change pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. In addition, the voice lamp control device 5 outputs a display change pattern command, etc. to the display control device 6. Note that another embodiment can also be a configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5. Another embodiment can also be a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes a single control device that has the functions of both the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The input/output I/F 52 is also connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the flashing mode of the illumination unit 27, the up and down movement of the stopper unit 383 of the game ball retention unit 38, the 7-segment display unit 39, and the like, based on commands input from the main control device 4. The MPU 51 controls the up and down movement of the stopper unit 383 of the game ball retention unit 38, so that a state in which the game ball (special out ball) that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention unit 38, and a state in which the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 is discharged through the discharge lane 382 are selected. In addition, the MPU 51 controls the lighting or extinguishing of each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39. In addition, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the operation switch 20a. This allows the MPU 51 to detect when an operation is performed on the operation button 20, and based on the detection result, it is also possible to control the image game presentation executed by the pattern display unit 341, the audio output presentation in which sound is output from the speaker 26, the lamp presentation by the blinking pattern of the illumination unit 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined calculation processing based on commands such as the variation pattern command, the first hold command, the second hold command, and the shift command input from the main control unit 4.

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern (decorative pattern stop pattern combination (see FIG. 38(A)), variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 38(B))) and presentation pattern type (see FIG. 39(A) to FIG. 37(C)) based on the variation pattern command, sends a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6 (see step S2105 in the command determination process in FIG. 37), and starts the pattern variation display in the pattern display unit 341. At this time, in the case where the variation pattern command indicates a miss, the pattern display unit 341 displays the decorative pattern combination corresponding to the miss.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on a display variation pattern command input from the voice lamp control device 5, thereby executing the pattern variation display and the performance display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the pattern display unit 341 are connected to the input/output I/F 62. Note that two-way communication may be possible between the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is a calculation device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and a built-in RAM 612. The display control device 6 also has built-in other circuits, such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for receiving interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 and the like. In addition, some or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by electronic circuits.

The ROM 611 stores a control program and a number of types of images, including changing patterns such as decorative patterns used in the changing pattern display of the pattern display unit 341, preview effect images, reach effect images, big win effect images, and miss effect images. The images displayed on the pattern display unit 341 include still images and videos. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each changing display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used, the display timing, and the changing display time of the changing pattern. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays images on the pattern display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the changing display pattern command, thereby realizing the changing pattern display and the effect display.

RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for the processes executed by MPU 61. Note that RAM 612 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Dispensing control device 7]
The dispensing control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71 and an input/output I/F 72. The MPU 71 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 also has a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 built in.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for the processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the payout control device 7 and outputs control signals from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input/output I/F 72.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stop member that switches between paying out and not paying out game balls, and a payout sensor 132b that detects the game balls being paid out individually. The payout control device 7 pays out any number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection results of the payout sensor 132b. The payout control device 7 is also provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, to clear the ball jam (return to normal state) when a payout error such as ball jamming occurs in the payout device 132.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island equipment together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 can pay out a number of game balls equivalent to a preset amount within the range of the amount stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10, and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to pay out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the MPU 71 controls the payout device 132 to pay out the predetermined number of game balls. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium with an IC chip built in. The ball lending device 100 may also be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls according to the amount of cash inserted by inserting cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 to supply the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321. The launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22, and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation, thereby launching the game balls on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

The launch handle 22 is also provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation performed by the player, and a voltage is input to the launch control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 adjusts the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 based on the voltage value input according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 so that the greater the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22, the stronger the launch strength of the game balls from the game ball launch mechanism 32.

Furthermore, the launch handle 22 is provided with a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b that the player operates to stop the launch of the game ball at will. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to stop the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is detected to be operated by the player. This prevents the launch handle 22 from being fixed in a rotating state, for example, and prevents the player from playing in a situation where the player is not touching the launch handle 22. In addition, the player can stop the launch of the ball game by operating the ball stop switch 21b with his or her thumb or the like at any timing while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors and drive units, a +5V voltage for logic used in the control device, etc. The power supply control device 9 then supplies the generated +12V or +5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, etc.

The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power supply switch 90 for turning the power supply of the gaming machine 10 ON/OFF, and a RAM erase switch 91 that is operated to return the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power supply switch 90 is operated to turn on the power with the RAM erase switch 91 ON.

The power supply control device 9 is also provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that are charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Also, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Furthermore, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply has been cut off, it inputs a power outage signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the dispensing control device 7, etc. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24 V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, it determines that a power outage has occurred when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22 V. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the dispensing control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they interrupt the control they are currently executing and execute a specified NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to Figures 20 to 33. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and an NMI interrupt process that is executed during a power outage. Note that in this embodiment, a description of the start-up process and the NMI interrupt process will be omitted, and only the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described. In addition, in the start-up process, it is confirmed whether the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main control unit 4]
20 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt process will be explained below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process to determine the detection state of the sensors connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection state of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, the special out ball sensor 384, etc. is determined. At this time, when the MPU 41 detects the entrance of a game ball into any of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information. When an out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 318a, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d. When a special out ball is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command and stores the special out ball detection command in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 executes updating of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1003>
Next, in step S1003, the MPU 41 executes updating of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4, respectively, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process associated with a win in the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 (step S1004), and executes a launch control process (step S1005). Details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the launch control process is a process that enables the launch of the game ball on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch has not been operated. The launch control process is also a process that disables the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b has been operated. When the launch of the game ball is enabled, the MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 executes a through gate process in which a normal win lottery is executed to determine whether or not the electric role 315b of the second winning port 315 is in an electric role open state based on the normal win random number counter C4 stored in the electric role reserve area 412c. Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first judges whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. Then, when the high frequency support mode is not in effect, the MPU 41 judges that a normal win has occurred when the normal win random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, and judges that a loss has occurred when the normal win random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. In addition, when the high frequency support mode is in effect, the MPU 41 judges that a normal win has occurred when the normal win random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and judges that a loss has occurred when the normal win random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. When the MPU 41 determines that a normal win has occurred in the through gate process, the electric device 315b is opened for a predetermined period of time, which allows a win in the second winning hole 315 at the upper right of the game board 31 to which the electric device 315b is arranged.

[Start-up winning process]
Here, Fig. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 20. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to Fig. 21.

<Step S1101>
21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has been won at the first winning port 314. If the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won at the first winning port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and if the MPU 41 determines that a prize has not been won at the first winning port 314 (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 judges whether the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment). If the reserved number N is the maximum reserved number (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1106. On the other hand, if the reserved number N is not the maximum reserved number (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of Figure 20, and the variable type counter CS1, which is updated in the main processing described below (steps S1302 and S1312 of Figure 23), and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA of the reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the winning/losing information for the first reservation acquired in step S1104 before it becomes the subject of judgment of winning/losing of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later, and executes a first reserved command setting process to set the first reserved command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. The details of the first reserved command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a win has been made at the second winning port 315. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the second winning port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the second winning port 315 (step S1106: No), the process ends the initial winning process and proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 judges whether the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment). If the reserved number M is the maximum reserved number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and moves the process to step S1005 in Fig. 20. On the other hand, if the reserved number M is not the maximum reserved number (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of Figure 20, and the variable type counter CS1 (steps S1302 and S1312 of Figure 23), which is updated in the main processing described below, and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB of the reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the winning/losing information for the second reserved command acquired in step S1109 before the winning/losing information is used to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later, and executes a second reserved command setting process to set a second reserved command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, the second reserved command setting process is the same as the first reserved command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 22, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that the second reserved command setting process can be performed by replacing the "first reserved command" with the "second reserved command" and the "reserved number N" with the "reserved number M" in the first reserved command setting process in FIG. 22.

[First Pending Command Setting Process]
Here, Fig. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first reserved command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process in Fig. 21. The first reserved command includes information indicating that the command is the first reserved command, and information such as the type of the first reserved command (jackpot type or miss), the fluctuation pattern, and the number of reserved commands N. Hereinafter, the first reserved command setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 22.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the reserved number N from the reserved number memory area NAA of the first reserved storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first reservation from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the mode is the high probability mode, and if the mode is the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the mode is not the high probability mode (step S1202: No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the mode is the high probability mode based on a high probability mode flag that is set to ON when the mode is changed to the high probability mode in a game state change process (step S1306 in FIG. 23) in the main process described later, and is set to OFF when the mode is changed from the high probability mode to another game state such as a big win game state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads out the high probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14B) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the setting value change process in FIG. 27 described later, and executes a hit/miss judgment as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 corresponds to a jackpot win based on the high probability mode hit/miss table. Meanwhile, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out the low probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14A) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the setting value change process in FIG. 27 described later, and executes a hit/miss judgment as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 corresponds to a jackpot win based on the low probability mode hit/miss table.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the hit/miss judgment is performed based on the high probability mode hit/miss table or the low probability mode hit/miss table saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described below. However, in steps S1203 or S1204, the setting value saved in step S1710 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described below may be read out, and the high probability mode hit/miss table or the low probability mode hit/miss table corresponding to that setting value may be selected one by one to perform the hit/miss judgment.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 judges whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the MPU 41 judges that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206. If the MPU 41 judges that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 does not correspond to a jackpot win (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads out the counter values of the big win type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the winning/losing information is stored in the third reserve area REA3 in step S1104 in the start-up winning process of FIG. 21, the counter values of the big win type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 included in the winning/losing information stored in the third reserve area REA3 are read out. The reserve area in which the winning/losing information is stored in step S1104 in the start-up winning process of FIG. 21 among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 can be determined by the value of the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NA.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the reserved number N in the first reserved command. In this way, since the first reserved command includes the reserved number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first reserved command can recognize which of the first reserved area REA1 to fourth reserved area REA4 the winning/losing information stored in the first reserved command corresponds to by referring to the reserved number N included in the first reserved command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a miss, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the reserved number N in the first reserved command (step S1209).

The first hold command that is set to on in the first hold command setting process is stored in RAM 412, and is erased after being sent to the voice lamp control device 5 together with other commands in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. 23, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Furthermore, the contents of the first hold command described here are merely an example, and are not limited to those described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 is able to grasp contents similar to the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main Processing of Main Control Device 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to Fig. 23. In the main processing, main control processing for the progress of variable play and big win play is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1309 is executed as a regular processing of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processing of steps S1310 to S1312 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1309 to the next cycle.

<Step S1301>
As shown in Fig. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 executes an external output process to transmit output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt process or the previous main process in Fig. 20 to a control device such as the sub-control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. For example, when commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a setting value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery count update command are set in the RAM 412, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. Also, when a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a prize has been won in the general prize winning opening 313, the variable prize winning opening 316, etc., based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a prize has been won, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize. At this time, in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), if a prize has been won in the general prize winning opening 313 or the first prize winning opening 314, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the general prize winning opening or the first prize winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current prize winning. In addition, in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the sure-win game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), if a win occurs in the second winning port 315, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the second winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current winning. Furthermore, in the big win game state, if a win occurs in the variable winning port 316, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the variable winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current winning.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. Details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, but in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned big win lottery is executed, and a variable pattern command required for the pattern variable display by the pattern display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 sets a variable pattern command indicating the lottery result of the big win lottery and the variable display time in the RAM 412 based on each value of the big win random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interruption process in FIG. 20, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in steps S1302 and S1312 of this process.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game consisting of an opening, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 executes a round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened, by controlling the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 319, the number of times corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. For example, the MPU 41 executes a round game five times when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R variable jackpot, and executes a round game 16 times when the jackpot type is a 16R variable jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot game control process, when starting each round game in the opening/closing execution mode, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412, and when starting an ending, an ending start command is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start process in Fig. 26 described later. In the game state transition process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state in which an open/close execution mode is executed, a sure-variable game state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a time-saving game state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a normal game state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, or the like.

For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state after the variable game that notifies the result of the lottery ends. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Also, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the jackpot game state to a predetermined game state according to the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable jackpot or a 16R variable jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions to a variable jackpot game state after the jackpot game ends, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions to a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when the notification of the lottery results for the specified number of jackpot lotteries has finished during the time-saving game state, the game state will transition to the normal game state after the variable game ends.

In addition, when the MPU 41 transitions the game state, it sets the flag for the game state before the transition to off, while setting the flag for the game state after the transition to on. For example, when the game state transitions from a jackpot game state to a high probability game state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game flag to off, while setting the high probability mode flag to on. On the other hand, when the game state transitions from a high probability game state to a jackpot game state, the MPU 41 sets the high probability mode flag to off, while setting the jackpot game flag to on.

Furthermore, when the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state, it sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "number of jackpots" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a setting value change process. In this setting value change process, a process is executed to control display or non-display of a setting value, or change of a setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d, in response to an operation on the setting value change operation unit 46. Details of the setting value change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting value change process is executed in the main process, but it is also conceivable that it may be executed only during the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or during the period from the start-up process until the launch of game balls begins. This prevents the setting value from being changed after the player has started playing until the next time the power is turned on, thereby preventing the setting value from being changed during the opening hours of the game hall.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a process of updating specific performance information from among game information. In this embodiment, the base information, the number of unit big win lotteries, the consecutive role ratio, and the role ratio are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28 and FIG. 29.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes a display control process for the performance display monitor 43. In this display control process for the performance display monitor 43, a process is executed for displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43. Details of the display control process for the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to Figs. 30 to 33.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 judges whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. If the MPU 41 judges that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1301 and executes each process from S1301 onwards. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 judges that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), the MPU 41 repeatedly executes steps S1310, S1311 and S1312 until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, during the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process, until it judges that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes).

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the fluctuation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of Fig. 23. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to Fig. 24.

<Step S1401>
As shown in Fig. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 judges whether the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game or not, and if it is in a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is terminated, and if it is not in a jackpot game (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not a jackpot game is being executed is judged based on a jackpot game flag that is set to ON when transitioning to a jackpot game state and is set to OFF when transitioning from the jackpot game state to another game state, for example, in the game state transition process in step S1306 in the main process of Fig. 23.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the pattern change is being displayed, and if the pattern change is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the pattern change is not being displayed (step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not the pattern change is being displayed is judged based on a change display flag that is set to ON at the start of the change display in step S1606 in the change start process in FIG. 26 described later, and is set to OFF in step S1405 of the change game control process when the change display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes).

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the pattern variable display. If it determines that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), it transitions to step S1404, and if it determines that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), it terminates the variable game control processing.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops and displays a pattern corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game in the first special pattern display unit 362 or the second special pattern display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 (step S1404), and sets the variable display in progress flag to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not both the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAA of the reserved storage area 412b and the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB are 0 (step S1406). Here, if the MPU 41 determines that both the reserved number N and the reserved number M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), it ends the variable game control process. On the other hand, if either one of the reserved number N and the reserved number M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the winning/losing information data stored in the reserved storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 ends the process in step S1407, the process proceeds to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a change start process for making the symbol display unit 341 execute a change display based on the winning/losing information, and ends the change game control process. The details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

[Data setting process]
Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 in Fig. 24. The data setting process will be described below with reference to Fig. 25.

<Step S1501>
25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether the reserved number M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0 or not, and if the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, if the reserved number M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
If the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAA (step S1502) and moves the winning/losing information from the first reserved area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the winning/losing information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the winning/losing information of the second reserved area REA2 is moved to the first reserved area REA1, the winning/losing information of the third reserved area REA3 is moved to the second reserved area REA2, and the winning/losing information of the fourth reserved area REA4 is moved to the third reserved area REA3. When the processing of step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 is performed when the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 is performed when both or either of the reserved number M and the reserved number N is not 0 in step S1406 of Fig. 24 (step S1406: No). Therefore, when the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the reserved number N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the winning/losing information from the first reserved area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the winning/losing information in the second reserved area REB2 to the fourth reserved area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the winning/losing information in the second reserved area REB2 is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the winning/losing information in the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the winning/losing information in the fourth reserved area REB4 is moved to the third reserved area REB3. When the processing of step S1507 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the winning/losing information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is then sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41. This changes the number of reserved patterns displayed on the pattern display unit 341, etc. When the process of step S1508 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and proceeds to step S1408 in FIG. 24.

[Fluctuation start processing]
Here, Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 in Fig. 24. Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to Fig. 26.

<Step S1601>
As shown in Fig. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 judges whether the game state is in the high probability mode. Whether the game state is in the high probability mode is judged based on whether the high probability mode flag, which is set to ON in the game state transition process in step S1306 in the main process in Fig. 23, is set to ON. If the game state is in the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1602, and if the game state is not in the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, if the game state is in the low probability mode, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss judgment as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the win/loss information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b is a value corresponding to a jackpot win, based on the high probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(B)) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing in FIG. 27 described later. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss judgment as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the win/loss information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b is a value corresponding to a jackpot win, based on the low probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(A)) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing in FIG. 27 described later.

In steps S1602 and S1603, the hit/miss judgment is performed based on the high probability mode hit/miss table or the low probability mode hit/miss table saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described below. However, in steps S1602 and S1603, the setting value saved in step S1710 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described below may be read, and the high probability mode hit/miss table or the low probability mode hit/miss table corresponding to that setting value may be selected one by one to perform the hit/miss judgment.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal big win, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal big win variation table (see FIG. 15(A)). Also, when the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a sure-win, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the sure-win variation table (see FIG. 15(B)). Furthermore, when the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a miss, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the miss variation table (see FIG. 15(C)).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the big win lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604 in the RAM 412. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 executes the pattern variation display by the pattern display unit 341 based on the variation pattern command.

As described above, when the lottery result is a "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412, as a variation pattern command, any one of "A01" to "A03" obtained by adding "A" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. When the lottery result is a "5R sure-change jackpot", the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412, as a variation pattern command, any one of "B01" to "B03" obtained by adding "B" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R sure-change jackpot. When the lottery result is a "16R sure-change jackpot", the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412, as a variation pattern command, any one of "C01" to "C03" obtained by adding "C" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 16R sure-change jackpot. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 sets one of the variation patterns "01" to "08" with the letter "D" added to indicate a miss, "D01" to "D08," as a variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 includes information in the variation pattern command as to whether the result is a near miss, a near miss other than near miss, or a complete miss.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the variable pattern display on the main display unit 36 and ends the variable start process. When the MPU 41 starts the variable pattern display on the main display unit 36, it sets a variable display flag to ON. This variable display flag is referenced in step S1402 in the variable game control process of FIG. 24 to determine whether the main display unit 36 is displaying a variable pattern. When the MPU 41 starts the variable pattern display on the main display unit 36, it adds 1 to the "accumulated number of jackpot lottery draws" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, when the result of the win/loss judgment based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S1603 is a miss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "consecutive number of misses" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and when the win/loss result is a jackpot, it clears the "consecutive number of misses" to 0.

[Setting value change process]
Fig. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value change process executed in step S1307 of the main process in Fig. 23. The setting value change process will be described below with reference to Fig. 27.

<Step S1701>
As shown in Fig. 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the pattern variation display is in progress, and if the pattern variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes), the setting value change process is terminated, and if the pattern variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the pattern variation display is in progress is judged based on the variation display in progress flag that is set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process in Fig. 26.

<Step S1702>
If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state (step S1702), and if the game is in a jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the setting value change process is terminated, and if the game is not in a jackpot game state (step S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1703. For example, whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state is judged based on a jackpot game state flag that is set to ON in the game state transition process in step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
When neither the pattern change display nor the big win game state is in progress (steps S1701 and S1702 are No), the MPU 41 judges whether the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), i.e., whether the operation to turn on the setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the setting value change operation unit 46. That is, in this embodiment, when the pattern change display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or when the big win game state is in progress (step S1702: Yes), the setting value is not displayed and the setting value cannot be changed. Here, when the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1704, and when the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 (described later) (step S1704), and displays the number indicating the read setting value on the setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). This allows the current setting value to be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag, which indicates that the setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, to on (step S1706), and ends the setting value change process.

<Step S1707>
If the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The setting value display flag indicates that a setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45 as described above, and is set to on in step S1706. If the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708, and if the setting value display flag is set to off (step S1707: No), i.e., if the setting value display unit 45 is turned off and the power supply is not turned on, the MPU 41 ends the setting value change process.

<Step S1708>
If the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether a rotation operation for changing a setting value has been performed. If the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1709, and if the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process (step S1709) to change the display on the set value display unit 45. For example, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the right, the MPU 41 causes a number one larger than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation to be displayed, and conversely, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, the MPU 41 causes a number one smaller than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation to be displayed.

When the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "6", if the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed to "1", and when the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "1", if the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed to "6". Also, when the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is "6", it may be set so that it does not rotate further to the right, and when the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is "1", it may be set so that it does not rotate further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 as the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and ends the setting value change process. As a result, when the power of the setting value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the setting value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as a valid setting value. Therefore, the setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. Then, the setting value can be confirmed by turning off the power of the setting value display unit 45 with the number corresponding to the desired setting value being displayed on the setting value display unit 45.

<Step S1711>
If the set value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, whether or not an operation to turn off the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been performed on the set value change operation unit 46. If the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1712, and if the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has not been switched from on to off (step S1711: No), the MPU 41 ends the set value change process. Note that if the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the power supply to the seven-segment display is cut off in the set value display unit 45, so that the numbers indicating the set value are turned off, and the set value is confirmed as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 selects a low probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(A)) and a high probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(B)) according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710, and stores them in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to off, and ends the setting value change process.

Here, in step S1712, a low probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(A)) and a high probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(B)) are selected according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412. In other words, a win/lose table with the same setting values is selected for the low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table, so the setting values can be easily changed. However, it is also possible to make it possible to change the setting values for the low probability mode and the high probability mode individually. In this case, it becomes possible to set different levels (numerical values) of setting values for the low probability mode and the high probability mode, for example, setting the setting value for the low probability mode to "1" and the setting value for the high probability mode to "6".

[Performance information update process]
Here, Fig. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1308 in the main process of Fig. 23. Fig. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of Fig. 28. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to Figs. 28 and 29.

<Steps S1801 and S1802>
28, the MPU 41 reads the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and judges whether the read number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S1802). If the number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1805, and if the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1803.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
If the number of out balls does not reach 60,000 (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 reads out the number of balls paid out from the general winning port and the number of balls paid out from the first winning port for the base calculation of the base information (step S1808). Then, the MPU 51 calculates the current base BL based on the number of out balls for the base calculation of the base information read in step S1801 and the number of balls paid out from the general winning port and the number of balls paid out from the first winning port for the base calculation of the base information read in step S1803, and overwrites and updates the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804) (see FIG. 29 (A)). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 x (number of balls paid out from the general winning port + number of balls paid out from the first winning port) / number of out balls.

<Steps S1805 to S1808>
If the number of out balls reaches 60,000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S1805 to S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(A) and FIG. 29(B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base (step S1805), shifts the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1806), and clears the current base BL to 0 (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of payout balls from the general winning port, the number of payout balls from the first winning port, and the number of out balls for base calculation stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 (step S1808).

<Step S1809>
When the process of step S1804 or S1808 is completed, the MPU 51 reads various information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates other specific performances, updates the other specific performance information to the calculated values (step S1809), and terminates the specific performance information update process. The specific performances in this case are, for example, the number of unit jackpot lottery draws, the consecutive role ratio, the role ratio, etc.

[Display control process of performance display monitor]
30 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main process of Fig. 23. The display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to Figs. 30 to 33.

<Step S1901>
As shown in Fig. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or step S1930 in Fig. 33. If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1908 in Fig. 31, and if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31 described later. If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1917 of FIG. 32, and if the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 before last, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 32 described later. If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926 of FIG. 33, and if the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from OFF to ON (step S1904: No), the MPU 41 ends the display control process.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Fig. 29(A), "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in Fig. 29(B), "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1906), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in Fig. 31, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 in Fig. 30 (step S1908), and judges whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S1909). When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1910, and when the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1910) and displays the previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29(A), "8.", "1", "3", and "3" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29(B), "8.", "1", "2", and "9" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to on (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter to display the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), and terminates the display control process.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1915, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the display control process is terminated. Note that if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power supply to the seven-segment displays 431 to 434, and the alphabet and numbers indicating the current base BL are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1915), clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1916), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), as shown in Fig. 32, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 in Fig. 31 (step S1917), and judges whether the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918). When the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1919) and displays the 60,000 balls base B2 from the previous round included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1920). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29(A), "8.", "2", "3", "2" indicating that the 60,000 balls base B2 from the previous round is 32% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29(B), "8.", "2", "3", "3" indicating that the 60,000 balls base B2 from the previous round is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to on (step S1921), sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to a certain period of time for which the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1922), and terminates the display control process.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the display control process is terminated. Note that if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the alphabet and numbers indicating the previous 60,000 ball base B1 are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1924), clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1925), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), as shown in Fig. 33, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of Fig. 32 (step S1926), and determines whether the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927). If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1928, and if the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928) and displays the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Fig. 29(A), "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in Fig. 29(B), "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1930), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and ends the display control process.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the display control process is terminated. Note that if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the alphabet and numbers indicating the 60,000 ball base B2 before the previous time are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1933), clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1934), and terminates the display control process.

[Processing of voice and lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to Figures 34 to 47.

In addition, in another embodiment, some or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In addition, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, start-up processing when the voice lamp control device 5 is started, and NMI interrupt processing during a power outage, but a description of these processes will be omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
34 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a cycle of 1 msec, for example.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 executes a display order setting process (step S2000), a counter update process (step S2001), a command determination process (step S2002), a variable game presentation process (step S2003), a big win game presentation process (step S2004), and a setting value suggestion process (step S2005).

[Display order setting process]
In the display sequence setting process (step S2000), the MPU 51 determines and stores (sets) the sequence of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period, with reference to the game setting value (setting value) set to define the probability of a big win in the gaming machine 10. In this embodiment, the setting value suggestion process is executed in the big win game in the predetermined period, so that five numbers for specifying a plurality (five) game setting values (non-setting values) other than the setting value are displayed in a predetermined sequence on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, in the display sequence setting process, the sequence of displaying the five numbers specifying the plurality of non-setting values on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set. Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display sequence setting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a number display sequence determination table referred to in the display sequence setting process of FIG. 35. Details of the display sequence setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 35 and FIG. 36.

<Step S2011>
As shown in FIG. 35, in the display order setting process, the MPU 51 judges whether the display order setting flag is set to ON (step S2011). The display order setting flag is a flag indicating that the setting of the display order of the numbers specifying the non-set value in the jackpot game for a predetermined period has been completed, and is set to ON in step S2016 of the display order setting process. In addition, the display order setting flag is initially set to OFF when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, when the sub timer interruption process is executed by allowing the sub timer interruption process by the start-up process of the sound lamp control device, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period is set (steps S2014 to S2016 described later). That is, in the gaming machine 10, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period is set when the power is turned on.

Incidentally, the power to the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before the gaming hall opens. Therefore, the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

If the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2012; if the display order setting flag is off (step S2011: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2014.

<Steps S2012 and S2013>
If the display sequence setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the set value change flag is set to on (step S2012). The set value change flag is a flag indicating that a game set value (set value) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 has been changed, and is set to on in step S2121 in the command determination process in FIG. 37 described later. If the set value change flag is on (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the set value change flag to off (step S2013) and then shifts the process to step S2014. That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the set value is changed, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period is set. In this way, when the set value is changed, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set, so that the display order of the numbers can be determined according to the set value, and therefore, the presentation of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

On the other hand, if the setting value change flag is off (step S2012: NO), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2014 to S2016>
In step S2014, the MPU 51 acquires a setting value from the RAM 512, and further refers to the setting value and a number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) to set the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2015). Here, FIG. 36(A) is a diagram showing an example of the number display order determination table, and FIG. 36(B) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the display order described in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36(A) and the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), in the number display sequence determination table, the display sequence of numbers is determined by a random number value selected for each game setting value 1 to 6 (setting value 1 to 6) that is set to determine the probability of a big win in the gaming machine 10. There are 120 random numbers selected from 0 to 119, and one display sequence is associated with each random number value, and the selection probability of each display sequence is the same. The display sequences include display sequences A1 to A120 selected for setting value 1, display sequences B1 to B120 selected for setting value 2, display sequences C1 to C120 selected for setting value 3, display sequences D1 to D120 selected for setting value 4, display sequences E1 to E120 selected for setting value 5, and display sequences F1 to F120 selected for setting value 6, and 120 display sequences corresponding to all combinations of numbers indicating non-setting values are set for each setting value 1 to 6.

The display sequence A1 to A120 selected when the setting value is 1 specifies the order in which the five numbers "2" to "6" that specify the game setting values (non-setting values) 2 to 6 other than the number "1" that specifies the setting value 1 are displayed (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when the setting value is 1 and one of the display sequences A1 to A120 is selected according to the lottery random number value, the number "1" that specifies the setting value 1 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences B1 to B120 selected when the set value is 2 stipulate the order in which the set values "1," "3" to "6," and the five numbers "2" to "6" specifying the set values 2 to 6 are displayed other than the number "2" that specifies the set value 2 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when the set value is 2 and one of the display sequences B1 to B120 is selected according to the lottery random number value, the number "2" that specifies the set value 2 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences C1 to C120 selected when the setting value is 3 stipulate the order in which the five numbers "1," "2," and "4" to "6" that specify the setting values 1, 2, and 4 to 6 are displayed, other than the number "3" that specifies the setting value 1 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences C1 to C120 is selected because the setting value is 3, the number "3" that specifies the setting value 3 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences D1 to D120 selected when the setting value is 4 stipulate the order in which the five numbers "1" to "3", "5", and "6" specifying the setting values 1 to 3, 5, and 6 are displayed, other than the number "4" specifying the setting value 4 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences D1 to D120 is selected because the setting value is 4, the number "4" specifying the setting value 4 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences E1 to E120 selected when the set value is 5 stipulate the order in which the set values 1 to 4 and the five numbers "1" to "4" and "6" specifying the set value 6 are displayed, other than the number "5" specifying the set value 5 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences E1 to E120 is selected because the set value is 5, the number "5" specifying the set value 5 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences F1 to F120 selected when the set value is 6 stipulate the order in which the five numbers "1" to "5" specifying the set values 1 to 5 are displayed, other than the number "6" specifying the set value 6 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences F1 to F120 is selected because the set value is 6, the number "6" specifying the set value 6 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

When the sequence of the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 has been set (step S2015), the MPU 51 sets the display sequence setting flag to OFF (step S2016) and ends the display sequence setting process. That is, when the power is turned on (step S2011: No) and when the setting value is changed (step S2013: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the sequence of the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 according to the game setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6) that are set to determine the probability of a jackpot on the gaming machine 10.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table when the power is turned on, and after the power is turned on, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table by changing the setting value. This makes it possible to display numbers (non-set values) on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a specified order for a specified period when a specified condition (e.g., power is turned on or the setting is changed). In gaming halls, the power of the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before opening, so the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from being fixed, and therefore prevents the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

In the display sequence setting process of this embodiment, the display sequence of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the gaming machine 10 is powered on and when the setting value is changed, but the display sequence of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 may be set when other conditions (predetermined conditions) are met. The predetermined conditions in this case will be described in the third embodiment described later, and examples of the predetermined conditions include the start of a predetermined period, the start of a jackpot game, and the start of an open/close execution mode for a jackpot game. Even when the display sequence of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set due to the establishment of these predetermined conditions, the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is prevented from being fixed, so that the same information is prevented from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 is prevented from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the number display sequence determination table shown in FIG. 36(A), the probability that all number display sequences are selected is the same for the same set value, but the probability that the number display sequence is selected does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the number display sequence determination table may be set so that the probability that at least some number display sequences are selected is different from other number display sequences for the same set value. That is, it is possible to make a specific display sequence easier to select and, conversely, to make a specific display sequence harder to select. If the probability that at least some number display sequences are selected according to the set value is set to be different from other number display sequences, it is also possible to make a specific number display sequence easier to select and, conversely, to make a specific number display sequence harder to select according to the set value. That is, unlike the case where the probability that all number display sequences are selected is the same, it is also possible to make it easier to identify a specific non-set value and, conversely, to make it harder to identify a specific non-set value. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of a high set value and the likelihood of a low set value. Specifically, for example, when the set value is a low set value (for example, set value 2 or less), the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to high set values (for example, set value 5 or more) may be delayed. In this case, by leaving the possibility of the low set value being a high set value until the end, the player is made to have expectations of the high set value, while preventing the player from identifying the low set value early. This prevents the game on the gaming machine 10 from ending early while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game, and can suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine 10. Conversely, when the set value is a high set value (for example, set value 5 or more), the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to low set values (for example, set value 2 or less) may be delayed. In this case, the numbers corresponding to the high set value and the numbers corresponding to the low set value are not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 until just before the set value is identified as a high set value, and the possibility of the low set value remains until just before the player grasps that the high set value. This allows the player to focus on whether the setting is a high setting that is advantageous to the player, or a low setting that is disadvantageous to the player, and enjoy the thrill of the moment right before realizing that the setting is a high setting. In addition, regardless of the setting value, it is also possible to make it easier to select the display order of the numbers corresponding to the lowest game setting value among the non-setting values, for example, the slowest display order. In this case, since the number indicating the non-setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, the possibility of the most disadvantageous non-setting value for the player and a non-setting value that is more advantageous to the player remains until the last number is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to realize that the game setting value (jackpot probability) is the most disadvantageous to the player, and therefore it is possible to prevent early termination of play on the gaming machine 10 and to prevent a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

It is also possible to set the number display order so that numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to high settings and numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to low settings are displayed later in the number display order. For example, it is possible to set a number display order so that at least one of "1" and "2" corresponding to low settings and at least one of "5" and "6" corresponding to high settings are displayed later in the number display order. Even in this case, until the player grasps the setting value, there is a possibility that the setting value is a high setting value that is advantageous to the player, and a possibility that the setting value is a low setting value that is disadvantageous to the player, so the player can enjoy the thrill of wondering whether the setting value is a high setting value or a low setting value until the player grasps the setting value.

In addition, except when the set value is the highest set value (set value 6), it is possible to set the number display order so that the display order of numbers corresponding to non-set values higher than the set value is delayed. For example, it is possible to set the selection rate of a lower display order higher than the number indicating a non-set value with a higher probability of favorable judgment than the set value than the number indicating a non-set value with a lower probability of favorable judgment than the set value. By delaying the display order of numbers indicating non-set values higher than the set value in this way, it is possible to make the player expect that the set value is higher than the actual set value until just before the set value is grasped. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while expecting that the set value is high until just before the set value is grasped. Conversely, it is possible to set the number display order so that the display order of numbers corresponding to non-set values lower than the set value is delayed, except when the set value is the lowest set value (set value 1). For example, it is possible to set the selection rate of a lower display order higher than the number indicating a non-set value with a lower probability of favorable judgment than the set value. By delaying the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values lower than the set value in this way, the numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to game set values lower than the set value are left as hidden numbers just before the set value is grasped. This makes the final candidates for the set value the actual set value and a game set value (non-set value) lower than that set value. As a result, the game set value that is more advantageous to the player is ultimately grasped as the set value, improving the enjoyment when the set value is grasped.

It is also conceivable to set the number display order so that, regardless of the setting value, the number display order is made later in the sequence of numbers corresponding to high setting values (e.g., setting value 5 or higher). Conversely, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that the number display order is made earlier in the sequence of numbers corresponding to low setting values (e.g., setting value 2 or lower) is made earlier. In this way, by displaying numbers corresponding to low setting values earlier and numbers corresponding to high setting values later, higher setting values are displayed later. This makes it possible to make the player expect that the setting value is likely to be advantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the setting value, and thus allows the player to enjoy guessing non-setting values (setting values) while hoping that the setting value may be high.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 executes updates of the first stop symbol type counter, the performance pattern type counter, the variable display counter, etc. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the performance type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of the decorative symbol to be stopped first based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Also, the performance pattern type counter is used to determine the performance type (performance pattern) based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. Meanwhile, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variable display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the pattern display unit 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the change display counter, it is possible to know the remaining change display time, whether a change is occurring, whether the change display of the pattern display section 341 has ended, and so on.

[Command Judgment Process]
In the command determination process (step S2002), the command received from the main control unit 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2002 in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 34.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 37, in step S2101, the MPU 51 judges whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, if the MPU 51 has received a command (step S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2101: No), the command judgment process ends. The command received from the main control device 4 is stored in an unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 judges whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. Note that, if it is judged in step S2101 that the command has been received and is to be processed, the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is erased from the unprocessed command storage area and stored in, for example, a processing work storage area.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a variation pattern command. If the command is a variation pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2103. If the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2102: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2106.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern (the combination of stop symbols of the decorative symbols and the presentation type (presentation pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 38(A)), the variation type table (see FIG. 38(B)), and the presentation type table (see FIG. 39(A) to FIG. 39(C)) stored in advance in the ROM 511, and the value of the presentation type counter stored in the RAM 512. Also, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R variable probability jackpot, sets the 5R variable probability jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R variable probability jackpot, and sets the 16R variable probability jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 16R variable probability jackpot.

The decorative symbol stopping pattern combination consists of a first stopping pattern, a second stopping pattern, and a final stopping pattern. The first stopping pattern is the first decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the second stopping pattern is the second decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the final stopping pattern is the last symbol to be stopped and displayed. The effect type table includes a normal reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to a normal reach (see FIG. 39(A)), a super reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to a super reach (see FIG. 39(B)), and a special reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to a special reach (see FIG. 39(C)).

Here, FIG. 38(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 38(A), the first stop symbol selection table prescribes the decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed in the symbol display section 341. Note that FIG. 38(A) is based on the premise that the decorative symbols are "1" to "9", "333" is a symbol combination indicating a sure chance jackpot (either a 5R sure chance jackpot or a 16R sure chance jackpot), "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 16R sure chance jackpot, and any other repeat number besides "333" and "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R sure chance jackpot, or a 16R sure chance jackpot.

When the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", there is no allocation of "3" and "7" as the first stopping symbol, and the first stopping symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from decorative symbols other than "3" and "7". In other words, when the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combinations "333" or "777", which indicate a 5R special jackpot or a 16R special jackpot (special jackpot), will not be displayed.

In addition, when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," there is no allocation of "7" as the first stopping symbol, and the first stopping symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from decorative symbols other than "7." In other words, when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," the symbol combination "777," which indicates a 16R special jackpot, will not be displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R special jackpot, may be displayed. In other words, even when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R normal jackpot, may be displayed as a decorative symbol. Then, when the lottery result is a "5R probability jackpot," if a decorative symbol other than "3" and not "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 5R probability jackpot promotion performance in the jackpot game, which indicates that the jackpot is a 5R probability jackpot.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", all the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", a symbol combination with a repeat number other than the symbol combination "777" indicating a 16R jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", a symbol combination with a repeat number other than the symbol combination "777" indicating a 5R jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot may be stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol stop display result. And when the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", if "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R jackpot promotion effect that clearly indicates a 16R jackpot in the jackpot game.

Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop pattern if the lottery result is a jackpot, it determines the second and final stop patterns to be the same as the first stop pattern that was previously determined. This determines the combination of stop patterns that will be displayed on the pay line of the pattern display unit 341 in that game round.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is a "miss", all of the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a "miss", it determines the second stop symbol based on the miss type selected based on the miss type table (FIG. 14(D)) and the first stop symbol previously determined. For example, when the miss type is a front/rear miss reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before or after the first stop symbol. Also, when the miss type is a reach other than a front/rear miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be a different symbol from the first stop symbol and the symbol before or after the first stop symbol. Also, if the loss type is a complete loss, the second stop pattern is determined to be a pattern different from the first stop pattern, and the final stop pattern is determined regardless of the first stop pattern and the second stop pattern. The stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns may be determined by the display control device 6, or only the first stop pattern may be determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop pattern and the final stop pattern may be determined by the display control device 6.

Also, FIG. 38(B) is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 38(B), in the variation type table, the variation display time and the content of the variation type (presentation pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command are determined. For example, the variation pattern command "A01" in which the lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the variation pattern is "01" is associated with the variation display time "30 s" and the variation type "normal reach presentation pattern". Also, the variation pattern command "B02" in which the lottery result is "5R certain jackpot" and the variation pattern is "02" is associated with the variation display time "60 s" and the variation type "super reach presentation pattern", and the variation pattern command "C03" in which the lottery result is "16R certain jackpot" and the variation pattern is "03" is associated with the variation display time "90 s" and the variation type "special reach presentation pattern". Furthermore, the variation pattern command "D04" in which the lottery result is "miss" and the variation pattern is "04" is associated with a variation display time of "7 s" and a variation type of "non-reach presentation pattern," and the variation pattern command "D05" in which the lottery result is "miss" and the variation pattern is "05" is associated with a variation display time of "10 s" and a variation type of "non-reach presentation pattern."

Furthermore, Figures 39(A) to 39(C) are diagrams showing an example of a presentation pattern type selection table. The presentation pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (presentation pattern). Specifically, Figure 39(A) is a normal reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a normal reach presentation, Figure 39(B) is a super reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a super reach presentation, and Figure 39(C) is a special reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a special reach presentation.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which there are five types of performance types corresponding to each variation type, but there may be six or more types of performance types. Also, in Figure 39, the performance type table for when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(A), "presentation pattern X1" to "presentation pattern X5" are set as presentation pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R special jackpot, 16R special jackpot, and miss). Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (presentation pattern) is a normal reach presentation pattern, it selects the presentation pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter from the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, presentation pattern X1 to presentation pattern X3 included in the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table are presentations in which, for example, a normal reach presentation is executed in which the decorative pattern reaches a reach state after the end of a high-speed variation presentation in which the decorative pattern changes at high speed, and the final individual presentation type is a normal reach presentation.

In addition, in the super reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(B), "performance pattern Y1" to "performance pattern Y5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a super reach performance pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the super reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach performance pattern type selection table are, for example, performances in which a normal reach performance is executed after the end of a high-speed variation performance, and further develops into a super reach performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a normal reach performance and a longer performance execution time than a normal reach performance as the final individual performance type. Note that the super reach performance pattern type selection table may include a super reach performance pattern performance that develops into a super reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance without going through a normal reach performance.

Furthermore, in the special reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(C), "performance pattern Z1" to "performance pattern Z5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a special reach performance pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the special reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach performance pattern type selection table are performances in which, for example, a normal reach performance and a super reach performance are executed after the end of a high-speed variation performance, and further, as the final individual performance type, it develops into a special reach performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal reach performance or the super reach performance and has a longer performance execution time than the normal reach performance. Note that the special reach performance pattern type selection table may include a special reach performance pattern that develops into a special reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance or a normal reach performance, without going through at least one of the normal reach performance and the super reach performance.

Then, the MPU 51 sets in the RAM 512 a display variation pattern command indicating the stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns determined based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the performance type table, and the performance type counter, and the variation type (performance pattern type).

<Step S2104>
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 37, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the variable pattern command. The variable display counter is then decremented by one in the counter update process of step S2001 in the sub-timer interrupt process of Fig. 34, and the MPU 51 can determine whether or not the pattern variable display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, and the like, based on the variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variable display has ended when the variable display counter reaches 0.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for identifying the stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 and the content of the variation type (presentation pattern type) to the display control device 6, and ends the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns and the variation type (presentation pattern type) determined in step S2103. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image and the presentation image of the decorative patterns corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the presentation display in the pattern display section 341 according to the stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns, the variation type, and the presentation type corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variable display of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., three) until a preset variable display time has elapsed, and causes the multiple decorative symbols to stop varying in sequence. During the variable display of the decorative symbols, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (performance pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc.

When the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets the variable play performance flag to ON. This variable play performance flag is a flag that indicates that a variable play performance is being executed.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating the start of a jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 at the start of a jackpot game as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2107, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2109.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game presentation determination process (step S2107). The jackpot game presentation determination process is a process for determining presentations to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the like when the game state transitions to a jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines an opening presentation, an ending presentation, and an opening/closing execution mode presentation to be executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the big win game presentation start flag to ON and ends the command determination process. The big win game presentation start flag is a flag for starting a big win game presentation (opening presentation), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the opening presentation start process in the big win game presentation process in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating the start of a round game in the open/close execution mode, and is set when a round game is started in the big win game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is a round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2110, and if the received command is not a round game start command (step S2109: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game presentation start flag to ON (step S2310) and ends the command determination process. The round game start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the round game presentation in the big win game presentation in step S2004 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating that the round game in the open/close execution mode is to be ended, and is set when the round game is to be ended in the big win game control process in step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is a round game end command (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2112, and if the received command is not a round game end command (step S2111: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game presentation end flag to ON (step S2312) and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game presentation in the big win game presentation in step S2004 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a special out ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kleun device 37, and is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 20. Here, if the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2114, and if the received command is not a special out ball detection command (step S2113: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out ball detection flag to ON and ends the command determination process. The special out ball detection flag is referred to when determining whether or not to increment the value of the special out ball counter in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion process in FIG. 40, which will be described later.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating the start of an ending in a big win game, and is set in the big win game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2116, and if the received command is not an ending start command (step S2115: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending performance start flag to ON and ends the command determination process. The ending performance start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the ending performance process in the big win game performance process in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 34. The ending performance start flag is also referenced when determining whether or not to move the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position in step S2201 in the setting value suggestion process of Fig. 40.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2118, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2117: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the big win game presentation end flag to ON and ends the command judgment process. The big win game presentation end flag is a flag that ends the big win game presentation (ending presentation), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending presentation end process in the big win game presentation process in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 34. The big win game presentation end flag is also referred to when determining whether or not to turn off the lit segments in the 7 segment display unit 39 in step S2301 in the 7 segment display unit control process of Fig. 41.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a setting value change command. The setting value change command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 in the setting value change process of Fig. 27. Here, if the received command is a setting value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2120, and if the received command is not a setting value change command (step S2119: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed setting value included in the setting value change command, stores the changed setting value, and ends the command judgment process. The setting value stored in the RAM 512 is read out in step S2014 of the display sequence setting process in FIG. 35 and is referenced to determine the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination processing.

[Variable game performance processing]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 34, in the variable game presentation processing (step S2003) of the sub-timer interrupt processing, in a variable game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery, when a variable pattern command is received, a variable game presentation in accordance with the presentation pattern determined in step S2103 of the command determination processing of Figure 37 is executed by the pattern display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc.

[Big Win Game Presentation Processing]
In the big win game presentation process (step S2004) of the sub timer interruption process, the opening presentation, the ending presentation, and the opening/closing execution mode presentation determined in the big win game presentation determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process of Fig. 37 are executed. In the ending presentation, in this embodiment, an ending additional image showing the display result on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see Fig. 47).

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the setting value suggestion process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the up and down movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is controlled, and the lighting and extinguishing of each of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display portion 39 is controlled. Furthermore, in the setting value suggestion process, a process is executed in which an ending additional image showing the display result on the seven-segment display portion 39 in the big win game is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 as an ending presentation of the big win game. Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in Fig. 40, in step S2201, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the ending performance start flag is set to ON. The ending performance start flag is a flag for starting an ending performance, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command judgment process of Fig. 37. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing for starting an ending performance based on the ending performance start flag. Here, if the ending performance start flag is ON (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2202, and if the ending performance start flag is OFF (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2206.

<Step S2202>
When the ending performance start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 down from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 down from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at the timing of starting the ending performance. As a result, if a game ball 99 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38, the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382. At this time, the special out ball sensor 384 detects the game ball 99 being moved from the retention lane 381 to the discharge lane 382.

<Steps S2203 to S2205>
When the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is lowered from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202), the MPU 51 sets a stopper portion lowering flag indicating that the stopper portion 383 is lowering to ON (step S2203). The stopper portion lowering flag is referred to in step S2206 to determine whether or not it is the timing when the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Then, the MPU 51 sets a lowering time counter corresponding to the time required to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position (step S2204), and further sets the ending performance start flag to OFF (step S2205), thereby terminating the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S2206>
When the ending performance start flag is OFF (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the stopper unit lowering flag, which is set ON in step S2203, is set ON (step S2206). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is a timing when the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Here, when the stopper unit lowering flag is ON (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2207, and when the stopper unit lowering flag is OFF (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2216.

<Step S2207>
When the stopper part lowering flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the special out ball detection flag is set to on (step S2207). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that the special out ball sensor 384 has detected a game ball, and is set to on in step S2114 in the command judgment process of Fig. 37. Here, when the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2208, and when the special out ball detection flag is off (step S2207: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2210.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
If the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2208) and sets the special out ball detection flag to off (step S2209). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls when the special out balls that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37 in the opening and closing execution mode of the big win game are retained in the game ball retention section 38. The number of special out balls counted in this way is referred to in order to control the lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment display section control process in FIG. 41 described later.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the downward movement time counter set in step S2204. Then, the MPU 51 judges whether the value of the downward movement time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether it is the timing to return the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38, which is at the lower limit position, to the upper limit position or not.

Whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position may be determined based on whether or not a special out ball has not been detected for a certain period of time, i.e., whether or not the special out ball detection flag has been off for a certain number of times in succession. If the condition for returning the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position is that a special out ball has not been detected for a certain period of time, then even if there are a large number of special out balls, the special out balls can be counted accurately.

If the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2212. If the value of the downward movement time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
If the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 up from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and sets the stopper portion downward movement flag, which is set to ON in step S2203, to OFF (step S2213). This causes the game ball retention portion 38 to return to a state in which the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381.

<Step S2214>
In step S2214, the MPU 51 executes a seven-segment display control process for controlling the on/off state of the seven-segment display unit 39. That is, for each big win game, at the ending of the big win game after a specific period has elapsed, the MPU 51 executes a seven-segment display control process for controlling the on/off state of the seven-segment display unit 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device during the opening/closing execution mode of the big win game. Details of the seven-segment display control process will be described later with reference to Figures 41 to 45.

<Step S2215>
In step S2215, the MPU 51 executes an ending additional image control process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to display an additional image corresponding to the on/off state of the seven-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the big win game. This ending additional image control process makes it possible to confirm the on/off state of the seven-segment display unit 39 also on the symbol display unit 341. Details of the seven-segment display unit control process will be described later with reference to Figs. 46 and 47.

<Step S2216>
When the stopper part moving flag is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the big win game presentation end flag is set to on (step S2216). The big win game presentation end flag is a flag that ends the big win game presentation, and is set to on in step S2118 in the command judgment process of FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing to end the big win game presentation (ending presentation) by the big win game presentation end flag. Here, when the big win game presentation end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2217, and when the big win game presentation end flag is off (step S2216: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S2217>
If the jackpot game presentation end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the lit segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2217). That is, when the jackpot game presentation ends, the MPU 51 turns off all the segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39. In other words, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 can be turned on only during the ending of the jackpot game.

Here, the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 display all or part of the numbers corresponding to game setting values (non-set values) other than the game setting values (set values) that determine the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery on the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot. Therefore, the player can obtain information for identifying or guessing the non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game each time the jackpot game is played. This allows the player to identify or guess the non-set value each time the jackpot game is played, and therefore the player can enjoy identifying or guessing the non-set value in the jackpot game. In addition, by obtaining information for identifying or guessing the non-set value for each jackpot game, when the number of jackpot games increases, for example, when the number of consecutive jackpot games increases, it becomes possible to grasp all (five) non-set values, and in that case, it becomes possible to grasp the set values. In other words, the player can grasp the set value based on the identified non-set value, and therefore it becomes possible to guess the set value in the jackpot game, which increases the interest in the game.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game presentation end flag to OFF (step S2218). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot type flag (5R variable jackpot flag, 16R variable jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag) to OFF (step S2219), and ends the setting value suggestion presentation.

[7-segment display control process]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in step S2214 of the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Step S2301 and Step S2302>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the 7-segment display control process, the MPU 51 first obtains the value of the special out ball counter stored in the RAM 512 by being added in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 (step S2301), and judges whether the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302). The value of the special out ball counter is the number of special out balls that have won the variable winning hole 316 and entered the special out ball hole 373 of the Kroon device 37 in the opening and closing execution mode of the big win. If the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2303, and if the value of the special out ball counter is not 1 or more, that is, 0 (step S2302: No), the 7-segment display control process is terminated since it is not necessary to light any of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Steps S2303 to S2307>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 reads out the segment display control information from the 7-segment display control information storage area (see FIG. 42(A)) set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5 (step S2303). The segment display control information is information necessary for controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (a period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37). Then, the MPU 51 determines the control contents for the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display control information read out from the 7-segment display control information storage area in step S2303 (step S2304), and executes the control of the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the control contents (step S2305). Details of the determination and control of the control contents for the 7-segment display unit 39 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. Furthermore, the MPU 51 updates the already displayed information storage area (see FIG. 42 (A)) of the 7-segment display unit control information stored in the RAM 512 (step S2306), clears the value of the special out ball counter (step S2307), and terminates the 7-segment display unit control processing.

Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the 7-segment display control information storage area set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, FIG. 42(A) is a diagram showing an example of the 7-segment display control information storage area, FIG. 42(B) is a diagram showing an example of the control order storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area, and FIG. 42(C) is a diagram showing an example of the initial state (unupdated) of the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 42(A), the 7-segment display control information storage area includes a control order storage area shown in FIG. 42(B) and a previously displayed information storage area shown in FIG. 42(C).

As shown in FIG. 42(B), the control sequence memory area is an area that stores the order of numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (the period during which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is accumulated), and the control target order of segments A to G when displaying each number. This control sequence memory area includes a number display sequence memory area and a segment control sequence memory area.

The number display sequence memory area stores the sequence of numbers (number display sequence) to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (for example, from the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot in a low probability mode to the end of an open/close execution mode for a jackpot game for a normal jackpot). The number display sequence is determined in the display sequence setting process of FIG. 35 described above based on the number display sequence determination table (see FIG. 36) set for a set value that specifies the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. In the number display sequence memory area of the example shown in FIG. 42 (B), the display sequence A1 is set based on the number display sequence determination table for the set value 1 in the above-mentioned number display sequence setting process, and "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" are stored as the display sequence of numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. In other words, unless the setting is changed during the business hours of the game hall, a fixed sequence is determined as the number display sequence for each business day, and the number display sequence for a predetermined period during the same business day is fixed. In this way, since the number display order is fixed during a predetermined period on the business day, the numbers are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in the same order every time the predetermined period starts, so that numbers in the early number display order are easily displayed and numbers in the late number display order are difficult to display. For example, when the number display order is "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6", the numbers are displayed in this order, so that "2" and "3" are easily displayed, but "5" and "6" are difficult to display. This makes it possible to predict and specify the setting value while preventing the setting value from being easily specified, and allows players to enjoy predicting and specifying the setting value. In addition, since the number display order is fixed during the business day, numbers in the early number display order are easily displayed and numbers in the late number display order are difficult to display, for example, when the setting value is low (when the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is low), it is possible to prevent a player from recognizing that the setting is low with a small number of first wins. This prevents players from prematurely ending play on the gaming machine 10 they are playing, and helps prevent a decline in the operating rate of that gaming machine 10.

In addition, the more specific periods in a given period (the more consecutive jackpots), the more numbers are expected to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, the more consecutive jackpots there are, the more non-set values that can be identified among the multiple non-set values other than the set value. As a result, the more consecutive jackpots there are, the more information can be obtained to identify non-set values, and the set value candidates can be narrowed down. Then, by having 35 or more game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 in a given period, the player can identify all non-set values, and as a result, the set value can be recognized. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while aiming to identify all non-set values, that is, to recognize the set value, and can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the consecutive jackpots will continue (whether the jackpot type is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot), which increases the interest of the game.

The number display order is not limited to being fixed to the order set when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or the settings are changed, but may be determined when a jackpot game is started for a jackpot (first win) in low probability mode. In this way, the number display order is determined when a jackpot game such as a first win is started, so that the number display order is determined, for example, for each predetermined period. This makes it difficult for the player to guess the number display order, and therefore reduces the variation in the order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, it becomes possible to identify all non-set values with a small number of first wins, and it becomes possible to recognize the set values early. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that numbers not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 will be displayed, taking into account the numbers that have been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past, with the aim of identifying all non-set values and recognizing the set values.

Meanwhile, the segment control order storage area stores the control order (segment control order) of the segments A to G when displaying numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39. The segment control order is fixed as follows: Segment A → Segment B → Segment C → Segment D → Segment E → Segment F → Segment G. That is, the segment control order is not determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the settings are changed, or a jackpot is won, but is fixed as an order specific to the gaming machine 10. In this way, by fixing the segment control order as an order specific to the gaming machine 10, the player can grasp the control order of the segments A to G when a number corresponding to a non-set value is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to grasp the number that is scheduled to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 even before the number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing numbers that have not been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 based on the control order of the segments A to G, which increases the fun of the game.

The segment control order, like the number display order, is fixed for the same business day by being determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when the setting value is changed, but it is also possible to determine it for each business day. In this case, it becomes more difficult to grasp numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 compared to when the segment control order is fixed as an order specific to the gaming machine 10. This increases the difficulty until all non-set values are identified and the set value is recognized, so that, for example, when the set value is low (when the probability of a jackpot in low probability mode is low), it is possible to prevent the player from prematurely recognizing that the setting is low. This prevents the player from prematurely ending play on the gaming machine 10 that he is playing.

The segment control order may also be determined when a jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode starts (when a specified period starts), as described in the third embodiment below.

As shown in FIG. 42(C), the already-displayed information storage area is an area that stores information about numbers that have already been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a specified period, numbers that are in the process of being displayed, and segments A to G that have already been targeted for control. This already-displayed information storage area stores already-displayed number flag information, currently-displayed number flag information, and already-displayed segment flag information.

The already-displayed number flag information is information about a flag indicating whether or not a number has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period. This already-displayed number flag information includes a number 1 already-displayed flag, a number 2 already-displayed flag, a number 3 already-displayed flag, a number 4 already-displayed flag, a number 5 already-displayed flag, and a number 6 already-displayed flag. The number 1 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When the number 1 already-displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period, and when the number 1 already-displayed flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 1 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period. The number 2 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. The number 2 already displayed flag indicates that the number 2 has been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period when it is set to on, and indicates that the number 2 has not been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period when it is set to off. The number 3 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 has been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. The number 3 already displayed flag indicates that the number 3 has been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period when it is set to on, and indicates that the number 3 has not been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period when it is set to off. The number 4 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 has been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. The number 4 already displayed flag indicates that the number 4 has been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period when it is set to on, and indicates that the number 4 has not been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period when it is set to off. The number 5 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game setting value 5 has been displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. When the number 5 already displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 5 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period, and when the number 5 already displayed flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 5 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. The number 6 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 has been displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. When the number 6 already displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 6 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period, and when the number 6 already displayed flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 6 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period.

The display target number flag information is a flag indicating whether or not a number is a display target number on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period. This display target number flag information includes a number 1 display target flag, a number 2 display target flag, a number 3 display target flag, a number 4 display target flag, a number 5 display target flag, and a number 6 display target flag. The number 1 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When the number 1 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 1 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when it is set to off, it indicates that the number 1 is not a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 2 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. The number 2 display target flag indicates that the number 2 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to on, and indicates that the number 2 is not a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to off. The number 3 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. The number 3 display target flag indicates that the number 3 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to on, and indicates that the number 3 is not a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to off. The number 4 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. The number 4 display target flag indicates that the number 4 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to on, and indicates that the number 4 is not a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to off. The number 5 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game setting value 5 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When the number 5 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 5 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when the number 5 display target flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 5 is not a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 6 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When the number 6 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 6 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when the number 6 display target flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 6 is not a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

The already-targeted segment flag information is a flag indicating whether each of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period. This already-targeted segment flag information includes a segment A already-targeted flag, a segment B already-targeted flag, a segment C already-targeted flag, a segment D already-targeted flag, a segment E already-targeted flag, a segment F already-targeted flag, and a segment G already-targeted flag. The segment A already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether the segment A of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period. When the segment A already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment A has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period, and when it is set to off, it indicates that the segment A is not a control target. The segment B already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether the segment B of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period. When the segment B already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment B has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when the segment B is set to off, it indicates that the segment B is not a control target. The segment C already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment C of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When the segment C already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment C has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when the segment C is set to off, it indicates that the segment C is not a control target. The segment D already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment D of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When the segment D already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment D has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when the segment D is set to off, it indicates that the segment D is not a control target. The segment E already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment E of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When the segment E already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that segment E has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when the flag is set to off, it indicates that segment E is not a control target. The segment F already-targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not segment F of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off during the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. When the segment F already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that segment F has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when the flag is set to off, it indicates that segment F is not a control target. The segment G already-targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not segment G of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off during the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. When the segment G already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that segment G has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when the flag is set to off, it indicates that segment G is not a control target.

In the initial state, all flags included in the already displayed number flag information, the display target number flag information, and the already targeted segment flag information are set to off in the already displayed information storage area. Here, the initial state indicates a state outside the specified period, that is, a state at the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot (first jackpot) in low probability mode (the start of a specified period in which the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is accumulated). In this embodiment, all flags included in the already displayed information storage area are set to off (cleared) in step S2405 in the ending additional image control process in FIG. 46 described later when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), that is, when it is a normal jackpot for which the end of the specified period is set.

Here, Figs. 43 to 45 are diagrams showing examples of control (display examples) of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the 7-segment display unit control information storage area, and examples of updating the already-displayed information storage area. Below, with reference to Figs. 43 to 45, examples of control (display examples) of the 7-segment display unit 39 and examples of updating the already-displayed information storage area in the 7-segment display unit control information storage area will be described.

As described above, in the seven-segment display control process of FIG. 41, the control content of the seven-segment display 39 is determined (step S2304), and the seven-segment display 39 is controlled at the ending of the big win game according to the control content (step S2305). After that, each flag information stored in the already-displayed information storage area is updated (step S2306).

The control contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 are determined according to the value of the special out ball counter (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period set for the big win game) acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process in FIG. 41. For example, when the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42 (C)), if the value of the special out ball counter is less than 7, some of the seven segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are subject to control for turning on and off. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 5 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period is 5), when the contents of the control sequence storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42 (C) (when all flags are set to off), the five segments A to E of the 7-segment display unit 39 are subject to control for turning on and off. When the contents of the control sequence memory area are as shown in FIG. 42(B), the number 2 is displayed first, so segment A is turned on, segment B is turned on, segment C is turned off, segment D is turned on, and segment E is turned on. As a result, the 7-segment display unit 39 changes from the fully turned off state (uncontrolled state) in which all segments A to G are turned off as shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state in which segments A, B, D, and E are turned on as shown in FIG. 43(B).

The change from the uncontrolled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B) may be made all at once, or may be made stepwise by turning on or off each of segments A through E in turn as the controlled objects. Furthermore, when turning on or off each of segments A through E in turn as the controlled objects, the segments A through E that are the controlled objects may be made to flash, for example, to clearly indicate that they are the controlled objects. Of course, it is not necessary to clearly indicate which segments are the controlled objects.

On the other hand, when the control of the seven-segment display unit 39 is terminated, the already-displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the seven-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B), the already-displayed information storage area is updated from the initial state in which all flags shown in FIG. 42(C) are set to OFF to the contents shown in FIG. 43(C). Specifically, in the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), for the number 2 that is first displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, five segments A to E out of segments A to G are controlled, and segments F and G are not controlled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43(C), in the already-displayed number flag information, since none of the numbers 1 to 6 are displayed, all flags including the number 1 already-displayed flag, the number 2 already-displayed flag, the number 3 already-displayed flag, the number 4 already-displayed flag, the number 5 already-displayed flag, and the number 6 already-displayed flag are maintained as OFF. In addition, in the displayed number flag information, the displayed number 2 flag for the number 2, for which the five segments A to E are the control targets, is set to on. In addition, in the already displayed segment flag information, since segments A to E are the control targets, the segment A already targeted flag, segment B already targeted flag, segment C already targeted flag, segment D already targeted flag, and segment E already targeted flag for segments A to E are set to on.

Also, when the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42(C)), if the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the seven-segment display control process in FIG. 41 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period set for the big win game) exceeds seven, at least one number (for example, 2) is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 10 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period is 10), a total of ten segments A to G are subject to control on the seven-segment display unit 39. In other words, the seven (all) segments A to G are subject to control to be turned on and off on the seven-segment display unit 39, so that the first display order number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, and further, three segments A to C are subject to control to be turned on and off for the second display order number. Specifically, when the contents of the control sequence storage area are as shown in FIG. 42(B) and the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state as shown in FIG. 42(C) (when all flags are set to off), the number 2 is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 because the first number in the display order is 2, and then the number 3 is displayed. Therefore, the seven-segment display unit 39 changes from the uncontrolled state in which all segments A to G are turned off as shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segment control state in which segments A, B, D, E, and G are turned on and segments C and F are turned off as shown in FIG. 44(B) and the seven-segment display unit 39 displays the number 2, and further changes from the all-segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 44(B) to the partial segment control state in which segments A to C are controlled as shown in FIG. 44(C). In the example shown in FIG. 44(C), the second number to be displayed is 3, so segments A to C are turned on.

The change from the uncontrolled state shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B), and the change from the all-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B) to the partial-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(C) may be made all at once, or may be made stepwise by sequentially turning on or off segments A through G or segments A through C. Also, when sequentially turning on or off segments A through G or segments A through C, the segments being controlled may be made to flash to clearly indicate that they are being controlled. Of course, it is not necessary to clearly indicate the segments being controlled.

In addition, when the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled, the already-displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the seven-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 44(A), through the all-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B), to the partial-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(C), the already-displayed information storage area is updated from the initial state in which all flags are set to off shown in FIG. 42(C), through the contents shown in FIG. 45(A) and FIG. 45(B), to the contents finally shown in FIG. 45(C). Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 44(B), for the number 2 that is first displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, all segments A to E of the segments A to G are subject to control. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45(A), in the already-displayed segment flag information, all already-targeted flags for segments A to G are set to on. Then, when all the already-targeted flags for segments A to G are set to on, the control to display the number 2 is completed, so as shown in FIG. 45(B), in the already-displayed number flag information, the number 2 already-displayed flag is set to on, and in the currently-displayed number flag information, the currently-displayed number 2 flag is set to off while the currently-displayed number 3 flag is set to on. After that, in the already-displayed segment flag information, all the already-targeted flags for segments A to G are set to off. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 45(C), in the already-displayed segment flag information, the segment A already-targeted flag, segment B already-targeted flag, and segment C already-targeted flag for segments A to C are set to on. In other words, every time all the already-targeted flags in the already-displayed segment flag information are set to on (every time the seven segments A to G are set to the control target), the already-displayed flag for the number that was the display target in the already-displayed number flag information is set to on, the display target flag for the number that was the display target in the currently-displayed number flag information is set to off, while the display target flag for the number that will be the next display target is set to on.

As described above, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled according to the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information, thereby displaying all or part of the numbers corresponding to game setting values (non-set values) other than the game setting values (set values) that determine the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery on the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot. This allows the player to identify or guess the non-set values based on the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39, and as a result, to recognize the set values.

Incidentally, some gaming machines, like gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, have multiple setting values with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery, and the setting value can be selected by the gaming hall. In this case, the gaming hall will want to set the setting value low in order to lower the expected value of balls dispensed. And when the setting value is set low, there is a tendency to prefer a gaming machine whose setting value is not known to players, in order to avoid players quitting play because they realize that the setting value is low.

On the other hand, players want gaming machines with set values to allow them to guess (narrow down to multiple set values) or recognize the set values, so that they can play on gaming machines 10 with a higher expected value for ball payout. In this way, gaming parlors and players tend to have conflicting expectations regarding gaming machines that suggest or clearly indicate game set values.

In contrast, in this embodiment, during a specific period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot open/close execution mode, among the game balls 99 that have entered the variable winning port 316, the game balls (special out balls) that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 are retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention section 38. Then, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 after the specific period has elapsed is counted, and the number of segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 that correspond to the count number are controlled. In other words, at least unless the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game is transitioned to a jackpot game, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are not controlled or lit. Therefore, the set value is not inferred or recognized unless the game is transitioned to a jackpot game.

In addition, it is difficult for the game balls 99 to enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the Krun device 37, and for example, one to two game balls 99 are expected to enter for one 16R jackpot game (about one for 10R of round game). Therefore, in one jackpot, it is difficult for the 7-segment display unit 39 to identify or guess the non-set value. On the other hand, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Krun device 37 during a predetermined period from the start of the jackpot game (opening) that is executed when the lottery result in the low probability mode becomes a jackpot to the end of the opening and closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game (the start of the ending). In other words, if the first hit is a sure-variable jackpot, the predetermined period will not end as long as the jackpot streak in the high probability mode continues, but will continue until the opening and closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game ends when a normal jackpot is won. That is, in this embodiment, the game has a feature that it is not easy to recognize the non-set value and therefore the set value, but the longer the consecutive big wins in the high probability mode continue, the more game balls 99 are expected to enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and the more accurately the non-set value (set value) can be guessed, and when 35 or more game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 373 in a specified period, the non-set value (set value) can be reliably identified. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, information that allows the setting value to be guessed according to the number of specific conditions that are established in a specified period, that is, the number of game balls that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 in a specified period, is displayed, and in the case of a single big win, the expected value of the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball port 373 is low, so the game has a feature that makes it difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). On the other hand, in the case of consecutive big wins, if the number of consecutive wins is small, it is difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (setting value), but as the number of consecutive wins increases, the expected number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball port 373 increases, so the difficulty of guessing the non-set value (setting value) decreases. That is, in this embodiment, the setting value can be guessed by identifying or guessing some or all of the multiple non-set values by stacking all or part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. In this way, the gaming machine 10 meets the wishes of the store by suppressing the setting value from being easily identified or guessed (narrowed down), while also meeting the wishes of the player by enabling more accurate guessing of the non-set value (setting value) through consecutive big wins. This provides a gaming machine 10 that meets the wishes of both the store and the player.

In conventional slot machines, images suggesting or clearly indicating the set value may be displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which game performance is performed. Images suggesting or clearly indicating the set value are displayed, for example, on a jackpot confirmation screen, a jackpot start screen, a jackpot end screen, a start screen such as an ART or AT, a continuation screen, and an end screen, and the content of the displayed image is determined by lottery. Specifically, on an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, as a jackpot game end screen, in addition to a default screen that does not suggest or clearly indicate the set value, a screen that suggests or clearly indicates, with a certain probability, that the set value is equal to or higher than a specific set value (for example, equal to or higher than an intermediate set value (set value 4 to 6)), that the set value is high (for example, set value 5 or 6), that the set value is odd (for example, set value 1, 3, or 5), that the set value is even (for example, set value 2, 4, or 6), that the set value is not a specific set value (for example, the negation of set value 1), that the set value is the highest set value (for example, set value 6), etc. are presented.

However, in the case of suggesting or indicating a setting value in a conventional slot machine, the probability of presenting a default screen that does not suggest or indicate a setting value is set high, and the probability of presenting a screen that suggests or indicates a setting value is set low, so that the setting value cannot be easily identified or guessed. In particular, the probability of suggesting or indicating a setting value that is advantageous to the player, or indicating that a specific setting value is set low. In addition, the reliability of suggesting an odd setting value or an even setting value tends to be low, and for example, the reliability is often set to about 60%. Furthermore, in a slot machine, even if a high setting value is suggested or indicated, there is no suggestion or indication that denies a high setting value (e.g., setting value 5 or 6), and in particular no suggestion or indication that denies the highest setting value (e.g., setting value 6). In other words, in a slot machine, information that is disadvantageous to the player, such as denial of a high setting value, is not presented.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, as described above, information (non-set values) that allows the set value to be inferred is displayed as numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39 according to the number of specific conditions that are met in a specified period, i.e., the number of game balls that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 in a specified period. In other words, by displaying the numbers for the non-set values one by one on the seven-segment display unit 39, it is possible to identify or infer some of the non-set values, making it possible to infer the set value, and by displaying the numbers for all of the non-set values, all of the non-set values can be recognized, making it possible to identify the set value.

In this way, this embodiment is fundamentally different from slot machines and other gaming machines that suggest or clearly indicate a set value at a fixed rate, and allows the user to recognize a set value by identifying multiple non-set values based on the numbers displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. In addition, this embodiment clearly indicates or suggests a non-set value (set value) depending on the number of specific conditions (balls 99 entering the special out ball port 373) that are met during a jackpot game in a specified period of time, and in this respect it is also different from conventional gaming machines that suggest or clearly indicate a set value at a fixed rate. Furthermore, this embodiment is also different from slot machines and other gaming machines that suggest or clearly indicate a set value in the sense that the difficulty of identifying or guessing some or all of the multiple non-set values decreases as the number of consecutive jackpots increases.

In this embodiment, numerical information indicating multiple non-set values is presented depending on the number of specific conditions (game balls 99 entering the special out ball port 373) that are met during jackpot play in a specified period of time. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines, the frequency with which information for identifying the set value is presented does not decrease. Instead, as long as the specified period continues (as long as consecutive jackpots continue), the presentation of information for identifying the non-set value (set value) continues, making it even more fun to guess the set value, and increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied for the number of non-set values in a predetermined period, all non-set values can be identified. In other words, regardless of the high or low non-set values, all non-set values, including information disadvantageous to the player, are presented to the player. In this way, in this embodiment, unlike the case where a set value is suggested or clearly indicated in a conventional slot machine, even information disadvantageous to the player is presented so as to deny the highest set value, etc. As a result, the player can obtain not only advantageous information but also disadvantageous information as information for identifying or guessing the set value, and can determine whether or not to continue playing on the gaming machine 10 based on the disadvantageous information. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is considered that a number display order in which the display order of numbers corresponding to a high set value (for example, a set value of 5 or more) is delayed is set so that it is easy to select. Conversely, it is considered that a number display order in which the display order of numbers corresponding to a low set value (for example, a set value of 2 or less) is early is set so that it is easy to select. In this way, the display order of numbers corresponding to a low set value is early and the display order of numbers corresponding to a high set value is late, so that a higher set value is displayed later. This allows the player to anticipate the possibility that the set value will be a high value that is advantageous to the player until the player is aware of the set value, allowing the player to enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while hoping that the set value may be high.

[Ending additional image control processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ending additional image control process executed in step S2215 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Steps S2401 to S2403>
As shown in FIG. 46, in the ending additional image control process, in step S2401, the MPU 51 reads out various information in the already-displayed information storage area updated in step S2306 of FIG. 41, i.e., already-displayed number flag information, currently-displayed number flag information, and already-displayed segment flag information updated due to the passage of the current specific period, and determines an additional image to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the big win game based on this information (step S2402). Here, the additional image is an image showing the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39, and is an image that can specify or estimate a non-set value (see FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C)). Then, the MPU 51 transmits an additional image display command to the display control device 6 to display the additional image determined in step S2402 on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending performance. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 displays an additional image on the symbol display unit 341 as an ending performance.

Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of screen transitions during the ending presentation of a jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A1) is an example of the screen of the pattern display section 341 during the first half of the ending of a sure-variant jackpot game, and FIG. 47 (A2) is an example of the screen of the pattern display section 341 during the first half of the ending of a normal jackpot game. Also, FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C) are example screens (example setting value suggestion screens) of the pattern display section 341 during the second half of the ending.

As shown in FIG. 47 (A1), in the ending of a special jackpot game, an image is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as the first half of the ending presentation to indicate that a high probability mode and high frequency support mode will be entered after the special jackpot game ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (B1), in the ending of a normal jackpot game, an image is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as the first half of the ending presentation to indicate that a low probability mode and low frequency support mode (time-saving mode) will be entered after the normal jackpot game ends. In addition, in the first half of the ending presentation, in addition to an image that indicates the game mode to be entered after the jackpot game ends, images that indicate the number of consecutive jackpots and the number of balls dispensed are displayed.

On the other hand, in the latter half of the ending performance of the big win game, an image including an additional image determined in step S2402 of the ending additional image control process in FIG. 46 is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as a result of the Kloon game using the Kloon device 37. As shown in FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2) and FIG. 47 (C), the additional image shows the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period, and includes five setting value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display unit 39 in which numbers corresponding to non-set values can be displayed. Specifically, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43 (A) to the display state shown in FIG. 43 (B), an additional image including an image imitating the display state on the 7-segment display unit 39 as shown in FIG. 47 (B1) is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as the latter half of the ending performance. In addition, when the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 44(B) via FIG. 44(C), an additional image including a setting value suggestion image imitating the display state shown in FIG. 44(B) and a setting value suggestion image imitating the display state shown in FIG. 44(C) is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as the latter half of the ending performance, as shown in FIG. 47(B2). Furthermore, when all five numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before the end of the predetermined period, an additional image including a setting value suggestion image imitating the state in which each number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 as shown in FIG. 47(C) is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as the latter half of the ending performance. In the example shown in FIG. 47(C), an image is displayed indicating that the numbers "2" to "6" other than the number "1" are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. In this case, it is possible to specify that the non-set values are "2" to "6", and as a result, it is possible to recognize that the set value is "1".

In this way, in the ending performance of the jackpot game, the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period is displayed as an additional image including five setting value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display unit 39 in the second half part. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can check information about the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 up until that jackpot game. This allows the player to recognize the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 again even if the player does not know that information about non-set values will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, if the player misses the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39, or if the player has forgotten the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past during that predetermined period. Therefore, the player can identify or guess the non-set values at the ending and recognize or guess the set values based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for each jackpot game.

In addition, whether or not to display an additional image showing the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period as the ending performance of a jackpot game on the pattern display unit 341 is a design matter, and it is also possible to not display an additional image on the pattern display unit 341 in the ending performance. In this way, if an additional image is not displayed in the ending performance, if there is a number that has been displayed in the past during the predetermined period, it becomes difficult to identify or guess the non-set value based on the number previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and even to guess or recognize the set value. In other words, by not displaying an additional image in the ending performance, it becomes more difficult to identify or guess the non-set value (set value), so that the set value of the gaming machine 10 is recognized early, and at least it is prevented from being recognized as not being a high set value. This makes it possible to prevent the game of the gaming machine 10 from ending early, and suppresses a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

<Step S2404>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 46, in step S2404, the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot. Whether the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be judged based on whether the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is ON. Then, if the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2305, and if the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: No), the MPU 51 ends the ending additional image control process.

<Step S2405>
If the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 initializes the already-displayed information storage area (sets all flags to OFF) and ends the ending additional image control process. That is, if the jackpot is a 5R normal jackpot in which the end of a predetermined period is set, the MPU 51 initializes the already-displayed information storage area.

As described above, in this embodiment, while the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed, in order to specify the non-set value (set value) or to increase the accuracy of the guess, it is necessary to have more game balls 99 enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kluen device 37 in a specified period, and the hurdle until the non-set value (set value) is specified is high. Therefore, for the game hall, there is an advantage that the set value is not easily known to the player. On the other hand, for the player, there is an advantage that the set value can be specified or guessed. In addition, the set value can be specified or guessed by winning the jackpot lottery, and the accuracy of the guess of the set value increases with the continuation of the probability variable jackpot (consecutive jackpots), and in some cases, the set value can be recognized, which can give the gaming machine 10 a gaming feature. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the player.

In addition, when a jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game will be ended in the middle of the jackpot game, and if the game is in the high probability mode, the game will not be ended during the high probability mode. Therefore, by setting the predetermined period to the period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot open/close execution mode, the player is prevented from ending the game before the end of the predetermined period. This prevents a player who does not know the timing (end of the predetermined period) when the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed from ending the game just before the non-set value (set value) becomes specified or guessable, even if the player proceeds with the game and does not know the timing when the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed, the non-set value (set value) can be guessed or recognized. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena behavior of other players who play aiming for the timing when the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed.

In addition, since the start of the specified period is the start of the jackpot game triggered by the first jackpot win in the low probability mode, not only is it necessary to win at least one jackpot before the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed, but even if the specified period has started, the hurdle of being able to specify the non-set value (set value) is high as described above, so a considerable number of game balls 99 will be fired onto the game board 31 and a considerable number of jackpot draws will be taken until the non-set value (set value) is guessed or specified to some extent. Therefore, at the stage where the set value can be guessed or specified with a high degree of accuracy, it is highly likely that the number of unit jackpot draws (ease of receiving a jackpot draw) has also reached a stage where it is possible to sufficiently judge. As a result, when the non-set value (set value) can be guessed or specified with a high degree of accuracy, the player can judge the ball-out performance of the gaming machine 10 during play, including not only the non-set value (set value) but also the number of unit jackpot draws, making it possible to decide whether to continue playing. For example, even if the set value is low, if the number of unit jackpot draws is high, it is possible to make a comprehensive decision to continue playing. On the other hand, even if the set value is high, if the number of unit jackpot draws is low, it is possible to make a comprehensive decision to abandon playing.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, information for identifying or guessing non-set values is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 at the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, at the end of each jackpot game, the player can check information about non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 up until that jackpot game. This allows the player to recognize the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 again even if the player does not know that information about non-set values will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, if the player misses the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39, or if the player has forgotten the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past during the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can identify or guess the non-set value at the end of each jackpot game based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39, and enjoy the progress of the game by recognizing or guessing the set value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 at the end of a jackpot game, but the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 may be displayed on a display unit such as the pattern display unit 341 after the end of a jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, the display history for a predetermined period may be made displayable during a special period other than the specified period. For example, in a standby state in which neither variable play nor jackpot play is being performed, it is possible to display the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 on a display unit such as the pattern display unit 341 by a predetermined operation on the gaming machine 10 by the player. In this way, by displaying the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 on the pattern display unit 341 after the end of a jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, it becomes possible to check the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39 when they have been forgotten. This makes it possible to identify or guess the non-set value based on the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39. Displaying the display history on the pattern display unit 341 during standby or other times will be described in detail in the fourth embodiment below.

In this way, when the display history can be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in a standby state, etc., there is an advantage that it is possible to check the display contents of the seven-segment display unit 39 in the past when the display contents have been forgotten. On the other hand, if the display history can be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in a standby state, etc., anyone can check the display history by performing a specified operation on an empty gaming machine 10. In other words, it becomes possible to identify or guess the non-set value (set value) by taking advantage of the benefits obtained by others, which allows so-called hyena behavior. In contrast, in this embodiment, it is not permitted to check the display history for a specified period on the seven-segment display unit 39 after the end of the jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period. In other words, the display of specific information indicating the non-set value, including the display history for the specified period, is restricted outside the specified period. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the hyena behavior of identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) by taking advantage of the benefits obtained by others.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the first hit is a special jackpot, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first jackpot game to the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the high probability mode, but the predetermined period may be set for each jackpot regardless of the type of jackpot. In other words, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot game regardless of whether it is a first hit or a consecutive hit. In this case, the predetermined period begins at the start of the jackpot game or the open/close execution mode, and ends at the end of the jackpot game or the open/close execution mode.

In this embodiment, numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Instead of or in addition to displaying numbers corresponding to non-setting, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, numbers or letters corresponding to non-set values may be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and a non-set value indicating reach effect may be executed in the symbol display unit 341 to indicate the non-set value. As a non-set value indicating reach effect, it is possible to stop and display a decorative pattern with, for example, a repeating number corresponding to a non-set value when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In this way, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a number corresponding to a non-set value is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and a non-set value indicating reach effect is executed in which the non-set value is indicated on the symbol display unit 341, so that the player can enjoy the variable game not only by checking whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in the variable game, but also by focusing on the numbers and the like stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and by focusing on the combination of decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Also, when the non-set value indicating reach effect is executed as one of the reach effects, it is also conceivable that in the reach of the decorative symbols of the numbers corresponding to the set value, the numbers are not displayed as a set of double numbers, but are displayed as a miss. For example, if the setting value is 1, the decorative symbols can stop and be displayed as "222," "333," "444," "555," and "666," but not "111," and a reach with a decorative symbol of 1 is guaranteed to be a miss. In this way, by not displaying the repeated numbers corresponding to the setting value, it is usually desirable for the decorative symbols to stop and be displayed as repeated numbers, but it is also desirable not to display the repeated numbers 5 or 6, which negate the high setting value, so it becomes possible to enjoy the reach performance from a different perspective than before.

It is also conceivable that the display of numbers or the like corresponding to non-set values on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, or the non-set value explicit reach effect, can be executed only at specific timing. In this way, by limiting the display of numbers or the like corresponding to non-set values on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 to specific timing, or executing the non-set value explicit reach effect, it is possible to enjoy the game by focusing on the variable game executed at the specific timing.

The specific timing may be, for example, a timing when the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and the symbol display unit 341 notify the player that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in a variable game performed in a high probability game state or a time-limited game state. In this way, by clearly indicating or suggesting a non-set value in a variable game in a high probability game state or a time-limited game state, the reserved amount is consumed at high speed by the high frequency support mode, and the player can enjoy a variable game in a high probability game state or a time-limited game state, which tends to be monotonous. In addition, the specific timing may be set when the number of variable games performed after the transition to the high probability game state or the time-limited game state is within a predetermined number of times. For example, the predetermined number of times range may be set when the number of variable games performed after the transition to the high probability game state is small (for example, 1 to 10 times) or large (for example, 100 times or more, 150 times or more, 200 times or more). That is, the non-set value may be indicated or suggested when a jackpot occurs early after transitioning to the guaranteed variable play state, or when a player is stuck in a state where there are many variable play times before a jackpot occurs. In this case, the non-set value is indicated or suggested as a bonus for an early jackpot from the end of the jackpot play, or as a relief from being stuck. The predetermined number of times range may be set when the number of variable play times executed after transitioning to the time-saving play state is small (e.g., 1 to 10 times), or just before the end of the time-saving play state (e.g., 90 to 100 times). In this case, the non-set value is indicated or suggested as a bonus for an early jackpot from the end of the jackpot play, or for a jackpot just before the time-saving play ends.

[Other embodiments]
Other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. In the following other embodiments, the same configurations as those of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as those in the processing procedure will not be described. It is also possible to select and combine the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment and the following other embodiments in any combination.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, a specific period (the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening and closing execution mode) is set for each jackpot game executed within a predetermined period (the period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for a normal jackpot), and based on the number of specific conditions satisfied (the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the roon device 37 within the specific period), at the ending of the jackpot game for which the specific period is set, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values (set values) is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39.

Now, as in the first embodiment described above, when a specific period is set for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period, multiple specific periods corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpot games are set within the predetermined period in the jackpot consecutive wins. Therefore, in the jackpot consecutive wins, all or part of the specific information corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of each jackpot game. That is, in the jackpot consecutive wins, all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple parts. However, when all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of a jackpot game, that is, when all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple parts, if the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game executed first is not stored or recorded, it becomes difficult to specify the non-set value (set value) based on the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game executed first. That is, if the specific information presented in the past is not accurately stored or recorded in the 7-segment display unit 39, it is difficult to effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value). Therefore, in order to effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), it is necessary to accurately memorize or record the specific information previously presented on the seven-segment display unit 39, which may result in the player giving up on identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). This undermines the significance of increasing the interest of the game by being able to identify or guess the non-set value (set value).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a specific period is not set in a predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above, and specific information for identifying or guessing a non-set value (set value) is presented only once for one predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. In this way, in this embodiment, specific information for identifying or guessing a non-set value (set value) is presented only once for one predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, in this embodiment, the inconvenience of presenting specific information multiple times in a predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above is eliminated. That is, in this embodiment, specific information is presented only once for one predetermined period after the end of the predetermined period, so there is no specific information presented in the past in the predetermined period, and there is no specific information that the player should memorize or record. As a result, the player can identify or guess a non-set value (set value) by focusing on the specific information presented only once for one predetermined period, and is freed from the hassle of accurately memorizing or recording the presented specific information. Therefore, by being able to easily and effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), the player can enjoy playing the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), which increases the player's interest in the game.

In one example of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the specified period is the period from the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open/close execution mode of the normal jackpot game for a normal jackpot, and the specific condition is that a game ball enters the special out ball mouth of the Kluen device. Also, in one example of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, but the display timing (specified period) of the specific information is only the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game (after the end of the specified period) in which the end of the specified period is set for one specified period. In other words, the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 only once after the end of the specified period. Therefore, in this embodiment, some steps of the setting value suggestion process, the 7-segment display unit control process, and the ending additional image control process are different from those of the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the setting value suggestion process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the 7-segment display control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48, and FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the ending additional image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48. Below, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48 to FIG. 50, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
As shown in FIG. 48, in the setting value suggestion process in this embodiment, when the ending of the jackpot game starts (step S2201: Yes), unlike the setting value suggestion process in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 40), on the condition that the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set (step S2501: Yes), the control of the up and down movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 that receives the game ball 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kluen device 37 and the process of counting the number of game balls 99 that are retained in the game ball retention part 38 during the predetermined period are executed (steps S2202 to S2213). As a result, in this embodiment, when the predetermined period ends, in the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kluen device 37 during the predetermined period is counted in one go.

In addition, in the setting value suggestion process of this embodiment, on the condition that a 5R normal jackpot game is being played (step S2501: Yes), control of the up and down movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 and a process of counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retention portion 38 during a predetermined period are executed (steps S2202 to S2213), and the 7-segment display control process (step S2502) and the ending additional image control process (step S2503) are also executed on the condition that a 5R normal jackpot game is being played (step S2501: Yes) based on the stopper portion down movement flag (step S2203), which is set on the condition that a 5R normal jackpot game is being played, for which the end of the predetermined period is set.

[7-segment display control process]
The seven-segment display control process in this embodiment is executed when the ending starts in the 5R normal jackpot game (when the open/close execution mode (predetermined period) ends) as described above. Also, as shown in FIG. 49, the seven-segment display control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the seven-segment display control process in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 41), but when the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), instead of reading the control order of the seven-segment display control information and the already-displayed information (see FIG. 42), only the control order of the seven-segment display control information is read (step S2504). That is, in the seven-segment display control process in this embodiment, the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled (presentation of specific information) only at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot (after the end of the predetermined period) in which the end of the predetermined period is set for one predetermined period, so there is no need to read the already-displayed information to control the seven-segment display unit 39.

[Ending additional image control processing]
As shown in Fig. 50, the ending additional image control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the ending additional image control process in the first embodiment described above (see Fig. 46), but step S2404 in the ending additional image control process in the first embodiment described above is omitted. That is, since the ending additional image control process in this embodiment is executed in response to a 5R normal jackpot (Yes in step S2501 of the setting value suggestion process in Fig. 48), the initialization of the already displayed information storage area is executed in step S2405 without even determining that it is a 5R normal jackpot.

As described above, in this embodiment, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented only once per predetermined period. Therefore, there is no specific information previously presented in the predetermined period, and there is no specific information for the player to memorize or record. This allows the player to identify or guess the non-set value (set value) by focusing on the specific information presented only once per predetermined period, thereby freeing the player from the hassle of accurately memorizing or recording the presented specific information. Therefore, by being able to easily and effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), the player can enjoy playing the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), which increases the fun of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first embodiment described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

[Third embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which all or part of specific information (numbers) for identifying or guessing a plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the seven-segment display unit 39 after a specific period has elapsed (at the end of a big win game) based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during the specific period. Also, in the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which numbers corresponding to non-set values as specific information are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 according to a number display order (see FIG. 36 ) that is determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when a set value is changed. Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which the number display order is fixed when numbers are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

In the first embodiment described above, when the multiple numbers corresponding to the multiple non-set values as the specific information are displayed in the number display order (see FIG. 36) determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or the set value is changed, the numbers are displayed in the same order unless the gaming machine 10 is turned off or the set value is changed, and the control order of segments A to G when displaying each number on the 7-segment display unit 39 is fixed. Therefore, if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a specified period is less than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding specified period, only a smaller amount of specific information than the already presented information is obtained, and new specific information cannot be obtained. As a result, when it is expected that the number of specific conditions satisfied in a specified number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, there is a concern that interest in whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period, the number of specific conditions satisfied, and the specific information presented after the specific period has elapsed will decrease.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the order in which the specific information is presented (the order in which the numbers are displayed and the order in which the segments are displayed) is determined (changed). In this way, by determining the order in which the specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is satisfied, new specific information may be obtained even if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given period is less than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding given period. Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a given period and the number of specific conditions satisfied, and it is also possible to make the player interested in the specific information presented after the specific period has elapsed. This makes it possible to more effectively increase the interest of the game by presenting specific information that can identify or guess a non-set value (set value) according to the number of specific conditions satisfied.

Note that the predetermined conditions for determining (changing) the order in which the specific information is presented can be, for example, winning a jackpot, the opening of a jackpot game, the opening/closing execution mode, or the ending of a jackpot game. By setting the predetermined conditions in this way, the order in which the specific information is presented is determined (changed) each time a jackpot game is played. This prevents the order in which the specific information is presented from becoming fixed, and prevents the same specific information from being repeatedly presented or the presentation of specific information from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as the specific information each time a jackpot game is played. This makes it possible to generate interest in the order in which the specific information is presented in a jackpot game, for example, and thus to increase interest in the jackpot game.

The predetermined condition may be, for example, winning a specific jackpot (e.g., a jackpot in a special jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in a low probability mode), starting the opening, opening/closing execution mode, or ending of a specific jackpot game (e.g., a jackpot game for a special jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in a low probability mode). By setting the predetermined condition in this way, the number of times the order of presentation of the specific information is determined (changed) is reduced compared to when the predetermined condition is not limited to a specific jackpot or jackpot game. Therefore, by reducing the possibility that new information is presented in relation to the specific information presented earlier, it becomes more difficult to identify all non-set values (identify the set values), and it is possible to prevent all non-set values from being identified early (identify the set values). This makes it possible to prevent a player from ending play on the gaming machine 10 early when the set values are low, for example.

The predetermined condition may be the start or end of a predetermined or specific period. By setting the predetermined condition in this way, the order in which the specific information is presented is determined (changed) for each predetermined or specific period. It is therefore expected that new information will be obtained as the specific information for each predetermined or specific period. This makes it possible to create interest in the order in which the specific information is presented, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, the predetermined condition may be that a specific presentation is determined or executed as a variable game presentation. In this case, the specific presentation may be set to either a non-reach presentation or a reach presentation. Typically, the specific presentation may be a premium presentation in which a jackpot or a guaranteed jackpot is confirmed among the variable game presentations. Furthermore, the specific presentation may be a decorative pattern displayed in a specific combination on the pattern display unit 341, or a provisional stop display (intermediate stop display). For example, the decorative pattern may be displayed as "777" on the pattern display unit 341, or may be displayed as a specific reach-out number such as "767", or may be displayed as a specific non-reach-out number (variable number) such as "367", or may be displayed as a provisional stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that a development presentation will be executed when a development presentation such as a super reach presentation or a special reach presentation is executed as a reach presentation. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development effect will be executed, for example, a "7 Development 7" is displayed in which the left and right decorative symbols are in a reach state and a symbol such as "Development" is temporarily displayed as a center symbol indicating that a development effect will be executed. Even when predetermined conditions are set in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as the specific information for each predetermined period or specific period. This makes it possible to create interest in the presentation order of the specific information, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Other possible predetermined conditions include multiple consecutive single jackpots, or multiple consecutive presentations of the same specific information. By setting predetermined conditions in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) when it is difficult to obtain new specific information. This makes it easier to obtain new specific information, reducing the sense of boredom when new specific information is not available, and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if the specified conditions are satisfied before the start of the specified period, the presentation order of the specific information determined (changed) for the specified condition that is satisfied first may be prioritized, or the presentation order of the specific information determined (changed) for the specified condition that is satisfied last may be prioritized.

In one example of this embodiment, the display order of the numbers corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values as specific information and the segment display order when displaying each number are determined on the condition that a jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode is started (a specified period is started, a first jackpot game is started), and in accordance with these display orders, all or part of the numbers for identifying the multiple non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game (after the specified period has elapsed), when the end of the specified period is set.

Here, FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referenced in the procedure of the display order setting process of FIG. 51. Below, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, focusing on the display order setting process, which is a difference from the first embodiment described above.

[Display order setting process]
<Step S2601>
As shown in Fig. 51, in the display order setting process in this embodiment, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the jackpot game presentation start flag is set to ON (step S2601). The jackpot game presentation start flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game presentation is to be started, and is set to ON in step S2108 of the command determination process in Fig. 37. Then, if the jackpot game presentation start flag is ON (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2602, and if the jackpot game presentation start flag is OFF (step S2601: No), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Step S2602>
When the jackpot game presentation start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game presentation is a jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot is the first jackpot and whether a predetermined period is to start. Whether the jackpot is in the low probability mode can be judged by, for example, including probability mode information indicating whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game is in the low probability mode or the high probability mode in the jackpot game start command when the jackpot game is started, and by setting a flag indicating that the jackpot is in the low probability mode to on or off based on the probability mode information in the command judgment process of FIG. 37 when the jackpot game start command is transmitted from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, and by checking the flag by the MPU 51. The probability mode information may be set as a command separate from the jackpot game start command.

Then, if the jackpot is in low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot is the first jackpot (the jackpot that starts a specified period), the MPU 51 transitions to step S2603. On the other hand, if the jackpot is not in low probability mode (step S2602: No), i.e., if the jackpot is in high probability mode (step S2602: No), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2603 to S2605>
If the jackpot is in the low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 obtains the setting value from the RAM 512 (step S2603), and further determines the display order of the numbers corresponding to the multiple non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2604), sets the control order of segments A to G for each number (step S2605), and terminates the display order setting process.

The display order of the numbers corresponding to the multiple non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36, similar to step S2015 (see FIG. 35) of the display order setting process in the first embodiment described above. The determined number display order is stored in the RAM 512.

The control order of segments A to G for each number is determined based on a control order determination table for segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 shown in FIG. 52. In this control order determination table, multiple control orders for segments A to G are defined by the value of the control priority type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 35, and the probability of each control order being determined is set to be the same. The control order of segments A to G is determined to be the same for each number from multiple control orders depending on the value of the control priority type counter when the control order of segments A to G for each number is set. The determined control order of segments A to G is stored in RAM 512.

In this embodiment, when numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, segments A to G are controlled in the same order for all numbers, but the control order for each number may be different. In other words, the control order for segments A to G may be determined individually for each of the multiple numbers corresponding to non-set values.

As described above, in this embodiment, the order in which the numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 is determined for each predetermined period. This determines the order in which specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that new specific information may be obtained even if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period and the number of specific conditions satisfied, and to make the player interested in the specific information presented after the specific period has elapsed. This makes it possible to more effectively increase the interest of the game by presenting specific information according to the number of specific conditions that can identify or infer a non-set value (set value) are satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first and second embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which, based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, after a specific period has elapsed (at the end of a jackpot game), all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to a plurality of non-set values is presented on the seven-segment display unit 39, and presentation of the specific information on the seven-segment display unit 39 ends with the end of the jackpot game. In other words, in the first embodiment described above, all or part of the specific information is displayed during a predetermined specified period (after the specific period has elapsed).

However, if a player misses or forgets the presentation of specific information during the specified period, it is expected that the player will wish to reconfirm the specific information in order to identify or infer multiple non-set values by taking into account the specific information displayed in the past. It is also expected that when a player is replaced, the new player will wish to confirm the specific information displayed in the past. However, if the specific information is presented during the specified period, it is not presented outside the specified period, and so the new player will not be able to reconfirm the specific information.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, during a special period other than the prescribed period, all or part of the specific information previously presented can be presented. In this way, by being able to present specific information previously presented during a special period other than the prescribed period, the player can check the specific information previously presented during the special period. That is, if the player misses or forgets the presentation of specific information during the prescribed period, the player can recheck the specific information previously displayed, and when a player is replaced, the new player can check the specific information presented to the previous player. This allows the player to identify or guess multiple non-set values (set values) by taking into account the specific information presented to the previous player, improving the convenience of identifying or guessing non-set values (set values).

Here, an example of a special period is a waiting state (a state of waiting for customers) in which neither variable play nor jackpot play is being performed. By having the special period be a waiting state in this way, it becomes possible to check specific information previously presented in a state in which play is not being performed. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of various effects performed by the pattern display unit 341 and the like as the game progresses, such as variable play effects and jackpot play effects, from being obstructed.

When making it possible to present all or part of the specific information previously presented during the standby state, it is also possible to make it a condition that a specific input operation, such as a password input operation or a command input operation, is performed on a specific display screen to which the player can move during the standby state. The password or command may be made available by displaying it on the pattern display unit 341 at the ending or the like during a jackpot game in which the end of a specific period is set. The password or command may also be made available by displaying a matrix type two-dimensional code or the like on the pattern display unit 341 during the jackpot game, and reading this matrix type two-dimensional code or the like using a mobile device such as a smartphone or mobile phone, thereby transmitting it from an external server to the mobile device, so-called mobile linkage.

In this way, by making it possible to present all or part of the specific information previously presented during the waiting state on the condition that a specific input operation such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed, only players who can enter a password or command, i.e., only players to whom all or part of the specific information has been presented, can check all or part of the specific information previously presented during the waiting state. This makes it possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior and freeloading, whereby all or part of the specific information is checked by other players.

It is also possible to use a mobile device such as a smartphone or mobile phone to read a matrix-type two-dimensional code on a specific display screen that can be accessed in standby mode, thereby causing the mobile device to present all or part of the specific information that has been presented in the past.

The special period may also be set during a jackpot game, for example, during the opening, during the open/close execution mode, or during the ending. By setting the special period during a jackpot game in this way, past specific information is presented without the lottery result in the jackpot lottery being clearly indicated or suggested. This makes it possible to prevent the clear indication or suggestion of the result in the jackpot lottery from being hindered by the presentation of specific information. In addition, since a jackpot game is played after the result in the jackpot lottery is clearly indicated as a jackpot through variable play, player interest tends to decrease, but by presenting specific information that was previously presented during such a jackpot game, interest in the jackpot game is increased.

The special period may also be set during variable play. In this case, the total time during which the game is played (the time during which the power is on in the gaming machine 10 minus the time in standby mode) is theoretically longer than the time during which the jackpot variable play is played. Therefore, by making it possible to present past specific information during variable play, it becomes possible to set many timings at which past specific information can be presented. However, when the special period is set during variable play, it is preferable to limit the presentation of specific information for a certain period before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, for example, during a non-reach state in which a reach presentation is not being performed as a variable play presentation, or when the change time is short. This makes it possible to prevent the visual confirmation of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the stopped display of the decorative pattern from being hindered.

In addition, the presentation of past specific information during the special period may be performed at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, or may be performed at the player's discretion.

When past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, it becomes possible to have past specific information presented at a timing that the player does not expect. This makes it possible to impart an element of surprise to the gaming machine 10. In addition, since past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10 without the player having to perform any operations on the gaming machine 10, even a player with little knowledge of the gaming machine 10 can learn specific information that has been presented in the past. This ensures fairness between players.

Here, examples of the case where the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10 include, for example, presenting the specific information presented in the past as a demonstration screen in a standby state, presenting the specific information presented in the past before the execution of a specific reach performance at a certain rate (including 100%) when the execution of the reach performance is scheduled in a variable game, and determining to present the specific information presented in the past by a lottery performed at a specific timing of a variable game or a big win game. When the specific information presented in the past is presented as a demonstration screen in a standby state, the player can select a gaming machine 10 for executing a game from vacant machines while taking into consideration the past specific information presented on the demonstration screen, so that the degree of freedom and convenience when selecting a gaming machine 10 for executing a game is improved. Also, when the specific information presented in the past is presented before the execution of a specific reach performance when the execution of the reach performance is scheduled in a variable game, the presentation of the past specific information serves as a pre-notification performance for the execution of the specific reach performance, so that the interest in the variable game is improved. It is also conceivable that the presentation of past specific information in variable play can be performed as an expectation suggestion effect (including a confirmation effect indicating a jackpot) that suggests the expectation (reliability) in the case where the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, or as a chance-up effect that increases the expectation (reliability). In this case as well, interest in variable play is increased. Furthermore, when past specific information is presented by a lottery performed at a specific timing in variable play or jackpot play, the past specific information is presented at a specific random timing determined by the gaming machine 10, which can add a special element of surprise to the game. Furthermore, when the player knows the specific timing at which the specific information is presented, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether the specific information is presented at the specific timing, which increases the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when the presentation of past specific information during a special period is executed at the player's will, the player does not have to passively wait for the past specific information to be presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, but can actively check the past specific information at a timing of his/her own preference during the special period. Therefore, when multiple non-set values (set values) are identified or inferred in consideration of past specific information, the timing of the presentation of past specific information reflects the player's will without being restricted by the gaming machine 10, improving convenience.

Here, an example of the presentation of past specific information during a special period being executed at the player's will is the presentation of previously presented specific information when a player performs a specified operation on the operation button 20 or the like during a special period set in standby mode, during variable play, or during a jackpot play.

In one example of this embodiment, at the end of a jackpot game (prescribed period), all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to the multiple non-set values displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed, and during the standby period (special period), by performing a specified operation on the operation button 20 or the selection determination unit 21, all or part of the specific information (numbers) displayed at the end of the last three jackpot games is displayed on the pattern display unit 341. Note that in this example of the embodiment, it is possible to display all or part of the specific information previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 on the pattern display unit 341 without performing an input operation such as a password or command.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 53 to 63.

Here, FIG. 53 is an oblique view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53.

As shown in FIG. 53, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment further includes a selection determination unit 21 provided on the front frame 11.

The selection determination unit 21 is operated by the player and is a push button that, when pressed by the player in a standby state described below, changes the display screen (see FIG. 60) on the symbol display unit 341. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

The multiple selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from options (items) on various screens such as the top menu screen during the standby state screen transition process in Figs. 61 and 62 described below (see Fig. 60), and include an up selection button 211, a down selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214. Here, provisional selection means that the provisionally selected content is confirmed (stored in RAM 512) by operating the decision button 21B. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 includes an up selection operation switch 211a, a down selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d that switch the input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 as shown in Fig. 54. These switches 211a to 211d are connected to the input/output I/F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not each selection button 211-214 has been operated based on the input signal of each switch 211a-211d.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is detected that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has started, it is determined that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed. Of course, it may also be determined that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed when it is detected that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is continuing or has ended.

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to confirm the provisionally selected item. The decision button 21B also has a decision operation switch 21Ba that switches the input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described below. The decision operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output I/F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not an operation has been performed on the decision operation switch 21Ba based on the input signal of the decision operation switch 21Ba.

In place of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the decision button 21B, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts player operations on the touch keys may be provided as an operation means. Furthermore, in place of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the decision button 21B, a translucent touch panel that accepts player operations may be provided on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. In place of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214), a jog dial may be provided. Although the selection switches 211a-211d and the decision operation switch 21Ba are contact switches, they may be, for example, piezoelectric elements as long as they can be used to detect the presence or absence of operations by the player.

Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 53.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the secondary timer interrupt process of this embodiment, in addition to the same processes (steps S2000 to S2005) as the secondary timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above, an operation detection process (step S2701) and a standby state screen transition process (step S2702) are executed.

[Operation detection process]
The operation detection process is a process for detecting whether or not an operation has been performed on the various buttons 20, 21A, and 21B. Here, Fig. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 55.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 executes an operation button operation detection process (step S2801), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), a selection button operation detection process (step S2803), a selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), a decision button operation detection process (step S2805), and a decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806).

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2201 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, so that the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 20 is determined at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interruption period of the sub timer interruption process. Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG. 57.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
57, in step S2901, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. In step S2902, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Then, in step S2903, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the third detection flag to the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a, and the operation detection process ends.

In this way, in the operation button operation detection process, steps S2901 to S2903 are executed, and the operation states of the most recent three operations at 1 msec intervals are stored in RAM 512 as the first detection flag to the third detection flag as the operation history of the operation button 20. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the operation state two states prior is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 57, in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2802 in the operation detection process, an operation pattern flag is set to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. The operation pattern flag is composed of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 38(A)). When only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 38(A)). When only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 38(A)). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has not been performed (see FIG. 38(A)). Here, Fig. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. Also, Fig. 59(A) is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern and the operation status for the operation button 20. Hereinafter, the operation button operation detection process will be described with reference to Figs. 58 and 59(A).

<Step S3001>
58, in step S3001, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. If the first operation detection flag is ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3002, and if the first operation detection flag is OFF (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is set to ON. If the second operation detection flag is ON (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3003, and if the second operation detection flag is OFF (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag is set to ON, which indicates the most recent operation state of the operation button 20. If the third operation detection flag is ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3004, and if the third operation detection flag is OFF (step S3003: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59 (A)). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation of the operation button 20 is continuing, and can grasp the time during which the operation button 20 is being continuously operated based on the number of times that the operation button operation continuation command is transmitted in succession. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the time that the operation button 20 has been continuously operated, making it possible to execute an operation button presentation based on a long press operation.

<Step S3005>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S3001 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S3001: No), it determines whether or not a second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is on (step S3005). If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3006, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag is on, which indicates the most recent operation state of the operation button 20. If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3007, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF. That is, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59 (A)), and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. Then, the second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operation state to an operation state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, if the second operation pattern flag is used to determine whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operation state to an operation state, the operation states of the operation button 20 three times are reflected, so that erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 caused by noise such as radio waves or static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S3008>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S3002 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S3002: No), it determines whether or not a third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S3008). If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010, whereas if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, the first operation pattern flag, and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation states of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has ended).

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third operation pattern flags to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). Note that, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operated state.

[Selection button operation detection process]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 56, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes an up selection button operation process, a down selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation process>
In the up selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the up selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the up selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the up selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as "up selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

<Down selection button operation process>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the lower selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the left selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that in the left selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

[Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes an up selection operation detection pattern determination process, a down selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Up Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Processing>
In the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets an up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the up selection button 211 from the operation history of the up selection button 211 determined based on the first up selection operation detection flag, the second up selection operation detection flag, and the third up selection operation detection flag. Here, the up selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "up selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "up selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58.

As shown in FIG. 59(B), in the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the first up selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second up selection operation pattern flag and the third up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first up selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the up selection button 211 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the second up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first up selection operation pattern flag and the third up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second up selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the up selection button 211 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the up selection button 211 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the third up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first up selection operation pattern flag and the second up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third up selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the up selection button 211 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the up selection button 211 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the up selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the up selection button 211 is in a non-operated state.

<Down Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the lower selection button 212 from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. Here, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "lower selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58.

As shown in FIG. 59(C), in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the lower selection button 212 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the lower selection button 212 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third lower selection operation detection flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in a non-operated state.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the left selection button 213 from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "left selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58.

As shown in FIG. 59(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the first left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the left selection button 213 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operated state.

<Right Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the right selection button 214 from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "right selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" can be read as the "right selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58.

As shown in FIG. 59(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the first right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the right selection button 214 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operated state.

[Decision button operation detection process]
In the determination button operation detection process (step S2805 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three operations. Since the determination button operation detection process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the determination button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "determination button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57.

[Decision Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process]
In the deciding operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 sets an operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the deciding button 21B from the operation history of the deciding button 21B determined based on the first deciding operation detection flag, the second deciding operation detection flag, and the third deciding operation detection flag. Here, the deciding operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the deciding operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "deciding operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58.

As shown in FIG. 59(F), in the decision operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the first decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The first decision operation pattern flag can then be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the decision button 21B is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the second decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The second decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the decision button 21B has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the third decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first decision operation pattern flag and the second decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the decision button 21B has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the decision button 21B is in a non-operated state.

[Standby state screen transition process]
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 55, in the standby state screen transition process executed at 2702 of the sub timer interrupt process, in the standby state where neither variable play nor big win play is being executed, the screen of the symbol display section 341 is transitioned in response to the operation of the operation button 20, the selection button 21A or the decision button 21B, and a process is executed that enables the player to make various selections and settings. Here, Fig. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition in the symbol display section 341 in the standby state.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the display of the changing decorative symbols is stopped, if the reserved number N and reserved number M are "0" and the game does not transition to a jackpot game state, the change stop screen in which the changing of the decorative symbols has stopped is maintained. Then, if the player operates the operation button 20 after the change stop screen is displayed, the display screen transitions from the change stop screen to the top menu screen. This top menu screen includes multiple screen transition images and a cursor image.

The multiple screen transition images are images for selecting a destination display screen and include multiple selectable items (destination display screens). The multiple screen transition images include a 7-segment display history selection screen transition image for transitioning to a 7-segment display history selection screen displayed as "7-segment display history," a character selection screen transition image for transitioning to a character selection screen displayed as "character selection," a character customization screen transition image for transitioning to a character customization screen displayed as "character customization," and a change stop screen transition image for transitioning to a change stop screen displayed as "back."

The cursor image is an image that indicates which of multiple selectable items is currently tentatively selected, and the item corresponding to the screen transition image to the right of the cursor image among the multiple screen transition images is the tentatively selected item. In the example shown in FIG. 60, it is shown that "7-segment display history" is tentatively selected. Furthermore, the screen transition image corresponding to the tentatively selected item among the multiple screen transition images is displayed in a manner that is distinguishable from the other screen transition images to emphasize that it is tentatively selected. Note that the tentatively selected item can be changed by operating the up selection button 211 or the down selection button 212.

On the top menu screen, the provisionally selected item (destination display screen) is confirmed by operating the decision button 21B, and the display screen corresponding to that item is displayed. For example, when the player selects the 7-segment display history selection screen transition image of "7-segment display history" and the decision button 21B is operated, the display screen is transitioned from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen.

The 7-segment display history selection screen is a screen that can be switched to a history screen on which the contents of the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a specified period are displayed. This history screen shows the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 for any of the last three specified periods, and includes a 1-time-ago history screen on which the contents of the specific information for the specified period one period ago are displayed, a 2-time-ago history screen on which the contents of the specific information for the specified period two periods ago are displayed, and a 3-time-ago history screen on which the contents of the specific information for the specified period three periods ago are displayed. Each history screen includes a history image in the same form as the additional image (see Figures 47 (B1), 47 (B2), and 47 (C)) displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the latter half of the ending of a jackpot game. The history image shows the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one specified period, and includes five setting value suggestion images that imitate the 7-segment display unit 39 on which numbers corresponding to non-set values can be displayed. The example shown in FIG. 60 indicates that the number 2 was displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 after a game ball 99 entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 during the previous specified period, and segments A to C were then lit up.

The 7-segment display history selection screen also includes a cursor image indicating a provisional selection, a 1-back history screen transition image for transitioning to a 1-back history screen displaying "History 1 (1 back)," a 2-back history screen transition image for transitioning to a 2-back history screen displaying "History 2 (2 back)," a 3-back history screen transition image for transitioning to a 3-back history screen displaying "History 3 (3 back)," and a fluctuation stop screen transition image for transitioning to a fluctuation stop screen displaying "End." Then, by operating the decision button 21B on the 7-segment display history selection screen, the provisionally selected item (the destination display screen) is decided, and a transition is made to the display screen corresponding to that item. For example, when the player provisionally selects the 1-back history screen transition image of "History 1 (1 back)," and the decision button 21B is operated, the display screen is transitioned from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 1-back history screen. Furthermore, when "History 2 (2 previous times)" is selected, the screen transitions from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 2 previous history screen, and when "History 3 (3 previous times)" is selected, the screen transitions from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 3 previous history screen. Furthermore, when "End" is selected, the screen transitions from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the top menu screen.

In this way, the player can select to move from the 7-segment display history selection screen to either the previous history screen, the previous two history screens, or the previous three history screens. In other words, the player can check the history information he or she desires by moving to the history screen he or she desires. This allows the history to be checked effectively while avoiding checking history information that has been checked previously or information with a small amount of information, thereby making history checking efficient.

In addition, in this embodiment, information for identifying non-set values at the end of a big win game is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, which is different from the pattern display unit 341, where the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, even when information for identifying non-set values is displayed, the visibility of the image effects executed on the pattern display unit 341 is not hindered. On the other hand, in the standby state, history information having the same content as the information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending is displayed on the pattern display unit 341, which is different from the 7-segment display unit 39. Here, since the pattern display unit 341 generally has a large display area, the visibility of the history information is improved by displaying the history information on the pattern display unit 341. In addition, the pattern display unit 341 may be used to set various settings such as effects and characters executed in the gaming machine 10. Therefore, if the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending is displayed on the pattern display unit 341, it becomes possible to check the history information by performing the same operations as those for performing various settings, and the convenience of checking the history information is improved.

In this embodiment, the player can move from multiple history screens to a history screen that is selected by the player, but it is also possible to have multiple pieces of history information displayed simultaneously on one screen. In this case, since a large amount of history can be checked at once, the presented content can also be checked efficiently.

In addition, when the character screen transition image of "character selection" is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen transitions to the character selection screen, and when the character customization screen transition image of "character customization" is selected, the display screen transitions to the character customization screen. In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to select characters that appear in variable game effects, etc., and to customize the costume, accessories, hairstyle, etc., of the character.

In addition, if the "Back" image for transitioning to the stop-change screen is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen will transition to the stop-change screen.

In this way, in this embodiment, by operating the selection/determination unit 21 (selection button 21A and determination button 21B) in the standby state, the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 for the last three predetermined periods can be confirmed. Therefore, if the player misses or forgets the display content of the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of a big win game, the player can reconfirm the past display content of the 7-segment display unit 39, and when a player is replaced, the new player can check the past display content of the 7-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to identify or guess multiple non-set values (set values) by taking into account the past display content of the 7-segment display unit 39, improving the convenience of identifying or guessing non-set values (set values).

Here, Fig. 61 and Fig. 62 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the standby state screen transition process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 55. Below, the procedure for the standby state screen transition process executed in step S2702 of the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 55 will be described with reference to Figs. 61 and 62.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in FIG. 61, in the standby state screen transition process, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not it is in the standby state (steps S3101 and S3102). Specifically, the MPU 51 judges that it is in the standby state when the variable game presentation flag, which is set to ON in step S2105 in the command judgment process of FIG. 37, is set to OFF (step S3101: No) and the big win game presentation flag, which is set to ON when a display variable pattern command is sent to the display control device 6 in the big win game presentation process of step S2004 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG. 34, is set to OFF (step S3102: No). On the other hand, the MPU 51 judges that it is not in the standby state when the variable game presentation flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes) or the big win game presentation flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes).

If the MPU 51 is in a standby state (steps S3101 and S3102 are both No), it transitions to step S3103, and if the MPU 51 is not in a standby state (steps S3101 or S3102 are Yes), it terminates the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3103>
If it is in the standby state (steps S3101 and S3102 are both No), the MPU 51 judges whether the variable stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103). The variable stop screen flag is a flag indicating that the display screen in the symbol display unit 341 is a variable stop screen. This variable stop screen flag is set to ON in step S3120 of FIG. 62 described later when the display screen is shifted from the variable game state or the big win game state to the standby state, that is, when all screen flags other than the variable stop screen flag are set to OFF in the standby state. The variable stop screen flag is also set to ON when the display screen other than the variable stop screen is shifted to the variable stop screen. Specifically, the fluctuation stop screen flag is also set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the fluctuation stop screen in the top menu screen processing of step S3109 in Fig. 62 described later, when the display screen is shifted from the one-back history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the one-back history screen processing of step S3113, when the display screen is shifted from the two-back history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the two-back history screen processing of step S3115, and when the display screen is shifted from the three-back history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the three-back history screen processing of step S3117. Note that the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF in step S3107 when the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to OFF when the display of the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate.

If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3104, and if the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3108 in FIG. 62.

<Step S3104>
When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104). The second operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the operation button 20 has been started, and is set to ON in step S3007 in the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not an operation on the operation button 20 has been performed when the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen. Then, when the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3105, and when the second operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3104: No), the MPU 51 ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Steps S3105 to S3107>
When the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to a top menu screen for performing various selections and settings (step S3105) (see FIG. 60). That is, when the display screen is the fluctuation display screen and the operation button 20 is operated, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen flag to ON, indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen (step S3106), sets the change-stop screen flag to OFF, indicating that the display screen is the change-stop screen (step S3107), and ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3108>
If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), as shown in Fig. 62, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen is set to ON (step S3108). The top menu screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from various screens such as the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S3106 in Fig. 61). If the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3109, and if the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3110.

<Step S3109>
If the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen process (step S3109). In the top menu screen process, the provisionally selected item is changed in response to an operation of the selection button 21A. In addition, in the top menu screen process, when the decision button 21B is operated, the display screen is shifted to a screen corresponding to the provisionally selected item, specifically, a fluctuation stop screen, a 7-segment display history selection screen, a character selection screen, or a character customization screen. In addition, when the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the top menu screen to another screen, the MPU 51 sets the screen flag for the shift destination screen to ON, while setting the top menu screen flag to OFF.

<Step S3110>
If the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a 7-segment history selection screen flag indicating that the display screen is a 7-segment display history selection screen is set to ON (step S3110). The 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen in the top menu screen process of step S3109. If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3111, and if the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), the process proceeds to step S3112.

<Step S3111>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment history selection screen process. The 7-segment history selection screen process is a process that is executed when the 7-segment display history selection screen is displayed. The details of the 7-segment history selection screen process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

<Step S3112>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not a previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the previous history screen is set to ON (step S3112). The previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen in step S3212 of the 7-segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63 described later. If the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3113, and if the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3114.

<Step S3113>
If the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the previous history screen process, when "Back" is selected, the display screen transitions from the previous history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3114>
If the one-back history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not a two-back history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the two-back history screen is set to ON (step S3114). The two-back history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the seven-segment display history selection screen to the two-back history screen in step S3215 of the seven-segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63 described later. If the two-back history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3115, and if the two-back history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3116.

<Step S3115>
If the second previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the second previous history screen process, when "Back" is selected, the display screen transitions from the second previous history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the second previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3116>
If the 2-previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the 3-previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 3-previous history screen is set to ON (step S3116). The 6-previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 3-previous history screen in step S3217 of the 7-segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63 described later. If the 3-previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3117, and if the 3-previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3118.

<Step S3117>
If the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 3rd previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the 3rd previous history screen process, when "Back" is selected, the display screen transitions from the 3rd previous history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 3rd previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Steps S3118 and S3119>
If the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the other screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to ON (step S3118). The other screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to another screen in the top menu screen processing of step S3109. If the other screen flag is set to ON (step S3118: Yes), the other screen processing corresponding to the other screen is executed (step S3119), and the standby state screen shift processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the other screen flag is set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3120.

<Step S3120>
If the other screen flags are set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 sets the variable stop screen flag to ON (step S3120) and ends the standby state screen transition process. In other words, when the MPU 51 is in the standby state, if all screen flags are OFF, the state transitions from the variable game state or the big win game state to the standby state, and it can be determined that the display screen is the variable stop screen, so the variable stop screen flag is set to ON.

[7-segment history selection screen processing]
In the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in step S3111 of the standby state screen transition process, a process is executed to transition the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to a fluctuation stop screen, a one-time history screen, a two-time history screen, or a three-time history screen in response to the player's operation of the selection decision unit 21 (selection button 21A and decision button 21B) (see FIG. 60). Here, FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG. 62.

<Step S3201>
As shown in Fig. 63, in the 7-segment history selection screen processing, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second up selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201). The second up selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the up selection button 211 has been started, and is set to ON in the up selection operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing in Fig. 56. If the second up selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3202, and if the second up selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3203.

<Step S3202>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of changing the provisionally selected item (provisional selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the upper side. For example, when "History 2 (2 times back)" is provisionally selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the provisional selection display is changed to "History 1 (1 time back)" (see FIG. 60). Note that when the upper selection button 211 is operated while "History 1 (1 time back)" displayed at the top of the option images is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display may not be changed, or the provisional selection display may be changed to "End" displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3203>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), that is, when an operation of the upper selection button 211 has not been started, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203). The second lower selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started, and is set to ON in a lower selection operation detection pattern determination process executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2804 in the operation detection process of Fig. 56. When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3204, and when the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of changing the provisionally selected item (provisional selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the lower side. For example, when "History 2 (2 times back)" is provisionally selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the provisional selection display is changed to "History 3 (3 times back)" (see FIG. 60). Note that when the lower selection button 212 is operated while "End" displayed at the bottom of the option images is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display may not be changed, or the provisional selection display may be changed to "History 1 (1 time back)" displayed at the top of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3205>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205). The second decision operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the decision button 21B has started, and is set to ON in the decision button operation detection pattern judgment process executed in step S2806 in the operation detection process of FIG. 56. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not an operation on the decision button 21B has been performed when the display screen is the 7-segment display history selection screen. Then, when the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3206, and when the second decision operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), the MPU 51 ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
If the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history screen flag to OFF (step S3206), and determines whether the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "End" (step S3207). If the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "End" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3208, and if the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is not "End" (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3210.

<Steps S3208 and S3209>
If the provisionally selected item when the decision button 21B is operated is "End" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen (step S3208) (see FIG. 60). Then, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen to ON (step S3209), and terminates the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3210>
When the decision button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is not "End" (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210). If the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3211, and if the provisionally selected item is not "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3213.

<Steps S3211 and S3212>
If the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen (step S3211) (see FIG. 60), sets the previous history screen flag to on (step S3212), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Step S3213>
When the decision button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is not "History 1 (1 previous)" (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the provisionally selected item is "History 2 (2 previous)" (step S3213). If the provisionally selected item is "History 2 (2 previous)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3214, and if the provisionally selected item is not "History 2 (2 previous)" (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3216.

<Steps S3214 and S3215>
If the provisionally selected item is "History 2 (2 previous times)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 2 previous history screen (step S3214) (see FIG. 60), sets the 2 previous history screen flag to on (step S3215), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
When the decision button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is not "History 2 (2 times back)" (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 can determine that the provisionally selected item is "History 3 (3 times back)", and therefore changes the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 3 times back history screen (step S3216) (see FIG. 60), sets the 3 times back history screen flag to on (step S3217), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

In this way, in the 7-segment history screen executed in the standby state, the display screen can be switched from the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to any of the 1-back history screen, 2-back history screen, and 3-back history screen, and all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 for the past three predetermined periods can be confirmed (see FIG. 60). Therefore, the player can reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 when he/she misses or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the big win game, and when the player is replaced, the new player can confirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to identify or guess multiple non-set values (set values) in consideration of the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past, improving the convenience of identifying or guessing non-set values (set values).

In particular, in the standby state, unless a variable play is executed by shooting the game ball 99, the display screen will not be switched from the history screen (the one-time history screen, the two-time history screen, and the three-time history screen) to another screen such as a variable stop screen, unless the player intentionally performs a screen transition operation. Therefore, the player can carefully and carefully check the specific information that was previously displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 at his own pace by stopping the shooting of the game ball 99 and maintaining the standby state, without being subject to time constraints such as when specific information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 at the end of a big win game. This allows the player to carefully consider at his own pace when identifying or guessing multiple non-set values (set values) based on past specific information, thereby improving the convenience of identifying or guessing multiple non-set values (set values).

In this embodiment, the past specific information that can be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in the symbol display unit 341 by the player's operation (intention) in the standby state is for the past three predetermined periods, but there is no limit to the number of past specific information that can be displayed. In other words, it may be possible to check the specific information for the past one, two, or four or more predetermined periods.

Furthermore, the display of past specific information is not limited to the symbol display unit 341, and may be performed by other display means as long as it has a display function. For example, past specific information may be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, or on a display unit different from the symbol display unit 341 and the seven-segment display unit 39, such as a display unit provided separately for displaying past specific information. Furthermore, if there is a display unit provided for executing part of a presentation such as a variable game presentation, separate from the symbol display unit 341, it is also conceivable to display past information on that display unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to third embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which, based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, after a specific period has elapsed (the ending of a jackpot game), all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of a plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the seven-segment display unit 39, and presentation of the specific information on the seven-segment display unit 39 ends with the end of the jackpot game. In other words, in the first embodiment described above, each time a specific period set in a predetermined period elapses, specific information is displayed during a prescribed period that is set after the specific period has elapsed.

When the seven-segment display unit 39 displays numbers corresponding to multiple non-set values, all segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 become control targets, so that the numbers (non-set values) that are to be displayed can be identified. It is also possible to grasp the numbers that are to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all segments A to G become control targets. For example, when segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, when segment A, which is the first control target, is turned off, the candidates for the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 are "1" and "4". Then, when segment F, which is the sixth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". In other words, the numbers "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when segment F, which is the sixth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become control targets. Also, when segment A, the first control target, is turned on, the candidates for the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 are "2", "3", "5", and "6". When segment B, the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined that it is either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined that it is either "5" or "6". When segment C, the third control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "3", and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2". That is, the numbers "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, the third control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control targets. When segment E, the fifth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "6", and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5". That is, the numbers "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when segment E, the fifth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control targets. In other words, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when segment C, the third control object, is turned on or off, the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when segment E, the fifth control object, is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when segment F, the sixth control object, is turned on or off.

However, in the first embodiment described above, the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G have become the control targets. Therefore, even if the player can recognize the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all the segments A to G have become the control targets, control of the segments A to G to display the next number to be displayed is not started until all the segments A to G have become the control targets. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all the segments A to G have become the control targets, information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 to identify the number already recognized by the player until the display of the next number to be displayed is started. In other words, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G have become the control targets, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease during the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled at the end of a jackpot game each time a specific period set for the jackpot game elapses, so that all or part of the numbers (specific information) corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values are dispensed in small amounts each time a specific period elapses. Therefore, if a number corresponding to one of the non-set values is displayed in a specific period that has already elapsed, it is possible that the number will be forgotten. In this case, it becomes difficult to identify or guess the set value from the multiple non-set values.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the non-set value display means (lamp display unit) having a number of information display units (six individual lamp units) equal to or greater than the number of non-set values (five), each information display unit displays information (numbers) that identifies the non-set value. Each information display unit has two modes: a display state (lighted state) in which specific information is presented, and a non-display state (lighted out state) in which specific information is not presented. When the information display unit is in the display state, the non-set value can be identified by the specific information displayed on the information display unit. In this way, when the information display unit is in either of the two modes of the display state and the non-display state, the non-set value can be identified by the specific information presented on the information display unit in the display state. That is, in this embodiment, only information that can identify the non-set value is displayed as the specific information, and information that can infer the non-set value is not displayed. Therefore, after specific information that can identify one non-set value is presented, specific information for inferring the non-set value is not presented unnecessarily, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of unnecessary specific information is prevented.

There are no particular limitations on the non-set value display means, but examples include a display device having a group of lamps that can be turned on and off individually, a display device having multiple 7-segment display units, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot matrix display, and a plasma display. Also, as a non-set value display means, it is conceivable to use a display means that displays a variably decorated pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of information display sections corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in a specified period is displayed, and the information display section that was previously displayed in at least the specified period is displayed until the end of the jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period. For example, an information display section that was displayed in a specific period earlier in the same specified period is also displayed in a specific period after the specified period. In this way, an information display section that was displayed in a specific period earlier in the same specified period is also displayed in a specific period after the specified period, so that it can be confirmed at any time during at least the specific period in the specified period. Therefore, the specific information displayed in the specific period earlier in the same specified period is not forgotten, and convenience is improved when identifying multiple non-set values based on the specific information, and when identifying or inferring a set value.

The information display section that is in a displayed state during a specific period may be kept in a constantly displayed state for the specified period and until the end of the jackpot game, which is set as the end of the specified period, or may be kept in a displayed state only during the jackpot game, or may be kept in a displayed state only for the specific period.

In one example of this embodiment, in a lamp display unit having six individual lamp units numbered 1 to 6, by winning a lamp lighting lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the special out ball hole of the Kluen device during a specific period, the individual lamp units numbered with a number corresponding to a non-set value are turned on at the point where the lamp lighting lottery is won, without having to wait for the specific period to pass. Then, during the specified period in which the specific period is set, the lighting state is maintained until the end of the jackpot game, which is set as the end of the specified period.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 64 to 71. Note that Figures 69 to 71 are diagrams showing modified examples of this embodiment.

Here, FIG. 64 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 64, and FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of the lighting on and off of the lamp display unit 35.

As shown in FIG. 64, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is provided with a special out ball discharge section 38A instead of the gaming ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment described above, and a lamp display section 35 is provided on the gaming board 31 instead of the 7-segment display section 39 of the first embodiment described above.

The special out ball discharge unit 38A discharges the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 to the back side of the game board 31. This special out ball discharge unit 38A has a configuration in which the stopper unit 383 is omitted in the game ball retention unit 38 of the first embodiment described above, and has the same configuration as the game ball retention unit 38 except that the stopper unit 383 is omitted. In such a special out ball discharge unit 38A, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without being retained (stopped) in the special out ball discharge unit 38A. Therefore, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 is not detected by the special out ball sensor 384 after a specific period has elapsed as in the first embodiment described above, but is detected by the special out ball sensor 384 every time the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 even during the specific period.

The lamp display unit 35 presents specific information that identifies non-set values, and includes multiple (six) individual lamp units (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) that can be turned on and off individually. The first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a row (line) in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 65, the lamp display unit 35 is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. As can be seen from FIG. 66, this allows the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be turned on and off individually.

The first individual lamp unit 351 is marked with the number 1, and when the first individual lamp unit 351 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 1, and game setting value 1 is negated as the set value. The second individual lamp unit 352 is marked with the number 2, and when the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 2, and game setting value 2 is negated as the set value. The third individual lamp unit 353 is marked with the number 3, and when the third individual lamp unit 353 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 3, and game setting value 3 is negated as the set value. The fourth individual lamp unit 354 is marked with the number 4, and when the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 4, and game setting value 4 is negated as the set value. The fifth individual lamp unit 355 is marked with the number 5, and when the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is the game setting value 5, and the game setting value 5 is negated as the set value. The sixth individual lamp unit 356 is marked with the number 6, and when the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is the game setting value 6, and the game setting value 6 is negated as the set value.

In other words, in the lamp display unit 35, the numbers attached to the individual lamp units 351-356 that are turned on correspond to multiple non-set values, and the game setting value corresponding to the number is denied as the set value. Then, when the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to all (five) non-set values are turned on, one individual lamp unit 351-356 that corresponds to the set value is turned off, and the number corresponding to the one individual lamp unit 351-356 that is turned off corresponds to the set value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(A), when the second to fifth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned off, the non-set values are identified as 2 to 6 and the set value is identified as 1. As shown in FIG. 66(B), when the first, third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353 to 356 are turned on and only the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned off, the non-set values are identified as 1, 3 to 6 and the set value is identified as 2. As shown in FIG. 66(C), when the first, second, fourth to sixth individual lamp units 351, 352, 354 to 356 are turned on and only the third individual lamp unit 353 is turned off, the non-set values are identified as 1, 2, 4 to 6 and the set value is identified as 3. As shown in FIG. 66(D), when the first to third, fifth, and sixth individual lamp units 351 to 353, 355, and 356 are turned on and only the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is turned off, the non-set values are 1 to 3, 5, and 6, and the set value is 4. As shown in FIG. 66(E), when the first to fourth and sixth individual lamp units 351 to 354 and 356 are turned on and only the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is turned off, the non-set values are 1 to 4 and 6, and the set value is 5. As shown in FIG. 66(F), when the first to fifth individual lamp units 351 to 355 are turned on and only the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is turned off, the non-set values are 1 to 5, and the set value is 6. The first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are controlled in the set value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the set value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356), and a set value is suggested by specifying a non-set value depending on the on or off state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the set value suggestion process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. In the set value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356), and a set value is suggested by specifying a non-set value depending on the on or off state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. Hereinafter, the procedure of the set value suggestion process will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

<Step S3301>
As shown in Fig. 67, in step S3301, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the ending performance start flag is set to ON. The ending performance start flag is a flag for starting the ending performance, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command judgment process of Fig. 37. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing for the ending performance to start based on the ending performance start flag. Here, if the ending performance start flag is ON (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3302, and if the ending performance start flag is OFF (step S3301: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3311.

<Step S3302>
When the ending performance start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the special out ball detection flag is set to on (step S3302). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to on in step S2114 in the command judgment process of Fig. 37. Here, when the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3303, and when the special out ball detection flag is off (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S3303>
When the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), that is, when it is detected that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the Kluen device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp units 351 to 356. That is, every time the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the Kluen device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp units 351 to 356.

In the first embodiment described above, the set value can be recognized by displaying five numbers corresponding to multiple non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 before the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period. In order to display five numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39, the seven segments A to G must be controlled five times each, so a specific condition must be met 35 times (7 x 5 times) or more. In other words, 35 game balls 99 must enter the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 during the specified period.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 display information corresponding to non-set values, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are controlled in only two modes, the on state and the off state. Therefore, in order to make the lamp display unit 35 display the five non-set values so that the set value can be recognized, it is sufficient that the specific condition is satisfied five or more times. Also, in this embodiment, a crane device 37 similar to that in the first embodiment described above is adopted. Therefore, if the specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 is set in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, it is clear that the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 displaying the non-set values will be lit with a small number of jackpots.

In this embodiment, the specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 is that the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and that the lamp lighting lottery is won. In other words, by adopting the lamp lighting lottery, the difficulty of achieving the specific condition is adjusted, and the difficulty of identifying all of the multiple non-set values is adjusted. This adjusts the difficulty of lighting the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display unit 35, and prevents the five non-set values from being easily identified, i.e., the set values from being easily recognized.

The probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery is set so that the degree of difficulty for controlling the lighting of the five individual lamp units 351-356 is the same or approximately the same as the degree of difficulty for displaying five numbers by the seven-segment display unit 39 in the first embodiment described above. In addition, the probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery may be the same for the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to multiple non-set values, or the probability of winning for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 may be different from the other individual lamp units 351-356.

If the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value will be lit is stabilized, and a game feature is provided in which the probability is stabilized. When the winning probability is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, for example, the winning probability is set to about 100 x (1/7)% (= 14.3%) (for example, 10% to 20%). This is because in the first embodiment described above, one number is displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37, so that in this embodiment, when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 373, about one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is lit on average. In addition, if the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp sections 351-356 corresponding to multiple non-set values, the winning probability is not limited to 10% to 20% and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if the lottery condition that triggers the lamp lighting lottery to light one of the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to the multiple non-set values is a lottery condition that is different from the game ball 99 entering the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery can be set according to the difficulty of achieving this lottery condition. In other words, if the difficulty of achieving the lottery condition is low, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery can be set low, and the higher the difficulty of achieving the lottery condition, the higher the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery can be set. In this way, by setting the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery according to the difficulty of achieving the lottery condition, the difficulty of achieving a specific condition required to light one individual lamp unit 351-356 can be made uniform regardless of the type of specific condition. This makes it possible to apply various conditions as specific conditions (more precisely, as a lottery trigger).

On the other hand, if the probability of winning for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 is made different from the other individual lamp units 351-356, a game feature is provided in which there is variation in the probability that the individual lamp unit 351-356 corresponding to the non-set value will be lit. When the probability of winning for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 is made different from the other individual lamp units 351-356, it is possible to set the probability of winning lower for the individual lamp unit 351-356 that is later in the control order. As an example, the probability of winning is set to 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and 5% for the individual lamp unit 351-356 that is earlier in the control order.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lamp lighting lottery has been won. If the lamp lighting lottery has been won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3305, and if the lamp lighting lottery has not been won (step S3304: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value process.

<Step S3305>
If the lamp lighting lottery has been won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 reads out already-lit lamp information (step S3305).

Here, the already-lit lamp information is information related to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are currently lit, and includes already-lit lamp flag information, as shown in FIG. 68(B) and FIG. 68(C). The already-lit lamp flag information is composed of a first already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the first individual lamp unit 351 is lit or not, a second already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit or not, a third already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the third individual lamp unit 353 is lit or not, a fourth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is lit or not, a fifth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is lit or not, and a sixth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is lit or not. Each already-lit lamp flag is set to ON when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, and set to OFF when they are not lit. In the example shown in FIG. 68(B), all already-lit lamp flags are set to OFF (initial state), indicating that all of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned off. In the example shown in FIG. 68(C), the second already-lit lamp flag is set to ON, and the first, third to sixth already-lit lamp flags are set to OFF, indicating that the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned on, and the first, third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353 to 356 are turned off.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 judges whether all the already-lit lamp flags are set to ON in the already-lit lamp information. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether all the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are lit. Then, when all the already-lit lamp flags are set to ON in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process. That is, when all the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are lit, there are no other individual lamp units 351 to 356 that should be lit, so the setting value suggestion process ends. On the other hand, when there is an already-lit lamp flag that is set to OFF in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the process proceeds to step S3307.

<Step S3307>
If the already-lit lamp information includes an already-lit lamp flag that is set to OFF (step S3306: No), the MPU 51 reads out the control order of the individual lamps (lamp control order) (step S3307).

Here, the lamp control sequence is set by a procedure similar to that of the display sequence setting process (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above. That is, when the power is turned on or the setting value is changed, the lamp control sequence is determined by referring to the lamp control sequence determination table based on the setting value stored in RAM 412. This lamp control sequence determination table is similar to the number display sequence determination table (see FIG. 36) of the first embodiment described above, and the numbers in the number display sequence determination table can be thought of as numbers assigned to individual lamps. The number 1 in the number display sequence determination table of the first embodiment described above corresponds to the first individual lamp unit 351, and similarly, the numbers 2 to 6 in the number display sequence determination table of the first embodiment described above correspond to the second to sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 68(A), when the setting value is 1 and display sequence A1 is determined, the control sequence of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is second individual lamp unit 352 → third individual lamp unit 353 → fourth individual lamp unit 354 → fifth individual lamp unit 355 → sixth individual lamp unit 356. Furthermore, in the number display sequence determination table in the first embodiment described above, the probability that each display sequence will be selected is the same, and in the lamp control sequence determination table in this embodiment, the probability that each lamp control sequence will be selected is also the same.

The lamp control order may be set when the power is turned on or when the setting value is changed, but may also be set when a specified period begins. Also, the lamp control order does not need to have the same probability of being selected.

<Steps S3308 to S3310>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 determines the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be controlled based on the lamp control order read out in step S3305 and the already-lit lamp information read out in step S3307 (step S3308), and lights up the individual lamp units 351 to 356 (step S3309). That is, a lamp lighting lottery is executed every time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and when the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit to present specific information indicating a non-set value. Then, the MPU 51 updates the already-lit lamp information (step S3310), and ends the setting value suggestion process. For example, when the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned on when all the already-lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state) as in the example shown in Figure 68 (B) of the already-lit lamp information, the second already-lit lamp flag corresponding to the second individual lamp unit 352 is set to on, as shown in Figure 68 (C).

In this way, in this embodiment, a lamp lighting lottery is executed every time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and if the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, making it possible to identify a non-set value. In other words, in this embodiment, even before the specific period has elapsed, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, making it possible to identify a non-set value. In this way, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are set to one of two states, a lit state and an unlit state, making it possible to identify a non-set value by the number attached to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in the lit state. In other words, in this embodiment, only information that can identify a non-set value is presented by the lighting of the individual lamp units 351 to 356, and information that can infer a non-set value is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that can identify one non-set value is presented, specific information for inferring the non-set value is not unnecessarily presented, so that a decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of unnecessary specific information is prevented.

<Step S3311>
If the ending presentation start flag is off (step S3301: No), it is determined whether the big win game presentation end flag is on (step S3311). The big win game presentation end flag is a flag that ends the big win game presentation (ending presentation), and is set to on in step S2118 of the command determination process in Fig. 37. Then, if the big win game presentation end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3312, and if the big win game presentation end flag is off (step S3311: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S3312>
When the jackpot game presentation end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot type to be ended is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312). Whether the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be judged based on whether the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to on in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is on. Then, when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3313, and when the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
If the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 if any of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit (step S3313), and further clears (initializes) the already lit lamp information, and ends the setting value suggestion process. That is, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are turned off in the case of a 5R normal jackpot in which the end of a predetermined period is set. As a result, the lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 are maintained in a lit state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, it is possible to confirm that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit at any time, that is, specific information that specifies a non-set value. As a result, there is no risk of forgetting previously presented specific information during the same specified period, and convenience is improved when identifying multiple non-set values based on the specific information, and ultimately when identifying or inferring set values.

In this embodiment, when the player wins the lamp lighting lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set values in the lamp display unit 35 are turned on. However, the lamp lighting lottery is optional, and the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set values may be turned on when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 without performing the lamp lighting lottery as in the first embodiment described above. In this way, when the lamp lighting lottery is not performed, it is possible to adjust the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on by increasing the difficulty of the game ball 99 entering the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, or by dividing the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 into a route detected by the special out ball sensor 384 and a route not detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

As described above, in this embodiment, the individual lamp units 351-356 of the lamp display unit 35 that present non-set values are in one of two states, a lit state or an unlit state, and information identifying the non-set value is presented based on the type (number) of the individual lamp units 351-356 that are lit. That is, in this embodiment, only information that can identify the non-set value is presented by the lighting of the individual lamp units 351-356, and information that can infer the non-set value is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that can identify one non-set value is presented, specific information for inferring the non-set value is not presented unnecessarily, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of unnecessary specific information is prevented.

The individual lamp units 351-356 that are lit are immediately lit by winning the lamp lighting lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and the lit individual lamp units 351-356 are maintained in a lit state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period, the specific information that identifies the non-set value can be confirmed at any time based on whether the individual lamp units 351-356 are lit. Therefore, there is no need to forget the specific information presented in the previous specific period in the same specified period, and convenience is improved when identifying multiple non-set values based on the specific information, and when identifying or guessing the set value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 include winning the lamp lighting lottery in addition to the game ball 99 entering the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37. This adjusts the difficulty of achieving the specific conditions according to the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery, and adjusts the difficulty of identifying all of the multiple non-set values. Therefore, the difficulty of lighting each of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display unit 35 is adjusted, preventing the five non-set values from being easily identified, i.e., preventing the set values from being easily recognized.

The lamps are immediately lit by winning the lamp lighting lottery, which is executed when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, but the fact that the lamp lighting lottery is executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball port 373) and the result of the lamp lighting lottery may be clearly displayed to the player on a display means other than the lamp display unit 35. For example, as shown in FIG. 69(A), the fact that the lamp lighting lottery is executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37) is clearly displayed to the player, the result of the lamp lighting lottery is clearly displayed to the player as shown in FIG. 69(B1) or FIG. 69(B2), and further, information regarding the lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 is clearly displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as shown in FIG. 69(C1) or FIG. 69(C2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(A), when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 may be lit, that is, an image is displayed to draw attention to the lamp display unit 35 (roulette). In this way, by clearly indicating that the lamp lighting lottery is being executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373) by the pattern display unit 341, even if the game ball 99 has been missed entering the special out ball opening 373, the image displayed on the pattern display unit 341 allows the player to understand that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373, that is, that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 may be lit.

If the lamp lighting lottery is won, information regarding the individual lamp units 351-356 that will be turned on is displayed, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1). In the example shown, it is displayed that the second individual lamp unit 352 will be turned on. In this way, by displaying the result of the lamp lighting lottery in the pattern display unit 341, it becomes possible to know whether the individual lamp units 351-356 will be turned on not only in the lamp display unit 35 but also in the pattern display unit 341, thereby improving convenience.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 69 (C1), in the pattern display section 341, during the execution of the jackpot game (at least during the execution of the open/close execution mode), information regarding the individual lamp sections 351-356 that are lit is continuously displayed. That is, the individual lamp sections 351-356 of the individual lamp sections 35 that are lit are displayed in the pattern display section 341. Note that, for example, information regarding the individual lamp sections 351-356 that are lit during the jackpot game (at least during the open/close execution mode) may be displayed until the end of the 5R normal jackpot, for which the end of the specified period is set.

On the other hand, if the result of the lamp lighting lottery is a non-win, an image is displayed indicating that the result of the lamp lighting lottery is a non-win, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1). In this way, while a jackpot game is being played (at least while the open/close execution mode is being played), information regarding the lit individual lamp units 351-356 is continuously displayed by the pattern display unit 341, so that the lit individual lamp units 351-356 can be confirmed on the pattern display unit 341 without having to check the lamp display unit 35, improving convenience.

The specific information indicating the non-set value may be presented only in the pattern display unit 341, rather than in the lamp display unit 35 provided separately from the pattern display unit 341. In other words, the specific information may be presented to the player only by the presentation in the pattern display unit 341 related to the lamp lighting lottery in the jackpot game (open/close execution mode) described with reference to FIG. 69.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, an ending additional image for identifying a non-set value may be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the ending performance of the jackpot game. For example, as shown in FIG. 70, an image imitating the lamp display unit 35 is displayed as an ending additional image on the pattern display unit 341 in the ending of the jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 70(A), it is clearly indicated that only the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit on the lamp display unit 35, and in the example shown in FIG. 70(B), it is clearly indicated that the second to sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are lit on the lamp display unit 35, and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned off. In this way, the pattern display unit 341 displays the on/off state of the lamp display unit 35 in the ending of the jackpot game, so that the on/off state of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that were lit up until the jackpot game can be confirmed, improving convenience.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lamp display unit 35 is configured with the individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a row (line), but the lamp display unit 35 is not limited to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a row, and other configurations can also be used. For example, it is possible to use a lamp display unit 35 in which the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a ring as shown in FIG. 71(A), or a lamp display unit 35 in which the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a matrix as shown in FIG. 71(B). Furthermore, the lamp display unit 35 may be configured with the individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a staggered pattern.

In addition, instead of the lamp display unit 35, a display device in which multiple seven-segment display devices are arranged in a row, ring, matrix, staggered pattern, etc. may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to fourth embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

Sixth embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which, based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, after a specific period has elapsed (the ending of a jackpot game), all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of a plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the seven-segment display unit 39, and presentation of the specific information on the seven-segment display unit 39 ends with the end of the jackpot game. In other words, in the first embodiment described above, each time a specific period set in a predetermined period elapses, specific information is displayed during a prescribed period that is set after the specific period has elapsed.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines and slot machines, reserve the right to play a variable game that notifies the result of a jackpot lottery, and display the number of reserved rights as a reserved image such as an icon on a pattern display device such as a liquid crystal display. In addition, the reserved image generally indicates the expectation that the lottery result for the reserved right will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation) by the display mode such as color or pattern, and the display mode changes until the variable game for the reserved right is started.

In addition, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the pattern display device, a variable display image in the same manner as the reserved image is displayed for the variable display. And, when the right to execute a variable game is reserved, the variable display image is displayed together with the reserved image, for example, in a position adjacent to the reserved image.

In addition, the display mode of the reserved image and the variable display image, such as color and pattern, i.e., the probability of a big win suggested to the player, changes until the variable game corresponding to the target image is completed. This makes it possible for the player to progress through the game while anticipating the changes in the reserved image and the variable display image, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, when the variable play corresponding to the target image among the reserved images and the variable display images ends, the display mode of the reserved image or the variable display image becomes meaningless. Not only that, but if the display mode for the target variable is one with a high probability of winning, and the stopping mode of the decorative pattern indicates that the lottery result is a miss, the player will be plagued by a sense of helplessness and disappointment in response to the display mode with a high probability of winning, which may lead to a decrease in interest in the game.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first reserved image regarding the reservation of the right to execute a variable game that notifies the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the first special chart can be displayed on the first reserved image display section set in the pattern display section, and the already-varied image corresponding to the variable game for the first special chart on which the variable game has been executed can be displayed on the pattern display section. The display mode of the first reserved image includes at least a first display mode (e.g., blue), a second display mode (e.g., green) having a higher jackpot expectation than the first display mode, and a third display mode (e.g., red) having a higher jackpot expectation than the second display mode, and when the first reserved image is in the second display mode (e.g., green), it is possible to change from the second display mode (e.g., green) to the third display mode (e.g., red), and changing from the second display mode to the first display mode is restricted. That is, the display mode of the first reserved image can be changed, but there is no change (demotion) that lowers the expectation, even if there is a change (promotion) that increases the expectation. Furthermore, a predetermined state that is more advantageous to the player is generated when a changed image corresponding to a specific reserved image displayed in the first display mode is displayed, compared to when a changed image corresponding to a specific reserved image displayed in the third display mode is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, not only is a first reserved image related to the reservation of the right to execute a variable game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special chart displayed, but also a previously changed image corresponding to the variable game for the executed first special chart can be displayed on the pattern display section. In this way, not only reserved images but also previously changed images corresponding to past reserved images in which variable games were executed are displayed, so that past reserved images can be used. This makes it possible to give meaning to past reserved images in which variable games were executed in the progress of the game. And, when the display mode of the past reserved images displayed as previously changed images is such that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high expectation of a jackpot, even if it is notified that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot, it is possible to give new interest to the player by displaying the previously changed image corresponding to the past reserved image, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Here, the expectation of a big win when the reserved information is in the first display mode (e.g., blue) is lower than when the reserved information is in the second display mode (e.g., green) and the third display mode (e.g., red). Therefore, for a specific reserved image displayed in the first display mode, there is no high expectation that the lottery result in the big win lottery will be a big win, and interest in playing until the variable play for the reserved image displayed in the first display mode is completed decreases. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, a predetermined state that is more advantageous to the player is generated when a previously changed image corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first display mode is displayed compared to when a previously changed image corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the third display mode is displayed. Therefore, even if the variable play is for a reserved image displayed in the first display mode, the player can enjoy the variable play for the reserved image while expecting the advantage of when previously changed information corresponding to the reserved image is displayed after the variable play for the reserved image, and the interest in the game is improved.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 72 to 90.

[Processing of main control device 4]
First, differences between the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 and the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to Figures 72 to 74. Note that in this embodiment, the low-probability mode win/loss table used by the main control device 4 and a part of the main processing are different from the main processing of the first embodiment described above.

[Low Probability Mode Win/Loss Table]
72 is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode winning/losing table used in a big win lottery. As shown in FIG. 72, in the low probability mode winning/losing table of this embodiment, the lottery results are divided into not only big wins and losses, but also small wins and sudden time reductions.

Here, the small win is a lottery result in which a small win game is played in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened for a short time (e.g., 1.8 seconds or less) after the variable game that notifies the player that the lottery result is a small win has ended. The opening of the variable winning opening 316 in the small win game is played once or multiple times, and if the variable winning opening 316 is opened multiple times, the total opening time of the variable winning opening 316 is set to, for example, 1.8 seconds or less.

The sudden time-saving is a lottery result that transitions from a normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). The transition to the time-saving game state in this case may occur after the execution of a jackpot game, as in the case of a normal jackpot in the first embodiment described above, but in this embodiment, it occurs after the end of variable play without the execution of a jackpot game. In other words, the sudden time-saving in this embodiment is distinguished from a win as a lottery result.

In the low probability mode win/loss table shown in FIG. 72, the small win probability is set to about 1/500 for all game setting values 1 to 6, the sudden time-saving probability is set to about 1/500 for all game setting values 1 to 6, and the small win probability and the sudden time-saving probability are set to the same probability. Of course, one or both of the small win probability and the sudden time-saving probability may be set to different probabilities for each game setting value 1 to 6, or the small win probability and the sudden time-saving probability may be set to different probabilities.

[Main Processing of Main Control Device 4]
FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 73, in the main processing of this embodiment, a normal symbol (normal symbol) control process is executed (step S3401), and a part of the procedure of the data setting process in the variable game control process (step S3402) is different from that of the first embodiment. Note that, although a normal symbol (normal symbol) control process is executed in the first embodiment, it is omitted in the main processing of FIG. 23.

[Regular design (normal design) control processing]
In the normal symbol (normal symbol) control process of this embodiment, the passing of the game ball 99 through the through gate 317 is used as a trigger to execute a lottery result in a normal symbol winning lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric role 315b, and control is executed to display the lottery result by a combination of turning on and off the LED pairs of the normal symbol display unit 361. Also, in the normal symbol (normal symbol) control process of this embodiment, when the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is a jackpot, control is executed to open the electric role 315b.

In addition, in the normal pattern (normal pattern) control process of this embodiment, a normal pattern lottery command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the normal pattern winning lottery. The normal pattern lottery command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives a normal pattern lottery command, it displays the lottery result in the normal pattern winning lottery on the pattern display unit 341, for example, and also displays a rare pattern in one of the first already-changed image display area 771 to the fourth already-changed image display area 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 described below if the lottery result in the normal pattern winning lottery is a winning lottery.

[Data setting process]
The data setting process of this embodiment differs from that of the first embodiment in the process of setting the shift command. Here, Fig. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the main control device of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

<Step S3501>
As shown in Fig. 72, when executing a variable game for the reservation of the first special chart, the MPU 41 executes the same process as the first embodiment described above (steps S1502 to S1504). Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reservation number N stored in the reservation number storage area NAA (step S1502), moves the winning/losing information from the first reservation area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503), and shifts the winning/losing information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Next, the MPU 41 sets the first reservation shift command (step S3501) and ends the data setting process.

The first reserved shift command is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the win/lose information indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 has shifted when the reserved number N of the first special chart decreases.

<Step S3502>
When executing a variable game for the reserved second special chart, the MPU 41 executes the same process as the first embodiment described above (steps S1505 to S1507). Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB (step S1505), moves the winning/losing information from the first reserved area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506), and shifts the winning/losing information of the second reserved area REB2 to the fourth reserved area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Next, the MPU 41 sets a second reserved shift command (step S3502) and ends the data setting process.

The second reserved shift command is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the win/lose information indicating the lottery results in the jackpot lottery in the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 has shifted when the reserved number M of the second special chart decreases.

The first hold shift command and the second hold shift command are sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the first hold shift command or the second hold shift command, it executes a process of updating the contents of the first hold information storage area 53A or the second hold information storage area 53B of the hold information storage area 53 (see FIG. 73) described below that is set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5 (step S3506 or S3508 of the command determination process in FIG. 83).

[Processing of voice and lamp control device 5]
Next, with reference to Figs. 75 to 90, differences from the first embodiment described above will be described with respect to the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. In this embodiment, since the already-changed image corresponding to the variable play for the first special symbol on which the variable play is executed is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the processing associated with this is added, which is different from the first embodiment described above. Specifically, in this embodiment, the already-changed image erasing processing is executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing, and a procedure is added to the command determination processing, which is different from the first embodiment described above. Note that the first reserved image related to the reservation of the first special symbol, the variable display image, and the already-changed image displayed corresponding to the first reserved image, which are displayed on the symbol display unit 341, are sometimes collectively referred to as "variable related images". Below, before describing the specific processing in the voice lamp control device 5, a display example of the variable related image will be described with reference to Figs. 75 to 81.

[Variation-related images]
Here, FIG. 75(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display of a change-related image in a normal gaming state, and FIG. 75(B) is a diagram showing an example of a display of a change-related image in a special gaming state and a time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 75(A), in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), the first pending image display section 75, the changing image display section 76, and the already changed image display section 77 are set as areas for displaying change-related images in the changing pattern display section 341 at least during the execution of the changing game.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 75(B), in the high probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), the second reserved image display section 78 and the changing image display section 76 are set as areas for displaying change-related images in the changing pattern display section 341 at least during the execution of the change game. In other words, the already-changed image display section 77 is not set in the high probability game state and the time-saving game state, which are game states advantageous to the player, but is set in the normal game state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player.

In this way, by setting the already-changed image display unit 77 only in the normal game state, which is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, it becomes possible to give the player an additional benefit in the normal game state that is disadvantageous to the player. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the game by giving an additional benefit in the normal game state that is disadvantageous to the player, who is prone to feeling bored, and therefore increases the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the first reserved image display unit 75 and the already-changed image display unit 77 are not set in the high probability game state and the time-limited game state, but one or both of the first reserved image display unit 75 and the already-changed image display unit 77 may be set in either or both of the high probability game state and the time-limited game state.

<First reserved image display unit 75>
The first reserved image display section 75 shown in FIG. 75(A) is an area that displays the reserved number N of the right to start the variable display of the decorative pattern for the first special drawing generated by the winning of the first winning port 314 (the right to notify the drawing result in the big win drawing) by the reserved image. In this first reserved image display section 75, reserved images based on the counter information stored in the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 (see FIG. 13) of the first reserved storage area REA in the reserved storage area 412b related to the reservation for the first special drawing set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, the upper limit number of reserved number N for the first special drawing is four. Therefore, four reserved image display areas 751 to 754 are set in the first reserved image display section 75 so that the upper limit number of four reserved images can be displayed.

The four pending image display areas 751-754 include a first pending image display area 751 that displays a pending image based on counter information stored in the first pending area REA1, a second pending image display area 752 that displays a pending image based on counter information stored in the second pending area REA2, a third pending image display area 753 that displays a pending image based on counter information stored in the third pending area REA3, and a fourth pending image display area 754 that displays a pending image based on counter information stored in the fourth pending area REA4.

Note that in each of the first to fourth pending image display areas 751 to 754, a pending image is displayed if the corresponding first to fourth pending areas REA1 to REA4 contain counter information, and no pending image is displayed if the corresponding first to fourth pending areas REA1 to REA4 do not contain counter information.

The display modes of the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved image display areas 751 to 754 are set from a plurality of display modes based on the counter information for the corresponding first to fourth reserved areas REA1 to REA4. There are no particular limitations on the plurality of display modes of the reserved images, and possible examples include the same pattern but different colors, different patterns, and combinations of these. In this embodiment, the plurality of display modes of the reserved images include at least the same pattern but different colors. Specifically, the plurality of display modes of the reserved images include at least a white circular pattern, a blue circular pattern, a green circular pattern, and a red circular pattern. In this embodiment, the color indicates the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation), and the jackpot expectation is white (lowest) < blue < green < red (highest). In addition, the display mode of the reserved image in the first reserved image display section 75 is set for the corresponding first to fourth reserved areas REA1 to REA4 based on the counter information. For example, if the counter information includes a counter value for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, red or green, which has a high probability of winning, is likely to be selected as the reserved image, whereas if the counter information includes a counter value for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a miss as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, white or blue, which has a low probability of winning, is likely to be selected as the reserved image.

In addition, since the reserved images in the first reserved image display section 75 are set in the corresponding first to fourth reserved areas REA1 to REA4 based on the counter information, the display position shifts when the counter information shifts to the first to fourth reserved areas REA1 to REA4 due to the start of a new variable game. For example, due to the start of a new variable game, the reserved image in the fourth reserved image display area 754 shifts to the third reserved image display area 753, the reserved image in the third reserved image display area 753 shifts to the second reserved image display area 752, and the reserved image in the second reserved image display area 752 shifts to the first reserved image display area 751. Note that the reserved image in the first reserved image display area 751 corresponds to an image displayed in the variable image display section 76.

The reserved image of the first reserved image display unit 75 may change its display mode. The timing of the change in the display mode of the reserved image may be, for example, when the reserved image is shifted (when the variable game starts), or may be any timing during the execution of the variable game. In addition, the display mode of the reserved image may change (promotion) to increase the jackpot expectation, but there is no change (demotion) to decrease the jackpot expectation. For example, there may be a reserved change from a green reserved image to a red image, but there is no reserved change from a green reserved image to a blue image. In this way, by executing a change (promotion) to increase the jackpot expectation, the game can be progressed while keeping the player hopeful that the reserved image will change, and there is no change (demotion) to decrease the jackpot expectation, preventing the player from being disadvantaged. In addition, the change in the display mode of the reserved image may be one that increases the jackpot expectation by one step, or may be one that increases the jackpot expectation by multiple steps. For example, the change from a red reserved image may be blue, green, or red. In addition, the change in the display mode of the reserved image is not limited to one time, and may be executed multiple times.

Here, FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a change in the display mode of the reserved image in the first reserved image display unit 75. Specifically, the change in the display mode of the reserved image in the first reserved image display unit 75 shown in FIG. 76 is an example of a case where the number of reserved images N for the first special image is 3 (see FIG. 76(A)), no new reserved images are added thereafter, and the display mode of the reserved image displayed in the third reserved image display area 753 changes before the reserved image is shifted to the first reserved image display area 751.

In the examples shown in Figures 76 (A), 76 (B1) and 76 (C1), when the number of reserved balls N in the first reserved ball is 3, the variable play ends, and variable play is executed for the reserved ball in the first reserved ball image display area 751, causing the display mode of the reserved image to change as the reserved image in the third reserved ball image display area 753 shifts to the second reserved ball image display area 752.

In the examples shown in Figures 76 (A), 76 (B2), and 76 (C2), the display mode of the reserved image does not change when the reserved image in the third reserved image display area 753 shifts to the second reserved image display area 752, and the display mode of the reserved image changes when the reserved image in the second reserved image display area 752 shifts to the first reserved image display area 751.

In other words, in this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image changes when the reserved image shifts due to the start of a variable play of the first reserved for the first special chart. Of course, the change in the display mode of the reserved image is not limited to when the reserved image shifts, but may also occur during the execution of the variable play. In addition, the change in the display mode of the reserved image may be performed multiple times. For example, the display mode may change when the reserved image shifts from the third reserved image display area 753 to the second reserved image display area 752, and further, the display mode may change when the reserved image shifts from the second reserved image display area 752 to the first reserved image display area 751.

In addition, during variable play in the normal game state, the first pending image display unit 75 may be set at all times, but the first pending image display unit 75 may also be set from the start of variable play to a specific point in time. For example, when a reach performance is executed, the first pending image display unit 75 may be set until the time when the reach performance starts, until the time when the super reach performance starts, or until the time when the special reach performance starts. In this case, the first pending image display unit 75 may be reset before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (for example, at the end of the reach performance).

<Second reserved image display unit 78>
The second reserved image display section 78 shown in FIG. 75(B) is an area that displays the reserved number M of the right to start the variable display of the decorative pattern for the second special drawing generated by the winning of the second winning port 315 (the right to notify the lottery result in the big win drawing) by the reserved image. In this second reserved image display section 78, reserved images based on the counter information stored in the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 (see FIG. 13) of the second reserved storage area REB in the reserved storage area 412b related to the reservation for the second special drawing set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, the upper limit number of reserved number M for the second special drawing is four. Therefore, four reserved image display areas 781 to 784 are set in the second reserved image display section 78 so that the upper limit number of four reserved images can be displayed.

The four pending image display areas 781-784 include a first pending image display area 781 that displays a pending image based on counter information stored in the first pending area REB1, a second pending image display area 782 that displays a pending image based on counter information stored in the second pending area REB2, a third pending image display area 783 that displays a pending image based on counter information stored in the third pending area REB3, and a fourth pending image display area 784 that displays a pending image based on counter information stored in the fourth pending area REB4.

Note that in each of the first to fourth pending image display areas 781 to 784, a pending image is displayed if the corresponding first to fourth pending areas REB1 to REB4 contain counter information, and no pending image is displayed if the corresponding first to fourth pending areas REB1 to REB4 do not contain counter information.

The display modes of the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved image display areas 781 to 784 are set from among a plurality of display modes based on the counter information for the corresponding first to fourth reserved areas REB1 to REB4. There are no particular limitations on the plurality of display modes of the reserved images, but it is preferable that they are different from the display mode of the reserved images in the first reserved image display unit 75, and for example, the same pattern but different colors, different patterns, and combinations thereof are conceivable. In this embodiment, the plurality of display modes of the reserved images include at least the same pattern but different colors. Specifically, the plurality of display modes of the reserved images include at least a white diamond pattern, a blue diamond pattern, a green diamond pattern, and a red diamond pattern. And, like the reserved images in the first reserved image display unit 75, the color of the reserved images in the second reserved image display unit 78 indicates the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (jackpot expectation), and the jackpot expectation is white (lowest) < blue < green < red (highest). In addition, the display mode of the reserved image in the second reserved image display section 78 is set for the corresponding first to fourth reserved areas REB1 to REB4 based on the counter information. For example, if the counter information includes a counter value indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, red or green, which has a high probability of winning, is likely to be selected as the reserved image, whereas if the counter information includes a counter value indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a miss as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, white or blue, which has a low probability of winning, is likely to be selected as the reserved image.

In addition, since the reserved images in the second reserved image display section 78 are set in the corresponding first to fourth reserved areas REB1 to REB4 based on the counter information, the display position shifts when the counter information shifts to the first to fourth reserved areas REB1 to REB4 due to the start of a new variable game. For example, due to the start of a new variable game, the reserved image in the fourth reserved image display area 784 shifts to the third reserved image display area 783, the reserved image in the third reserved image display area 783 shifts to the second reserved image display area 782, and the reserved image in the second reserved image display area 782 shifts to the first reserved image display area 781. Note that the reserved image in the first reserved image display area 751 corresponds to an image displayed in the variable image display section 76.

Incidentally, during variable play in the sure-change play state and the time-saving play state, the second pending image display unit 78 may be set at all times, but the second pending image display unit 78 may also be set from the start of variable play to a specific point in time. For example, when a reach performance is executed, the second pending image display unit 78 may be set until the time when the reach performance starts, until the time when the super reach performance starts, or until the time when the special reach performance starts. In this case, the second pending image display unit 78 may be reset before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (for example, at the end of the reach performance).

<Variable Image Display Unit 76>
The variable image display section 76 shown in Figures 75(A) and 75(B) is an area that displays the variable image for the variable game being played, and the display mode of the variable image clearly indicates or suggests the probability of a big win for the lottery result in the big win lottery for the variable game. The display mode of the variable image clearly indicates or suggests the probability of a big win for the lottery result in the big win lottery for the variable game. The display mode of the variable image clearly indicates or suggests the probability of a big win, for example, by color, and the probability of a big win is white (lowest) < blue < green < red (highest). Of course, the probability of a big win by the display mode of the variable image may be clearly indicated or suggested by a pattern other than color in addition to or instead of color.

The variable image displayed on the variable image display section 76 is displayed in a manner that allows it to be distinguished from the reserved images displayed on the first reserved image display section 75 and the second reserved image display section 78. In the normal game state, the variable image in this embodiment is the same circular pattern as the reserved image displayed on the first reserved image display section 75, and in the special probability game state and the time-saving game state, it is the same diamond pattern as the reserved image displayed on the second reserved image display section 78, but is displayed in a larger size than the reserved images displayed on each reserved image display section 75, 78. Of course, the variable image displayed on the variable image display section 76 does not have to be the same shape with a different size, and may be a different shape, as long as it allows it to be distinguished from the reserved images displayed on the first reserved image display section 75 and the second reserved image display section 78.

During variable play in the normal game state, the variable image display unit 76 may be set at all times, but the variable image display unit 76 may also be set from the start of variable play to a specific point in time. For example, when a reach performance is executed, the variable image display unit 76 may be set until the time when the reach performance starts, until the time when the super reach performance starts, or until the time when the special reach performance starts. In this case, the variable image display unit 76 may be reset before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (for example, at the end of the reach performance).

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the variable image of the variable image display unit 76 does not change while the variable game is being played, as described below, but the display mode may be changed while the variable game is being played.

<Already-changed image display unit 77>
The already-changed image display section 77 shown in Fig. 75 (A) is an area that displays an already-changed image corresponding to the variable play for the first special chart in which the variable play is executed. The already-changed image display section 77 can display a predetermined number of already-changed images, and in this embodiment, it includes four already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 (first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774) so that a maximum of four already-changed images can be displayed.

In this embodiment, the symbol display unit 341 is set with not only the reserved image display unit 75 in which reserved images corresponding to the number of rights to execute a variable game are displayed, but also the already-changed image display unit 77 in which an already-changed image corresponding to a reserved image in which execution of a variable game has started is displayed. In this way, not only reserved images but also already-changed images corresponding to past reserved images in which a variable game has started are displayed, so that past reserved images can be used. For example, past reserved images can be used for the variable game or non-variable game for the reserved game (for example, as a performance). This makes it possible to give meaning to the past reserved images in which a variable game was executed in the progress of the game. For example, it becomes possible to use past reserved images to clearly indicate or suggest (execute a performance) the expectation (expectation of a big win) that the big win lottery result of the variable game or non-variable game is a big win. Furthermore, if the display mode of the past reserved image displayed as the already-changed image is such that there is a high expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, even if the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot, the already-changed image corresponding to the past reserved image is displayed, which can give the player new interest and increase his or her interest in the game.

The already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display section 77 are displayed so as to be distinguishable from the reserved image displayed in the first reserved image display section 75 and the changing image displayed in the changing image display section 76. In this embodiment, the already-changed image and the changing image are circular patterns, whereas the already-changed image is displayed as a star pattern. In this way, the display mode of the already-changed image is different from the display mode of the reserved image and the changing image, so that the already-changed image can be visually easily distinguished from the reserved image and the changing image. This makes it easy to grasp that it is a noteworthy changing display based on the display content of the already-changed image display section 77, which further increases the interest in the game.

The already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 are not particularly limited and do not necessarily have to be star-shaped patterns, so long as they can be distinguished from the pending image displayed in the first pending image display unit 75 and the currently-changed image displayed in the currently-changed image display unit 76. For example, the already-changed images may be the alphabet, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, etc.

In addition, the display mode of each already-changed image in the already-changed image display unit 77 is a display mode selected from a plurality of display modes. The plurality of display modes of the already-changed image includes a predetermined number of display modes of different colors, for example, white, blue, green, and red, as with the pending image and the currently-changed image. That is, the display mode of the already-changed image has commonality with the display mode of the pending image and the currently-changed image, that is, commonality of color. Of course, the commonality of the display mode of the already-changed image with the display mode of the pending image and the currently-changed image is not limited to color, and may be other commonalities such as patterns and motifs. For example, the commonality may be commonality of the alphabet, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, typeface (font), etc., in addition to commonality of character type.

In this way, by including a display mode of the already-changed image that has common points and common colors with the reserved image and the variable image, it becomes possible to set the display mode of the already-changed image in a format that inherits the display mode of the reserved image and the variable image. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined state occurs and it is more advantageous for the player to have the display mode of the reserved image in a display mode with a low expectation of a jackpot (e.g. blue) than to have the display mode of the reserved image in a display mode with a high expectation of a jackpot (e.g. red), it becomes easier to visually grasp that advantage. This makes it easier to grasp that it is a variable display that is worthy of attention based on the display contents of the already-changed image display section 77, which further increases the interest of the game.

The already-changed image display section 77 is set in the normal game state, but is not set in the high probability game state or the time-limited game state (see FIG. 75(B)). In this way, by setting the already-changed image display section 77 only in the normal game state, it becomes possible to provide the player with additional benefits in a game state that is less favorable to the player than the high probability game state or the time-limited game state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the game by providing additional benefits in the normal game state, which is less favorable to players who tend to feel bored, and thus increases the player's interest in the game. Of course, the already-changed image display section 77 may be set in at least one of the high probability game state and the time-limited game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display content of the already-changed image in the already-changed image display unit 77 is updated at least when the variable game is ended. That is, the display content of the already-changed image in the already-changed image display unit 77 is updated by the variable game being ended and the already-changed image corresponding to the variable image being displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 of the already-changed image display unit 77. Note that the timing for updating the display content of the already-changed image in the already-changed image display unit 77 may be other timing, such as the start of the variable game.

Also, the already-changed image displayed on the already-changed image display unit 77 is erased when a specific condition is met (see FIG. 81 (A) and FIG. 81 (B)). The specific condition may be, for example, that a predetermined time has passed since the end of the variable game without the start of the variable game and the winning game (the big win game and the small win game) being started, that the winning game is started, and that the display content of the already-changed image on the already-changed image display unit 77 is a specific content, as described below, and thus a benefit is given to the player (see FIG. 77 (A) and FIG. 77 (B)). In this way, the already-changed image displayed on the already-changed image display unit 77 is erased when a specific condition is met, so that, for example, when a player is replaced on a gaming machine, the already-changed image obtained by the previous player is prevented from being meaninglessly inherited by the new player. In addition, when a specific condition is met, the already-changed image displayed on the already-changed image display means 77 is erased, and even if the same player continues playing, the already-changed image starts to be displayed again, preventing the display of the already-changed image from becoming stale.

In addition, the display mode of the already-changed image displayed in each of the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 in the already-changed image display unit 77 may be changed. The timing at which the display mode of the already-changed image changes may be during a variable game, or may be the timing at which the already-changed image shifts due to the end of a variable game. In addition, the change in the display mode of the already-changed image is not limited to a promotion to a higher display mode due to a change in the reserved image, but may be a demotion to a lower display mode. For example, the color of the already-changed image is not limited to a change from blue to green or red, but may be a change from red to blue or green, etc. In this way, since it is possible to change the display mode of the already-changed image, when the display content in the already-changed image display unit 77 is a specific display content as described below, if a benefit is to be given to a player, the display content in the already-changed image display unit 77 can be a display content different from the specific display content when there is no benefit to be given to the player, and conversely, when there is a benefit to be given to the player, the display content in the already-changed image display unit 77 can be a specific display content.

In this embodiment, when the display content of the already-changed image on the already-changed image display unit 77 is a specific content, for example, when the display mode of multiple already-changed images is a predetermined combination, a benefit is given to the player when an already-changed image in a predetermined display mode is displayed.

Here, Figure 77 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the pattern combination level and the pattern combination type in the already-changed image display section 77, and Figure 77 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the pattern combination type and the profit information in the already-changed image display section 77.

As shown in FIG. 77(A), in this embodiment, the pattern combination levels in the already-changed image display section 77 are set to 10 levels, from combination level 1 to 10. The higher the number, the higher the difficulty (frequency) of the combination appearing. As described below, the higher the difficulty (frequency), the greater the profit given to the player.

In combination level 10, red patterns are displayed in the first changed image display area 771 (abbreviated as "first area" in FIG. 77(A)), the second changed image display area 772 (abbreviated as "second area" in FIG. 77(A)), the third changed image display area 773 (abbreviated as "third area" in FIG. 77(A)), and the fourth changed image display area 774 (abbreviated as "fourth area" in FIG. 77(A)). This combination level 10 is referred to as "four consecutive reds" in terms of combination type.

Combination level 9 is a combination in which a green pattern is displayed in all of the first already-changed image display area 771, the second already-changed image display area 772, the third already-changed image display area 773, and the fourth already-changed image display area 774. This combination level 9 is referred to as a combination type of "four consecutive greens."

Combination level 8 is a combination in which blue patterns are displayed in all of the first already-changed image display area 771, the second already-changed image display area 772, the third already-changed image display area 773, and the fourth already-changed image display area 774. This combination level 8 is referred to as the combination type "4 consecutive blues."

In combination level 7, a red pattern is displayed in the first changed image display area 771, the second changed image display area 772, and the third changed image display area 773, and a pattern other than red is displayed in the fourth changed image display area 774. This combination level 7 is referred to as a combination type of "three consecutive reds."

In combination level 6, a green pattern is displayed in the first changed image display area 771, the second changed image display area 772, and the third changed image display area 773, and a pattern other than a green pattern is displayed in the fourth changed image display area 774. This combination level 6 is referred to as a combination type of "three consecutive greens."

In combination level 5, blue patterns are displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771, the second already-changed image display area 772, and the third already-changed image display area 773, and a pattern other than blue patterns is displayed in the fourth already-changed image display area 774. This combination level 5 is referred to as a combination type of "three consecutive blues."

In combination level 4, a red pattern is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771, a green pattern is displayed in the second already-changed image display area 772, a blue pattern is displayed in the third already-changed image display area 773, and there are no particular restrictions on the patterns displayed in the fourth already-changed image display area 774. In other words, in combination level 4, a red pattern, a green pattern, and a blue pattern are displayed in order (from closest to the change image display unit 76) from the first already-changed image display area 771 to the third already-changed image display area 773. This combination level 5 is referred to as a "descending" combination type.

In combination level 3, a blue pattern is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771, a green pattern is displayed in the second already-changed image display area 772, a red pattern is displayed in the third already-changed image display area 773, and there are no particular restrictions on the patterns displayed in the fourth already-changed image display area 774. In other words, in combination level 3, a blue pattern, a green pattern, and a red pattern are displayed in order (from closest to the change image display unit 76) from the first already-changed image display area 771 to the third already-changed image display area 773. This combination level 3 is referred to as an "ascending" combination type.

In combination level 2, a rare pattern (see FIG. 80(B)) is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771, and there are no particular restrictions on the patterns displayed in the second already-changed image display area 772, the third already-changed image display area 773, and the fourth already-changed image display area 774. This combination level 2 is referred to as a "rare pattern" combination type.

In combination level 1, a joker symbol (see FIG. 79 (B2)) is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771, and there are no particular restrictions on the symbols displayed in the second already-changed image display area 772, the third already-changed image display area 773, and the fourth already-changed image display area 774, or the symbols are other than combination levels 2 to 9. This combination level 1 is referred to as the combination type "other."

As shown in FIG. 77(B), in this embodiment, the player is awarded a profit (profit according to the difficulty level) according to the pattern combination level (combination type) in the already-changed image display section 77. However, if the combination level is 1 (other), no profit is awarded to the player.

There are no particular limitations on the benefits that can be given to the player, but in this embodiment, the benefits include those related to the jackpot lottery (jackpot lottery system), those related to the presentation in variable play (variable play presentation system), those related to game information related to the ball output performance of the gaming machine 10 (game information system), and also those related to the operation of the electric role (electric role) 315b.

The big win lottery profit is awarded when the pattern combination in the already-changed image display section 77 is level 10 (four consecutive reds), when the pattern combination is level 9 (four consecutive greens), and when the pattern combination is level 8 (four consecutive blues). Specifically, in this embodiment, when the pattern combination is level 10 (four consecutive reds), the lottery result in the big win lottery is clearly indicated (or suggested) to be a big win, when the pattern combination is level 9 (four consecutive greens), the lottery result in the big win lottery is clearly indicated (or suggested) to be a sudden time-saving, and when the pattern combination is level 8 (four consecutive blues), the lottery result in the big win lottery is clearly indicated (or suggested) to be a small win. Here, the lottery results in the big win lottery are, other than a miss, the big win is the most advantageous to the player, followed by the sudden time-saving, and the small win is the least advantageous. In other words, in this embodiment, the higher the pattern combination level (difficulty level), the greater the profit is awarded to the player.

In addition, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not a combination of a jackpot, a sudden time reduction, and a small win other than a miss, the lottery result may be clearly indicated (or suggested) according to the combination of lottery results other than a miss.

The profit of the variable game presentation system is awarded when the symbol combination in the already-varied image display section 77 is level 7 (three consecutive reds), when the symbol combination is level 6 (three consecutive greens), and when the symbol combination is level 5 (three consecutive blues). Specifically, in this embodiment, when the symbol combination is level 7 (three consecutive reds), a timer presentation is executed in the variable game, when the symbol combination is level 6 (three consecutive greens), a super reach presentation is executed in the variable game, and when the symbol combination is level 5 (three consecutive blues), a stock presentation of the super hot presentation is executed in the variable game.

Here, the timer effect is an effect in which a timer is displayed and a specific effect is executed when the timer display reaches 0. The specific effect is any of the variable game effects executed in the gaming machine, and examples of the specific effect include a reserve change effect, a super reach effect, a special reach effect, a cut-in effect, a button effect, and an effect of the operation of a role called a gimmick. The stock effect of the super hot effect is, for example, an effect that notifies the pattern display unit 341 that a super hot effect will be executed. The super hot effect is, for example, a super hot cut-in effect, a group notice effect, and other small effects that are set in the gaming machine 10 and have an extremely high expectation of a jackpot compared to other effects.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning when a timer effect is executed varies depending on the specific type of effect executed when the timer display reaches 0, but is set to, for example, 20% to 50%. The probability of winning when a special reach effect is executed varies depending on the type of special reach effect, but is set to, for example, 5% to 10%. The probability of winning when a stock effect of a super hot effect is executed is set to, for example, 70%. In other words, for the player, a stock effect of a super hot effect is the most advantageous (granting the greatest profit), followed by a timer effect, and a super reach effect is the least advantageous (granting the least profit).

In other words, in this embodiment, unlike the case where the big win lottery profit is awarded, the variable game presentation profit awarded when the pattern combination is level 5 to 7 is the highest profit when the pattern combination level is the lowest level 5, while the intermediate profit is awarded when the pattern combination level is the highest level 7, and the lowest profit is awarded when the pattern combination level is the intermediate level 6. Here, although details will be described later, when the variable image corresponding to the reserved image in the first reserved image display area 751 of the first reserved image display unit 75 is displayed in the variable image display unit 76, there is no color change, and when the already-changed image corresponding to the changed image in the changed image display unit 76 is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 of the already-changed image display unit 77, there is no color change except in special cases (see FIG. 78). In other words, the color in the final display form of the reserved image in the first reserved image display area 751 and the color in the initial display form of the already-changed image in the first already-changed image display area 771 are the same. On the other hand, as described above, when the color of the reserved image in the display mode of the first already-changed image display area 771 is red, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the reserved image is blue. Therefore, when a reserved image displayed in blue is executed as the change, there is no high expectation that the lottery result in the big win lottery result will be a big win, and when a reserved image displayed in blue is executed as the change, interest in the game until the change ends decreases. In contrast, in this embodiment, a predetermined state that is more advantageous to the player is generated when already-changed information corresponding to a reserved image displayed in blue, which is disadvantageous to the player, is displayed compared to when an already-changed image corresponding to a reserved image displayed in red, which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, even when a change game is executed for a reserved image displayed in blue, the player can enjoy the change display for the reserved image while expecting the advantage when an already-changed image corresponding to the reserved display is displayed after the change display for the reserved image, and the interest in the game is improved.

The profits from the variable game effects are not limited to stock effects such as timer effects, super reach effects, and super hot effects, and are not limited to any particular variable game effects executed on the gaming machine 10.

Furthermore, the fact that the profits from the jackpot lottery system and the profits from the variable game presentation system are awarded to the player is due to the pattern combination in the already-varied image display unit 77, which indicates or suggests the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for that variation will be a jackpot. In this way, the pattern combination in the already-varied image display unit 77 indicates or suggests the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for that variation will be a jackpot, so even if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot due to the end of the variable game, it is possible to realize new gameplay that suggests the expectation for the lottery result based on the already-varied image corresponding to the past reserved image, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Profits from the game information system are awarded when the pattern combination in the already-changed image display section 77 is level 4 (descending order) and when the pattern combination is level 3 (ascending order). Specifically, in this embodiment, base-related information (e.g., information that explicitly or suggest a base) is awarded when the pattern combination is level 4 (descending order), and game setting value-related information (information that explicitly or suggest a game setting value) is awarded when the pattern combination is level 3 (ascending order).

The benefits of the gaming information system include the presentation of information that clearly indicates or suggests the ratio of special features and the ratio of consecutive special features, in addition to the base-related information and the game setting value-related information, and the presentation of information that clearly indicates or suggests the expected number of balls to be dispensed on the gaming machine 10.

The benefit of activating the electric role (electric role) 315b is awarded when the pattern combination in the already-changing image display section 77 is level 2 (rare pattern).

Here, FIG. 78 shows an example of the transition of the display mode until the already-changed display image corresponding to the pending image in the first pending image display area 751 in the first pending image display unit 75 is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 in the already-changed image display unit 77.

As shown in FIG. 78(A) and FIG. 78(B), when the variable image corresponding to the reserved image in the first reserved image display area 751 in the first reserved image display section 75 is displayed in the variable image display section 76, the pattern becomes larger but the color does not change. For example, when the reserved image in the first reserved image display area 751 is white, the variable image corresponding to the reserved image is displayed in white. Similarly, when the reserved image in the first reserved image display area 751 is blue, the variable image corresponding to the reserved image is displayed in blue, when the reserved image in the first reserved image display area 751 is green, the variable image corresponding to the reserved image is displayed in green, and when the reserved image in the first reserved image display area 751 is red, the variable image corresponding to the reserved image is displayed in red.

As shown in FIG. 78(A) and FIG. 78(B), when the already-changed image corresponding to the change image of the change image display unit 76 is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 of the already-changed image display unit 77, the pattern changes but the color does not change, except in special cases. For example, when the change image of the change image display unit 76 is white, the already-changed image of the first already-changed image display area 771 corresponding to the change image is displayed in white. Similarly, when the change image of the change image display unit 76 is blue, the already-changed image of the first already-changed image display area 771 corresponding to the change image is displayed in blue, when the change image of the change image display unit 76 is green, the already-changed image of the first already-changed image display area 771 corresponding to the change image is displayed in green, and when the change image of the change image display unit 76 is red, the already-changed image of the first already-changed image display area 771 corresponding to the change image is displayed in red.

In other words, when the changing image corresponding to the pending image in the first pending image display area 751 of the first pending image display unit 75 is displayed in the changing image display unit 76, there is no color change, and when the already-changing image corresponding to the changing image in the changing image display unit 76 is displayed in the first already-changing image display area 771 of the already-changing image display unit 77, there is no color change except in special cases.

In addition, a color change (display mode change) may be made when the variable image corresponding to the pending image in the first pending image display area 751 of the first pending image display unit 75 is displayed in the variable image display unit 76, a color change (display mode change) may be made for the variable image in the variable image display unit 76 during the execution of a variable game, and a color change (display mode change) may be made when a previously changed image corresponding to the variable image in the variable image display unit 76 is displayed in the first previously changed image display area 771 of the previously changed image display unit 77.

In addition, special cases in which the aforementioned color change occurs include when a joker pattern, which will be described later, is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 of the already-changed image display unit 77 (see FIG. 79 (B2)), and when a rare pattern, which will be described later, is displayed (see FIG. 80 (B)).

<Joker design>
When the already-changed image corresponding to the variable image of the variable image display unit 76 is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 of the already-changed image display unit 77, in the case where the symbol combination is one of levels 2 to 10, if the player cannot be given the benefit corresponding to each level (including the case where there is no first reservation), the joker symbol is displayed as the already-changed image corresponding to the variable image of the variable image display unit 76. In other words, by displaying the joker symbol, the symbol combination is set to level 1 instead of level 2 to 10, and it is possible to deal with the case where the symbol combination cannot give the player the benefit corresponding to level 2 to 10 or the case where there is no first reservation.

Here, Figure 79 is a diagram showing an example in which a joker pattern is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 in the already-changed image display unit 77.

As shown in FIG. 79(A), when the already-changed images in the first already-changed image display area 771 and the second already-changed image display area 772 in the already-changed image display section 77 are the same color other than white, and the change image in the change image display section 76 is the same color as the already-changed image, when the change ends, the already-changed images in the first to third already-changed image display areas 771 to 773 in the already-changed image display section 77 become the same color other than white, that is, three consecutive reds, three consecutive greens, or three consecutive blues. When the already-changed images in the first to third already-changed image display areas 771 are three consecutive colors other than white, that is, when the pattern combination is one of levels 5 to 7, a stock effect (specific effect) of a timer effect, a super reach effect, or a super hot effect is executed as described above (see FIG. 77(B)).

As shown in FIG. 79 (B1), when there is a first reservation that is the next change after the change, and it is determined that a specific effect will be executed in the change game for the first reservation, with the symbol combination resulting in a profit corresponding to levels 5 to 7, the already-changed image corresponding to the change is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 in the same color as the second already-changed image display area 772 and the third already-changed image display area 773.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 79 (B2), if there is a first reservation that will be the next change after the change, and it has not been determined that a specific effect will be executed in the change game for the first reservation, which is a profit corresponding to levels 5 to 7 in terms of the pattern combination, then the already-changed image corresponding to the change will be displayed as a joker pattern in the first already-changed image display area 771. Also, even if there is no first reservation that will be the next change after the change, after the change ends, the already-changed image corresponding to the change will be displayed as a joker pattern in the first already-changed image display area 771.

<Rare design>
As shown in FIG. 80(A) and FIG. 80(B), the rare symbol is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 in the already-changed image display unit 77 when the first starting hole 315 is opened by operating the electric device 315b based on the result of the normal winning lottery executed based on the passing of the game ball through the through gate 317 in the normal game state. The timing at which the rare symbol is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 is not the time when the variable game ends or the time when the next variable game starts, but is set independently of the variable game, and can be set during the period when the variable game is not being executed in the normal game state. Specifically, the timing at which the rare symbol is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 is set between the time when the lottery result in the normal winning lottery is determined to be a winning lottery and the time when the operation of the electric device 315b is started based on the lottery result being a winning lottery. In this embodiment, the timing at which the rare symbol is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 is set to the timing at which the voice lamp control device 5 receives a normal symbol lottery command indicating that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win from the main control device 4. Of course, the timing at which the rare symbol is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 may be set to other timing, such as the time at which the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is notified that it is a win.

In addition, during variable play in the normal game state, the already-changed image display unit 77 may be set at all times, but the already-changed image display unit 77 may also be set from the start of variable play to a specific point in time. For example, when a reach performance is executed, the already-changed image display unit 77 may be set until the time when the reach performance starts, until the time when the super reach performance starts, or until the time when the special reach performance starts. In this case, the already-changed image display unit 77 may be reset before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (for example, at the end of the reach performance).

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
Next, the sub timer interrupt processing of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 82 to 90, focusing on the differences from the sub timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment described above. Here, Fig. 82 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt processing of this embodiment. The sub timer interrupt processing of this embodiment differs from the sub timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment described above in that a part of the command determination processing (step S3601) is different from the sub timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment described above, and that a changed image deletion processing (step S3602) is executed.

[Command Judgment Process]
The command processing of this embodiment differs from the command determination processing of the first embodiment described above in that the processing required to set the changed image to be displayed on the changed image display unit 77 is executed.

<Step S3701>
In the command processing of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a variation pattern command (step S2101: Yes), it executes the processing required to execute the variation game presentation in the pattern display unit 341, etc., as in the first embodiment described above (steps S2103 to S2105), and adds 1 to the specified variation display count (step S3701). The specified variation display count is the variation display count counted from when the display content of the already-varied image in the already-varied image display unit 77 is a specific content and a profit is granted to the player (see Figures 77 (A) and 77 (B)). If the profit is not granted to the player until the specified variation display count has elapsed, as described below, the player is granted a profit (for example, ball-related information such as base-related information and game setting value-related information). In this way, by granting the profit to the player by the passage of the specified variation display count, it becomes possible to grant the profit to the player even if the display content of the already-varied image does not become a specific content and the profit is not granted to the player for a long period of time. As a result, when the display content of the already-changed image display section 77 does not become a specific content for a long period of time and the benefit is not given to the player, a relief measure is activated to give the player a benefit, thereby reducing the player's sense of boredom.

<Step S3702>
In step S3702, the MPU 51 executes the already-changed image shift process (see FIG. 78) and ends the command determination process. In the already-changed image shift process, when the variable game is ended, the already-changed images in the first to third already-changed image display sections 771 to 773 of the already-changed image display section 77 are shifted to the second to fourth already-changed image display sections 772 to 774 of the already-changed image display section 77, and the already-changed image, rare pattern or joker pattern corresponding to the variable image in the variable image display section 76 is displayed in the first already-changed image display section 771 of the already-changed image display section 77. In addition, in the already-changed image shift process, when the display content of the already-changed image display section 77 is a specific display content, a profit is given to the player (see FIG. 77 (A) and FIG. 77 (B)).

<Step S3703>
In the command processing of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), it executes the processing required to execute the jackpot game presentation in the pattern display unit 341, etc., as in the first embodiment described above (steps S2106 to S2108), clears the specified variable display count (step S3703), and ends the command judgment processing. That is, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game is started and the specified variable display count is cleared, the benefit of the execution of the jackpot game is given to the player, and the relief measure to be taken when the display content of the already-varied image display unit 77 does not become the specific content is temporarily stopped.

<Steps S3704 and S3705>
As shown in Fig. 84, in the command processing of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives the first reserved command (step S3704: Yes), it executes the first reserved image addition processing and ends the command judgment processing. The first reserved command is set in step S1207 or S1209 of the first reserved setting processing (see Fig. 21) in the start winning processing (see Fig. 20) of the main timer interrupt processing by the main control device 4 when the right to execute the variable game for the first special chart is added (see Fig. 22). The details of this first reserved image addition processing will be described below with reference to Fig. 85.

[First reserved image addition process]
In the first pending image addition process, when the right to execute a variable play on the first special chart is added, a process is executed to add a pending image to any one of the first to fourth pending image display areas 751 to 754 of the first pending image display unit 75.

<Steps S3801 and S3802>
As shown in FIG. 85, in the first reserved image addition process, the MPU 51 first checks the reserved number N of rights to play variable play on the first special chart at the time of receiving the first reserved command (step S3801), and identifies the fluctuation pattern (lottery result and fluctuation time in the jackpot lottery) for the reserved rights to play variable play on the first special chart included in the first reserved command (step S3802).

<Steps S3803 to S3805>
Next, the MPU 51 determines the final display mode of the reserved image for the reserved right (step S3803) and sets the pattern of reserved changes in the first reserved image display unit 75 (step S3804), and transmits this information as a display change pattern command to the display control device 6 (step S3805), and ends the first reserved image addition process. The display control device 6 that has received this display change pattern command adds the reserved image to the first reserved image display unit 75.

<Steps S3706 to S3708>
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 84, in the command processing of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives the first reserved number N stored in the RAM 512 (step S3706: Yes), it subtracts 1 from the first reserved number N stored in the RAM 512 (step S3708), executes the first reserved image shift processing (step S3708), and ends the command judgment processing. The first reserved shift command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the winning/losing information indicating the lottery result in the big win lottery in the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 has shifted when the reserved number N of the first special chart decreases, and is set in step S3501 of the data setting processing of Fig. 74. In addition, in the first pending image shift process, a process is executed to shift the pending images in the second to fourth pending image display areas 752 to 754 in the first pending image display unit 75 to the first to third pending image display areas 751 to 753 in the first pending image display unit 75 in accordance with the pending change pattern set in step S3804 (see Figure 76).

<Steps S3709 to S3711>
In the command processing of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a normal lottery command (step S3709: Yes), it checks whether the result of the normal lottery in the normal game state is a normal win (step S3710). Whether or not it is a normal game state can be determined by, for example, setting a normal game state transition command when the game state transition process of the main processing by the main control device 4 transitions to the normal game state, and setting a flag indicating that it is a normal game state when the voice lamp control device 5 receives a normal game state transition command, and whether or not the flag is on. Also, whether or not it is a normal win can be determined by whether or not the information on the result of the normal lottery included in the normal lottery command is a normal win.

Then, when the result of the lottery for winning a regular symbol in the normal game state is a winning symbol (step S3710: Yes), the MPU 51 displays a rare symbol (step S3711) in the first already-changed image display area 771 of the already-changed image display unit 77 (see FIG. 80 (B)) and terminates the command judgment process. That is, when the result of the lottery for winning a regular symbol in the normal game state is a winning symbol, the already-changed image displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 is changed to a rare symbol and displayed. In other words, when the first starting hole 315 is opened by operating the electric role 315b in the normal game state based on the lottery result of the lottery for winning a regular symbol executed based on the game ball passing through the through gate 317 being a winning symbol in the normal game state, a rare symbol is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 of the already-changed image display unit 77. In other words, when the combination level at which a rare pattern is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 is 1, the player is awarded the benefit of opening the second starting hole 315 by operating the electric device 315b.

On the other hand, if the result of the regular lottery included in the regular lottery command is not a regular win (step S3710: No), i.e., if it is a miss, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands (steps S2109 to S2122) and ends the command determination process.

[Altered image shift processing]
Next, the changed image shift process executed in step S3702 of the command determination process described above when a change pattern command is received will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Steps S3901 to S3903>
As shown in Fig. 86, in the changed image shift process, the MPU 51 first specifies the display mode of the changed image in the first to third changed image display areas 771 to 773 of the changed image display unit 77 before shifting the reserved image (step S3901), and specifies the display mode of the changed image in the changed image display unit 76 before shifting the reserved image (step S3902). Next, specifies the first to fourth changed image display areas 771 to 774 after shifting (step S3903).

<Step S3904>
When the processing of steps S3901 to S3903 is completed, the MPU 51 judges whether the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 10 (four consecutive reds) (step S3904). If the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 10 (four consecutive reds) (step S3904: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3905, and if the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is not level 10 (four consecutive reds) (step S3904: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3912.

<Step S3905>
If the combination of the already-changed display image in the already-changed image display section 77 is level 10 (four consecutive reds) (step S3904: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the lottery result of the big win lottery for the change is a big win or not (step S3905). If the lottery result of the big win lottery for the change is a big win (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3906 in FIG. 87, and if the lottery result of the big win lottery for the change is not a big win (step S3905: No), the process moves to step S3909 in FIG.

<Steps S3906 and S3907>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the change is a jackpot (step S3905: Yes), as shown in FIG. 87, the reserved images in the first to third already-changed image display areas 771 to 773 are shifted to the second to fourth already-changed image display areas 772 to 774 (step S3906), and a already-changed display image corresponding to the display mode of the change image in the change image display unit 76 before the shift is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 (step S3907). That is, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game in which the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 10 is a jackpot, the reserved images in the first to third already-changed image display areas 771 to 773 are shifted to the second to fourth already-changed image display areas 772 to 774, and the already-changed display image corresponding to the display mode of the variable image in the variable image display unit 76 before the shift is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. In other words, when the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 matches the profit given to the player, the already-changed display image corresponding to the display mode of the variable image in the variable image display unit 76 before the shift is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. As a result, when the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display section 77 becomes level 10, it is possible to clearly indicate that the result of the jackpot lottery for that change is a jackpot.

<Step S3908>
When the processing of steps S3906 and S3907 is completed, the MPU 51 clears the aforementioned specified variable display count that is added in step S3701 of the command determination processing of FIG. 83 when variable play is started (step S3908), and terminates the already-varied image shift processing.

<Steps S3909 and S3910>
If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the change is not a jackpot (step S3905: No), the reserved images in the first to third changed image display areas 771 to 773 are shifted to the second to fourth changed image display areas 772 to 774 as in step S3906 (step S3909), and the changed display image is displayed as a joker pattern in the first changed image display area 771 (step S3910). That is, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the change game in which the combination of the display mode of the changed images displayed in the first to fourth changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the changed image display unit 77 is level 10 is not a jackpot, the reserved images in the first to third changed image display areas 771 to 773 are shifted to the second to fourth changed image display areas 772 to 774, and the joker pattern (see FIG. 79 (B2)) is displayed in the first changed image display area 771. In other words, when the combination of the display mode of the already-changed image displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 does not match the profit given to the player, a joker pattern is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. As a result, when the combination of the display mode of the already-changed image displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 can be level 10, if the lottery result in the big win lottery for the change is not a big win, it is possible to prevent the combination of the display mode of the already-changed image from being level 10, and it is possible to prevent the lottery result in the big win lottery for the change and the combination level of the display mode of the already-changed image from being inconsistent.

<Step S3911>
As shown in FIG. 86, if the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is not level 10 (four consecutive reds) (step S3904: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 9 (four consecutive greens) (step S3911). If the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 9 (four consecutive greens) (step S3911: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3912, and if the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is not level 9 (four consecutive greens) (step S3911: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3913.

<Step S3912>
If the combination of already-changed display images in the already-changed image display section 77 is level 9 (four consecutive green colors) (step S3911: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for that change is a sudden time reduction (step S3912).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the change is a sudden time-saving (step S3912: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the processing of steps S3906 to S3908 in FIG. 87 described above, and ends the changed image shift processing. That is, if the combination of the changed display images in the changed image display section 77 is level 9 (four consecutive greens) and the result of the jackpot lottery for the change is a sudden time-saving, the reserved images in the first to third changed image display areas 771 to 773 are shifted to the second to fourth changed image display areas 772 to 774, and the changed display image corresponding to the display mode of the changed image in the changed image display section 76 before the shift is displayed in the first changed image display area 771. In other words, when the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 matches the profit given to the player, the already-changed display image corresponding to the display mode of the changed image in the changed image display unit 76 before the shift is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. As a result, when the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 9, it is possible to clearly indicate that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for that change is a sudden time reduction.

On the other hand, if the result of the lottery in the big win lottery for the change is not a sudden time reduction (step S3912: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing of steps S3909 and S3910 in FIG. 87 described above, and ends the already-changed image shift processing. That is, if the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 9 (four consecutive greens) and the result of the lottery in the big win lottery for the change is not a sudden time reduction, the reserved images in the first to third already-changed image display areas 771 to 773 are shifted to the second to fourth already-changed image display areas 772 to 774, and a joker pattern (see FIG. 79 (B2)) is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. In other words, if the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 does not match the profit given to the player, a joker pattern is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. As a result, if the combination of display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 can be level 9, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for that change is not a sudden time reduction, it is possible to prevent the combination of display modes of the already-changed images from becoming level 9, and it is possible to prevent a contradiction between the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for that change and the combination level of the display modes of the already-changed images.

<Step S3913>
If the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is not level 9 (four consecutive greens) (step S3911: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 8 (four consecutive blues) (step S3913). If the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 8 (four consecutive blues) (step S3913: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3914, and if the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is not level 8 (four consecutive blues) (step S3913: No), the process shifts to step S3915 in FIG.

<Step S3914>
If the combination of already-changed display images in the already-changed image display section 77 is level 8 (four consecutive blue colors) (step S3913: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the big win lottery for that change is a small win or not (step S3914).

Then, if the result of the big win lottery for the change is a small win (step S3914: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the processing of steps S3906 to S3908 in FIG. 87 described above, and ends the already-changed image shift processing. That is, if the combination of the already-changed display image in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 8 (four consecutive blues) and the result of the big win lottery for the change is a small win, the reserved images in the first to third already-changed image display areas 771 to 773 are shifted to the second to fourth already-changed image display areas 772 to 774, and the already-changed display image corresponding to the display mode of the change image in the change image display unit 76 before the shift is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. In other words, when the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 matches the profit given to the player, the already-changed display image corresponding to the display mode of the changed image in the changed image display unit 76 before the shift is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. As a result, when the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 8, it is possible to clearly indicate that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for that change is a sudden time reduction.

On the other hand, if the result of the lottery in the big win lottery for the change is not a sudden time reduction (step S3914: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing of steps S3909 and S3910 in FIG. 87 described above, and ends the already-changed image shift processing. That is, if the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 8 (four consecutive blues) and the result of the lottery in the big win lottery for the change is not a small win, the reserved images in the first to third already-changed image display areas 771 to 773 are shifted to the second to fourth already-changed image display areas 772 to 774, and a joker pattern (see FIG. 79 (B2)) is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. In other words, if the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 does not match the profit given to the player, a joker pattern is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. As a result, if the combination of display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 can be level 8, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for that change is not a small win, it is possible to prevent the combination of display modes of the already-changed images from being level 8, and it is possible to prevent a contradiction between the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for that change and the combination level of the display modes of the already-changed images.

<Step S3915>
If the combination of the already-changed display image in the already-changed image display unit 77 is not level 8 (4 consecutive blues) (step S3911: No), as shown in Fig. 88, the MPU 51 judges whether the combination of the already-changed display image in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 7 (3 consecutive reds) (step S3915). If the combination of the already-changed display image in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 7 (3 consecutive reds) (step S3915: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3916, and if the combination of the already-changed display image in the already-changed image display unit 77 is not level 7 (3 consecutive reds) (step S3915: No), the process shifts to step S3917.

<Step S3916>
If the combination of already-changed display images in the already-changed image display section 77 is level 7 (three consecutive reds) (step S3915: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether it has been decided that a timer presentation will be executed as a variable game presentation in the variable game (step S3916).

If it is determined that a timer presentation is to be executed as a variable game presentation in the variable game (step S3916: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the processing of steps S3906 to S3908 in FIG. 87 described above, and ends the already-changed image shift processing. That is, if it is determined that a timer presentation is to be executed as a variable game presentation in the variable game when the combination of already-changed display images in the already-changed image display section 77 is level 7 (three consecutive reds), the reserved images in the first to third already-changed image display areas 771 to 773 are shifted to the second to fourth already-changed image display areas 772 to 774, and the already-changed display image corresponding to the display mode of the variable image in the variable image display section 76 before the shift is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. In other words, when the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 matches the profit given to the player, the already-changed display image corresponding to the display mode of the changed image in the changed image display unit 76 before the shift is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. This makes it possible to clearly indicate that when the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 7, a timer presentation is executed as a variable game presentation in the variable game.

On the other hand, if it is not determined that a timer presentation is to be executed as a variable game presentation in the variable game (step S3916: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing of steps S3909 and S3910 in FIG. 87 described above, and ends the variable image shift processing. That is, if it is not determined that a timer presentation is to be executed as a variable game presentation in the variable game when the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 7 (three consecutive reds), the reserved images in the first to third already-changed image display areas 771 to 773 are shifted to the second to fourth already-changed image display areas 772 to 774, and a joker pattern (see FIG. 79 (B2)) is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. In other words, if the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 does not match the profit given to the player, a joker pattern is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. As a result, if the combination of display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 can be level 7, and if it has not been determined that a timer presentation will be executed as a variable game presentation in the variable game, the combination of display modes of the already-changed images can be prevented from becoming level 7, and a contradiction between the variable game presentation executed in the variable game and the combination level of the display modes of the already-changed images can be prevented.

<Step S3917>
If the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is not level 7 (three consecutive reds) (step S3915: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 6 (three consecutive greens) (step S3917). If the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 6 (three consecutive greens) (step S3917: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3918, and if the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is not level 6 (three consecutive greens) (step S3917: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3919.

<Step S3918>
If the combination of already-changed display images in the already-changed image display section 77 is level 6 (three consecutive green colors) (step S3917: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether it has been decided that a super reach effect will be executed as a variable game effect in the variable game (step S3918).

Then, when it is determined that a super reach effect is to be executed as a variable game effect in the variable game (step S3918: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the processing of steps S3906 to S3908 in FIG. 87 described above, and ends the already-changed image shift processing. That is, when it is determined that a super reach effect is to be executed as a variable game effect in the variable game when the combination of already-changed display images in the already-changed image display section 77 is level 6 (three consecutive greens), the reserved images in the first to third already-changed image display areas 771 to 773 are shifted to the second to fourth already-changed image display areas 772 to 774, and the already-changed display image corresponding to the display mode of the variable image in the variable image display section 76 before the shift is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. In other words, when the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 matches the profit given to the player, the already-changed display image corresponding to the display mode of the changed image in the changed image display unit 76 before the shift is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. This makes it possible to clearly indicate that a super reach effect will be executed as a change game effect in the change game when the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 6.

On the other hand, if it is not determined that a super reach effect is to be executed as a variable game effect in the variable game (step S3918: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing of steps S3909 and S3910 in FIG. 87 described above, and ends the already-changed image shift processing. That is, if it is not determined that a super reach effect is to be executed as a variable game effect in the variable game when the combination of already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 6 (three consecutive reds), the reserved images in the first to third already-changed image display areas 771 to 773 are shifted to the second to fourth already-changed image display areas 772 to 774, and a joker pattern (see FIG. 79 (B2)) is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. In other words, if the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 does not match the profit given to the player, a joker pattern is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. As a result, if the combination of display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 can be level 6, and if it has not been determined that a super reach effect will be executed as a variable game effect in the variable game, the combination of display modes of the already-changed images can be prevented from becoming level 6, and a contradiction between the variable game effect executed in the variable game and the combination level of the display modes of the already-changed images can be prevented.

<Step S3919>
If the combination of the already-changed display image in the already-changed image display unit 77 is not level 6 (three consecutive greens) (step S3917: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the combination of the already-changed display image in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 5 (three consecutive blues) (step S3919). If the combination of the already-changed display image in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 5 (three consecutive blues) (step S3919: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3920, and if the combination of the already-changed display image in the already-changed image display unit 77 is not level 5 (three consecutive blues) (step S3919: No), the process moves to step S3921 in FIG.

<Step S3920>
If the combination of already-changed display images in the already-changed image display section 77 is level 5 (three consecutive blue colors) (step S3919: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether it has been decided that a stock effect of the super hot effect will be executed as a variable game effect in the variable game (step S3920).

Then, when it is determined that the stock effect of the super hot effect is executed as the variable game effect in the variable game (step S3920: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the processing of steps S3906 to S3908 in FIG. 87 described above, and ends the already-changed image shift processing. That is, when the combination of the already-changed display image in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 5 (three consecutive blue), and it is determined that the stock effect of the super hot effect is executed as the variable game effect in the variable game, the reserved images in the first to third already-changed image display areas 771 to 773 are shifted to the second to fourth already-changed image display areas 772 to 774, and the already-changed display image corresponding to the display mode of the variable image in the variable image display unit 76 before the shift is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. In other words, when the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 matches the profit given to the player, the already-changed display image corresponding to the display mode of the changed image in the changed image display unit 76 before the shift is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. This makes it possible to clearly indicate that when the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 5, the stock effect of the super hot effect is executed as the change game effect in the change game.

On the other hand, if it is not determined that the stock effect of the super hot effect will be executed as the variable game effect in the variable game (step S3920: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing of steps S3909 and S3910 in FIG. 87 described above, and ends the already-changed image shift processing. In other words, if the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 5 (three consecutive blue colors), and it is not determined that the stock effect of the super hot effect will be executed as the variable game effect in the variable game, the reserved images in the first to third already-changed image display areas 771 to 773 are shifted to the second to fourth already-changed image display areas 772 to 774, and a joker pattern (see FIG. 79 (B2)) is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. In other words, when the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 does not match the profit given to the player, a joker pattern is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771. As a result, when the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 can be level 5, if it is not determined that a stock performance of a super hot performance is executed as a variable game performance in the variable game, it is possible to prevent the combination of the display modes of the already-changed images from being level 5, and it is possible to prevent a contradiction between the variable game performance executed in the variable game and the combination level of the display mode of the already-changed images.

<Step S3921>
If the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is not level 5 (three consecutive blues) (step S3919: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 4 (descending order) (step S3921). If the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 4 (descending order) (step S3921: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3922, and if the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is not level 4 (descending order) (step S3921: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3923.

<Step S3922>
If the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 4 (descending order) (step S3921: Yes), the MPU 51 displays base-related information (step S3922). That is, since the base-related information can always be given to the player as a profit, the joker pattern is not displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 of the already-changed image display unit 77, and is always displayed when the combination of the already-changed display images is level 4 (descending order). Of course, the base-related information may be displayed with a predetermined probability when the combination of the already-changed display images is level 4 (descending order). In this case, if the base-related information is not displayed when the combination of the already-changed display images is level 4 (descending order), the joker pattern is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 of the already-changed image display unit 77.

The base-related information is displayed, for example, as a pattern on the display unit 341, but may also be displayed on another display unit such as the seven-segment display unit 39. The base-related information may also be displayed as information that explicitly or suggest the base, or the base may be ranked and the rank may be displayed.

<Step S3923>
If the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is not level 4 (descending order) (step S3921: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 3 (ascending order) (step S3923). If the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 3 (ascending order) (step S3923: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3924, and if the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is not level 3 (ascending order) (step S3923: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3925.

<Step S3924>
If the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is level 3 (ascending order) (step S3923: Yes), the MPU 51 displays the game setting value related information (step S3924). That is, since the game setting value related information can always be given to the player as a profit, the joker symbol is not displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 of the already-changed image display unit 77, and is always displayed when the combination of the already-changed display images is level 3 (ascending order). Of course, the game setting value related information may be displayed with a predetermined probability when the combination of the already-changed display images is level 3 (ascending order). In this case, if the game setting value related information is not displayed when the combination of the already-changed display images is level 3 (ascending order), the joker symbol is displayed in the first already-changed image display area 771 of the already-changed image display unit 77.

In addition, the game setting value related information may be displayed, for example, as a pattern on the display unit 341, but may also be displayed on another display unit such as the seven-segment display unit 39. In addition, the game setting value related information may be displayed as information that explicitly indicates the game setting value, but may also be displayed as information that suggests the game setting value.

<Step S3925>
If the combination of the already-changed display images in the already-changed image display section 77 is not level 3 (ascending order) (step S3923: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the specified change display number has reached the specified number (step S3925). Then, if the specified change display number has reached the specified number (step S3925: Yes), the MPU 51 displays base-related information in the same manner as in step S3922, and ends the already-changed image shift process. Note that, instead of the case where the specified change display number has reached the specified number, other ball-out-related information that can always be presented, such as game setting value-related information, role ratio information, and continuous role ratio information, may be displayed.

[Processing to erase existing changes]
Next, the already-changed display erasing process executed in step S3602 of the sub-timer interruption process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to Fig. 90. In this already-changed display erasing process, when a specific condition is satisfied, the already-changed image displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display section 77 is erased.

<Step S4001>
In the already-changed display erasing process, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not a variable game is being played (step S4001). Whether or not a variable game is being played can be judged by, for example, setting a flag indicating that a variable game is being played on when a variable pattern command is received, and checking whether or not this flag is on. If the variable game is being played (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4010, and if the variable game is not being played (step S4001: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4002.

<Step S4002>
If the variable game is not being executed (step S4001: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the jackpot game is being executed (step S4002). Whether or not the winning game (jackpot game or small win game) is being executed can be judged by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the jackpot game or small win game is being executed when a jackpot game start command or a small win game start command is received, and by checking whether or not this flag is on. Then, if the jackpot game is being executed (step S4002: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4010, and if the jackpot game is not being executed (step S4002: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4003.

<Step S4003>
When neither the variable play nor the big win play is being performed (step S4002: No), that is, when the game is not being performed and the game is in a standby state, the MPU 51 judges whether the standby state counter flag is set to ON (step S4003). The standby state counter flag indicates the remaining time from the standby state until the changed image displayed in the first to fourth changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the changed image display unit 77 is erased, and is set to ON in step S4005 described later. It is also possible to judge whether the game is in a standby state based on the standby state counter flag.

Then, if the standby state counter flag is set to ON (step S4003: Yes), that is, if the standby state continues in which neither variable play nor winning play (jackpot play or small win play) is being performed, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4006. On the other hand, if the standby state counter flag is set to OFF (step S4003: No), and either variable play or winning play (jackpot play or small win play) is being performed, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4004.

<Steps S4004 and S4005>
When the standby state counter flag is set to OFF (step S4003: No), if either the variable play or the winning play (big win play or small win play) is being executed, the MPU 51 sets the standby state counter (step S4004), sets the standby state counter flag to ON (step S4005), and ends the already-varying display erasing process. In other words, when the standby state is started, the standby state counter is set, and the standby state counter flag is set to ON.

<Steps S4006 and S4007>
If the standby state counter flag is set to ON (step S4003: Yes), that is, if the standby state continues in which neither the variable play nor the winning play (the big win play or the small win play) is being performed, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the standby state counter (step S4006) and judges whether the value of the standby state counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4007). If the value of the standby state counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4007: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4006, and if the value of the standby state counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4007: No), the MPU 51 ends the already-varied display erasing process.

<Steps S4008 and S4009>
If the value of the standby state counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4007: Yes), that is, if the duration of the standby state has reached a predetermined time, the MPU 51 erases the changed images displayed in the first to fourth changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the changed image display unit 77 (step S4008), sets the standby state counter flag to off (step S4009), and terminates the changed display erasure process.

<Steps S4010 to S4012>
When a variable game is being performed (step S4001: Yes), or when a winning game is being performed (step S4002: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the standby state counter flag is set to ON (step S4010). When the standby state counter flag is set to ON (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the standby state counter (step S4011), sets the standby state counter flag to OFF (step S4012), and ends the already-changed display erasing process. When the standby state counter flag is set to OFF (step S4010: No), the already-changed display erasing process ends.

In this way, in the already-changed display erasure process, when a standby state in which neither a variable game nor a winning game is being executed continues for a certain period of time, the already-changed images displayed in the first to fourth already-changed image display areas 771 to 774 of the already-changed image display unit 77 are erased. Therefore, when a player is replaced on the gaming machine, the already-changed images obtained by the previous player are prevented from being meaninglessly inherited by the new player. In addition, when a specific condition is met, the already-changed images displayed on the already-changed image display means 77 are erased, and even if the same player continues playing, the display of the already-changed images is started again, preventing the display of the already-changed images from becoming stale.

As described above, in this embodiment, not only the first reserved image display section 75 in which reserved images corresponding to the number of rights to start variable play of the first special pattern are displayed on the display section 341, but also the already-changed image display section 77 in which the already-changed image corresponding to the reserved image from which the variable play has been started is displayed. In this way, not only the reserved image for the first reservation but also the already-changed image corresponding to the past reserved image from which the variable play has been started is displayed, so that the past reserved images can be used. This makes it possible to give meaning to the past reserved images from which the variable play was executed in the progress of the game. And, when the display mode of the past reserved image displayed as the already-changed image is one in which there is a high expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, even if the stop display mode of the decorative pattern in the variable play notifies the player that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it is possible to give the player new interest by displaying the already-changed image corresponding to the past reserved image, and the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, compared to an already-changed image corresponding to a reserved image displayed in a display mode with a high expectation of a jackpot, an already-changed image corresponding to a reserved image displayed in a display mode with a low expectation of a jackpot generates a predetermined state that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, even when playing a variable game with a reserved image displayed in a display mode with a low expectation of a jackpot, the player can enjoy playing the variable game with the reserved image while expecting the advantage that would be obtained if an already-changed image corresponding to the reserved image was displayed, which increases the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the pending image is different from the display mode of the already-changed image. In this way, by making the display mode of the pending image and the display mode of the already-changed image different, it is possible to easily visually distinguish between the pending image and the already-changed image. This makes it easy to know which change display is worth paying attention to, further increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific condition is met, the already-changed display image in the already-changed image display unit 77 is erased. In this way, when a specific condition is met, the already-changed display image in the already-changed image display unit 77 is erased, so that, for example, when a player is replaced in the gaming machine 10, the new player is prevented from meaninglessly inheriting the already-changed image obtained by the previous player. Also, when a specific condition is met, the already-changed image displayed in the already-changed image display unit 77 is erased, so that even if the same player continues playing, the display of the already-changed image begins again, preventing the display of the already-changed image from becoming stale.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reserved image display unit 75 is set in the display unit 341 in a normal game state that is less favorable to the player than the high probability game state or the time-limited game state. In this way, by setting the reserved image display unit 75 in the display unit 341 in a normal game state that is less favorable to the player than the high probability game state or the time-limited game state, it becomes possible to provide the player with an additional benefit in the normal game state that is less favorable to the player. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the game by providing an additional benefit in the normal game state that is less favorable to players who tend to feel bored, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of already-changed images displayed on the already-changed image display unit 77 is a predetermined fixed number (upper limit number). In this way, since the number of already-changed images displayed on the already-changed image display unit 77 is a predetermined fixed number (upper limit number), when a variable play for a reserved image is started, the reserved image displayed on the already-changed image display unit 77 is updated. Therefore, it is possible to realize new gameplay that gives a benefit to the player based on the contents of the already-changed image display unit 77 that are updated by the start of a variable play for a reserved image, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of a jackpot is clearly indicated or suggested by the display mode of a fixed number (upper limit number) of already-changed images displayed on the already-changed image display unit 77. In this way, the probability of a jackpot is clearly indicated or suggested by the display mode of a fixed number (upper limit number) of already-changed images displayed on the already-changed image display unit 77. Even if the stop display mode of the decorative pattern in the variable game indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot, it is possible to realize a new gameplay that suggests the probability of a jackpot based on the already-changed images corresponding to the past reserved images, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the already-changed image displayed on the already-changed image display unit 77 is changed to a different display mode. In this way, by changing the display mode of the already-changed image displayed on the already-changed image display unit 77 to a different display mode, when multiple already-changed images are displayed on the already-changed image display unit 77, it is possible to control the occurrence rate of combinations of the display modes of these already-changed images. As a result, when a profit according to a combination of the display modes of the already-changed images is given to the player, the occurrence rate of combinations of the display modes of the already-changed images can be controlled according to the level of profit given to the player. In addition, by changing the display mode of the already-changed image displayed on the already-changed image display unit 77 to a different display mode, when a predetermined condition is not established, it is prevented that the player is favored when the already-changed image corresponding to the reserved image displayed in a display mode disadvantageous to the player is displayed on the already-changed image display unit 77 compared to the case where the already-changed image corresponding to the reserved image displayed in a display mode advantageous to the player is displayed on the already-changed image display unit 77.

In this embodiment, in the already-changed image shift process, it is first determined whether the combination of already-changed images in the already-changed image display unit 77 is a combination that will give a benefit to the player, and then it is determined whether the benefit corresponding to the combination can be given to the player. In other words, it is determined whether the combination occurs in a variable game in which a combination of already-changed images in the already-changed image display unit 77 occurs. In response to this, it is possible to determine whether there is a benefit to be given to the player in the variable game, and to appropriately change the already-changed images so that the combination of already-changed images in the already-changed image display unit 77 corresponds to the benefit. In this case, for example, when a first reservation occurs for the first special chart, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the first reservation and the variable game performance can be predicted, and based on this prediction, the already-changed images can be appropriately changed at the time of shifting (at the start or end of the variable game) or when the variable game is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to fifth embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

[Other Modifications]
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the outer frame 14 of the gaming machine 10 is generally made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the inner frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11, and the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12, but the gaming machine 10 may lock the inner frame 12 to the front frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and lock the back pack unit 13 to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened, by a locking means such as a cylinder lock, or a locking means that makes the inner frame 12 unopenable relative to the front frame 11 and a locking means that makes the back pack unit 13 unopenable relative to the inner frame 12 may be provided separately. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration is adopted in which the left end of the inner frame 12 in a front view is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11, but a configuration in which the right end of the inner frame 12 in a front view is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11 may also be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the left end of the back pack unit 13 in front view is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, so that the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12. However, the right end of the back pack unit 13 in front view can be rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, so that the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the game board 31 provided in the gaming machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the gaming machine 10 is configured to include an upper tray 23 and a lower tray 24, but the lower tray 24 may be omitted and only the upper tray 23 may be provided. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on the right side as viewed from the front is adopted, but a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on another part, such as the left side as viewed from the front, may be adopted. In addition, a configuration in which a plurality of launch handles 22 are provided, such as a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on both the right and left sides as viewed from the front, may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration in which the touch sensor 21a capable of detecting whether or not the player is touching the launch handle 22 (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the launch handle 22) is adopted, but a configuration in which the touch sensor 21a is omitted as the launch handle 22 may be adopted. In each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, various configurations may be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, and for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched using the elastic force of a spring or the like, or a configuration in which the game ball is launched using the wind pressure when compressed gas is ejected, may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, when the launch handle 22 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, one game ball is launched, for example, every 0.6 sec (100 game balls per minute), but the configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 balls) are launched per minute, or the configuration may be such that 100 or more game balls (for example, 200 balls) are launched per minute. Also, the configuration may be such that the game balls are launched when the launch handle 22 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount. Also, the configuration may be such that the game balls are launched one by one by flicking the lever. Also, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration including a speaker 26 is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or instead of the speaker 26 may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting earphones or headphones that the player brings with him/her to the earphone jack, the player can fully enjoy the sound of the gaming machine 10 that the player is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding gaming machines 10. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration including a 7-segment display device is adopted as a means capable of displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol that starts to change display based on the game ball entering the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, but other configurations can be adopted as a means capable of displaying the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol, and for example, a configuration in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a row or matrix, a configuration including a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, a configuration including a halogen lamp, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration having two LED lamps is adopted as a means capable of displaying a normal pattern that starts a variable display based on the game ball passing through the through gate 317, but other configurations can be adopted as a means capable of displaying a normal pattern, for example, a configuration in which three or more LED lamps are arranged in a row or matrix, a configuration having a display device such as a 7-segment display device, a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, a configuration having a halogen lamp, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the upper limit of the reserved number N of the first special pattern and the reserved number M of the second special pattern is 4, and the upper limit of the reserved images for the first special pattern and the upper limit of the reserved images for the second special pattern are also 4, but the reserved numbers M, N and the upper limit of the reserved images are not limited to 4, and may be 1 to 3 or 5 or more, and the upper limit of the already-changed images displayed on the already-changed image display unit 77 is not limited to 4, and may be 1 to 3 or 5 or more, and the already-changed image display unit 77 may be an area in which the upper limit number including the image for the variable display is displayed. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means such as the pattern display unit 341 capable of displaying the decorative pattern, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, a plasma display device, a drum rotating display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, a configuration combining two or more of these, and the like may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, and various characters, figures, symbols, patterns, combinations of two or more of these, and the like may be adopted. For example, the decorative pattern may be alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, combinations of two or more of these, and the like. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the number of pattern rows in which the decorative pattern scrolls is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In addition, when a configuration in which the decorative pattern has one pattern row is adopted, for example, a configuration in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops may be adopted. Also, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more rows of decorative symbols is adopted, for example, a configuration in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line (valid line) may be adopted. Also, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the already-changed means that a variable game using decorative symbols or the like has been executed (ended), but the already-changed meaning may mean that the change of the decorative symbols has started. In this case, the already-changed includes the change. Also, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, various configurations can be adopted for the special electric role such as the opening and closing door 319 that opens and closes the large prize opening such as the variable prize opening 316. For example, a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-shaped member, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward around the rotating shaft to open the large prize opening, a configuration in which the large prize opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board 31, and a configuration in which the large prize opening is opened and closed by a vane member rotating in the left-right direction (clockwise and counterclockwise directions) may be adopted. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, so-called loop probability variable machines have been described, but in a gaming machine such as a V-ST machine that transitions to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a probability variable gaming state, after the end of a jackpot game on the condition of a V winning in the jackpot game, a V winning port is provided in a large winning port such as the variable winning port 316. The V winning port may be one that can always win a prize when the large winning port is opened, but a configuration may be adopted in which it is opened when a specific condition is satisfied. An example of the specific condition is the execution of a specific round game (for example, the first round round game, the final round game). In addition, in the case where the V winning port is configured to be opened when a specific condition is satisfied, a movable member that can open and close the V winning port is provided in the V winning port, and the V winning port is opened and closed by controlling the operation of the movable member. In addition, in the case where the V winning port is opened when a specific condition is satisfied, a configuration may be adopted in which the V winning port is closed when a game ball enters the V winning port or after a certain time has passed. In addition, a plurality of large winning openings may be provided, and for example, a large winning opening with a V winning opening and a large winning opening without a V winning opening may be provided separately. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, various configurations may be adopted as the normal electric role such as the electric role 315b that switches the presence or absence of the restriction on the entry of game balls into the starting winning opening such as the second winning opening 315. For example, a tulip-shaped normal electric role (so-called electric chute) in which a pair of movable valves (wing members) can be opened left and right, a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending substantially horizontally is provided below a plate-shaped member, and the starting winning opening can be opened by the plate-shaped member rotating forward around the rotating shaft, a configuration in which the starting winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front and rear directions of the game board 31, and a configuration in which the starting winning opening is opened and closed by the rotation of the feather member in the left and right directions (clockwise and counterclockwise directions) may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variant examples, the number of prize balls set for each winning port (general winning port 313, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, variable winning port 316, etc.) is an example, and by appropriately changing the number of prize balls set for each winning port, it is possible to realize multiple types of gaming machines 10 with different specifications.

Summary of the Invention
Below, an outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be added. Note that, for the sake of convenience, symbols may be added to the description in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each of the additions and each of the embodiments, but the invention related to the additions is not limited to the specific configurations to which the symbols are added. In addition, it is possible to select and combine the respective configurations and processing functions described below in any desired manner.

[Appendix A1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1', when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the display means during a specified period. This allows the player to identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and it is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2' or Appendix A3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix A4']
The display means (35, 39, 341) has a plurality of display areas in which the specific information is displayed,
The gaming machine according to claim A2' or A3', wherein the display control means (51) displays the special information using a part of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4', the special information is displayed in a part of the multiple display areas of the display means in which the specific information is displayed. In other words, the display area for the special information is shared with the display area for the specific information. This allows the specific information and the special information to be displayed on a common display means, so that the control for displaying the specific information and the special information can be simplified, and the configuration of the display means can also be simplified.

[Appendix A5']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A4', wherein the display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting regions (segments A to G) as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5', the display means has a plurality of light-emitting regions. Such a display means can be realized by an easily available, low-cost display device, such as a seven-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with a display means that displays specific information and special information, while preventing the gaming machine from becoming too complicated in configuration and the manufacturing costs from increasing.

[Appendix A6']
The display means (341) is capable of displaying an image,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A4', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (341) to display the specific information or the special information as an image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6', the specific information and special information are displayed as images on the display means. Therefore, there are many options for the image types and display modes to be displayed as the specific information and special information, and the specific information and special information can be displayed in a variety of forms. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in identifying or guessing specific numerical information or predetermined numerical information based on the specific information and special information.

[Appendix A7']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A6', characterized in that the image display means (341) is capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A7', the specific information and special information are displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means required for the gaming machine without the need for a separate display means for displaying the specific information and special information.

[Appendix A8']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A7', wherein the specified period is set to a period that suggests or indicates the result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A8', when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means, and a specified period during which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is not displayed on the display means is set to a period suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination. This makes it possible to display the specific information together with the result of the transition determination. For example, when a variable display image of a pattern suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination is displayed on the image display means, it is also possible to simultaneously display the specific information on the image display means. This makes it possible to increase interest in suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination by displaying the specific information.

[Appendix A9']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', wherein the specific condition is established when the gaming ball passes through a specific area (373).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A9', a specific condition may be met when the specific area is passed through, so the player can easily understand that the specific condition has been met. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the specific condition is met. In addition, when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, the display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display means. Therefore, even in situations where the game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by drawing attention to whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix A10']
Further provided is an outlet (373) for discharging the game ball to the rear side of the game board (31) from which the game ball is shot out;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A9', wherein the specific area is the discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix A11']
The machine further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) from which winning balls are paid out when game balls enter the winning hole,
The discharge opening (373) includes a first discharge opening (318) that discharges game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) to the rear side of the game board (31), and a second discharge opening (373) different from the first discharge opening (318);
The gaming machine described in Appendix A10', wherein the specific area is the second discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix A12']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A11', wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of receiving balls during the special game.

In the gaming machines according to appendix A10' to appendix A12', when a specific condition is met in a special game triggered by the passing of a game ball through a second outlet through which the game ball can enter, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the playability by focusing on whether or not the game ball enters the second outlet.

[Appendix A13']
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A12', wherein the second discharge opening (373) allows the gaming ball that has passed through the variable winning opening (316) to pass through.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A13', when a specific condition is met triggered by the passing of a gaming ball through a second outlet through which a gaming ball that has entered a variable winning port can pass in a special game, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game, a gaming ball can be shot into the game area to enter a variable winning port, causing the gaming ball to pass through the second outlet. Therefore, by simply playing the special game normally, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring special skill. This prevents players from avoiding playing the gaming machine because of the possibility of a skill difference, compared to when a skill difference may occur to cause the gaming ball to enter the second outlet.

[Appendix A14']
A third outlet (378) through which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (316) can pass and which is different from the second outlet (373);
A distribution means (37) for distributing the game balls entering the variable winning opening (316) to either the second discharge opening (373) or the third discharge opening (378);
The gaming machine described in Appendix A13', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A14', the distribution means distributes the gaming balls to the second outlet and the third outlet, so that the gameplay is provided in which whether or not a specific condition is met depends on the distribution of the gaming balls by the distribution means. This makes it possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the gaming balls in the distribution means in terms of whether or not a specific condition is met.

[Appendix A15']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A3', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific conditions are satisfied during a specified period in which the start of the special game is set.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A15', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or determining specific numerical information, and even guessing or determining specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix A16']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A15', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A16', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the transition determination result is to transition to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information and thus the specific numerical information is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix A17']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A15' or Appendix A16', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start of the special game and a start of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A17', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix A18']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A15' to Appendix A17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A18', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix A19']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A18' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state is ended.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information indicating specific numerical information can be obtained, which can make it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix A20']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to claim A18' or A19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the value-granting game ends.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine of Appendix A20', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix A21']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', wherein the specified period is set to a period during which the special game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A21', specific information showing specific numerical information when a specific condition is satisfied is displayed on the display means during a specified period set during the execution period of the special game. This allows the player to enjoy identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A22']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) ends,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A21', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A22', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if a specific condition is met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix A23']
When the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays specific information (numbers) indicating at least the specific numerical information (non-set value) on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
The gaming machine according to claim A21' or A22', wherein the specified period is set at least after the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A23', if a specific condition is met within a specified period, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed after the specified period has elapsed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the specific condition is met within the specified period, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the specific information displayed on the display means after the specified period has elapsed. This increases the interest in the game during the series of periods from the start of the specified period until the specific information is displayed after the specified period has elapsed.

[Appendix A24']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is to be transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game,
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A21' to Appendix A23', characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state is ended.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A24', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the special game state to which the game is transferred when the result of the transition judgment in the first game state is to transition to the special game state. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is the first win. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last, regardless of whether it is the first win or the consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first win as a trigger, the end is set to the special game to be executed last, and the specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. This makes it possible to provide a game feature in which the period during which the special game is executed is effectively used to present the player with specific information indicating specific numerical information. In addition, in the case of consecutive wins, it is also possible to present the number (amount) of information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the consecutive wins all at once after the predetermined period has elapsed. This allows the player to check a lot of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the specified period has passed, improving convenience when identifying or inferring specific numerical information, and ultimately specific numerical information, based on specific information that indicates specific numerical information.

[Appendix A25']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game to be started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specific period has elapsed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A23' or Appendix A24', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to Appendix A25' includes a specific period set for a special game that is started within a specified period. That is, when multiple special games are started in a specified period, such as a consecutive win, multiple special periods are set according to the number of special games that are started in the specified period. In addition, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, when multiple specific periods exist in a specified period, it is determined whether a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the specific information is displayed on the display means each time the specific period has elapsed. This allows the player to focus on whether a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and when the specific condition is satisfied, the player can focus on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest in the special game.

[Appendix A26']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-granting game is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A25', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A26', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is met for each specific period including the value-imparting game, and if the specific condition is met during that specific period, specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed after the value-imparting game ends. Therefore, in the value-imparting game, attention is focused on whether or not a specific condition is met, and if the specific condition is met, attention is focused on the content of the specific information in the ending after the value-imparting game ends. This makes it possible to effectively use the ending of the special game to provide a playful feature that displays specific information, and also increases the interest in the game by focusing attention on the progress of the game throughout the entire special game.

[Appendix A27']
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through a specific area (373) and a display lottery that is executed in response to the game ball passing through the specific area (373) is won.
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A21' to Appendix A26', wherein the specified period is after the display lottery is won.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A27', the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery which is executed when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. By carrying out a display lottery as a condition for the specific information to be displayed on the display means in this way, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the display lottery has been won (whether or not the specific information is displayed), thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, when a display lottery is carried out as a condition for the specific information to be displayed on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty and variance with which the specific condition is satisfied (the difficulty and variance with which the specific information is displayed). This allows various gameplay characteristics to be provided with respect to the display of the specific information depending on the probability of winning the display lottery, the lottery method, etc.

[Appendix A28']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A3', characterized in that when specific conditions are satisfied during a specified period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A28', when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. This allows the player to guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and by displaying all the specific numerical information, the player can identify all the specific numerical information. It is also possible to recognize the specific numerical information by identifying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, which increases the interest of the game. In particular, since the specific information showing the specific numerical information based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period is displayed on the display means, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the number of specific conditions satisfied while hoping that many specific conditions will be satisfied in the predetermined period.

[Appendix A29']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A28', wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A29', the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display content of the display means. This allows the player to easily grasp the specific information, and therefore makes it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix A30']
The specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information,
the information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of pieces of individual information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A29', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays a number of individual information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period in the multiple display areas of the information display means.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A30', the specific information includes multiple individual pieces of information, and the information display means has multiple display areas for displaying the multiple individual pieces of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display the multiple pieces of individual information required to identify the specific numerical information in any of the multiple display areas. This provides a gameplay that allows the difficulty of identifying or guessing the specific numerical information to be adjusted depending on which of the multiple pieces of individual information is displayed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Appendix A31']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A30', characterized in that each of the multiple display areas (segments A to G) displays individual information that corresponds to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A31', each of the multiple display areas displays corresponding pieces of individual information from among the multiple pieces of individual information, making it possible to identify or guess specific numerical information based on the corresponding relationship. This allows the player to enjoy identifying or guessing specific numerical information while looking forward to seeing which of the multiple pieces of individual information will be displayed when a specific condition is met.

[Appendix A32']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30' or Appendix A31', wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A32', the information display means has a plurality of light-emitting regions. Such information display means can be realized by an easily available, low-cost display device, such as a seven-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with information display means that displays specific information, while preventing the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated and the manufacturing costs from increasing.

[Appendix A33']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30' or Appendix A31', wherein the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A33', since the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be identified or guessed, there are many options for the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be identified or guessed in a variety of patterns depending on the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. This improves the playability of identifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix A34']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A33' is characterized in that the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A34', a specific image is displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means required for the gaming machine without the need for a separate display means for displaying the specific image.

[Appendix A35']
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets using the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A29' to Appendix A34', wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A35', the information display means is capable of displaying numbers or letters, and the specific information is displayed corresponding to the numbers or letters. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or letters, making it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and allowing players to easily enjoy identifying or guessing the specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge.

[Appendix A36']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A29', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the specific information on the individual display units (351-356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information depending on the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A36', the specific information is displayed in an individual display section corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section in which the specific information is displayed is specified for each specific numerical information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of individual display section in which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily identified. This increases the convenience when identifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A37']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A36' is characterized in that the display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) to one of two states: a display state in which the specific information is displayed, and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A37', the individual display unit is controlled to one of two states, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily identified by the state of the individual display unit. This increases the convenience when identifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A38']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A36' or Appendix A37', wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix A39']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A36' to Appendix A38', wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In the gaming machines according to appendix A38' and appendix A39', it becomes possible to form information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Appendix A40']
a display order determination means (51) for determining a display order in which the specific information is to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Further equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A3', characterized in that when the specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A40', when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a display order for displaying specific information on the display means is determined. In this way, the display order for displaying specific information is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby preventing the display order of specific information from becoming constant. This makes it possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly, and to prevent the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A41']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A41', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine. Incidentally, the power of the gaming machine is often turned on before the opening of the gaming hall. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A42']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A42', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A43']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period starts.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A43', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined period begins. This determines the display order of the specific information for each predetermined period. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A44']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A44', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by the start of a special game. This determines the display order of the specific information for each special game. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A45']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-granting game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A45', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a value-granting game is started. This determines the display order of the specific information for each value-granting game. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A46']
a display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information to be displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
an operating means (21) operated by a player to cause the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) during a special period (e.g., a waiting state period) different from the specified period;
a second display control means (51) for causing the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by a player during the special period;
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A46', the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. This allows the player to cause the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period to be displayed on the second display means by operating the operating means during the special period. Therefore, when the player wants to check the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, when the player has forgotten the display contents or when a player is replaced, the player can check the display contents during the special period. As a result, the player can identify or guess the specific numerical information by checking the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and can decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine based on the identification or guess.

[Appendix A47']
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A46', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A47', the special period during which the display contents can be confirmed during the specified period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is being played. This allows the player to carefully and thoroughly check the display contents at his or her own pace without being subject to time constraints, and to decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine.

[Appendix A48']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display contents of a plurality of pieces of specific information displayed during a plurality of different specified periods,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A46' or Appendix A47', characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays at least one of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a specified operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix A49']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A48', characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays on the second display means (35, 39, 341) the display content selected by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period from the display contents of the multiple specific information during the special period.

[Appendix A50']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A49' is characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays two or more of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a specified operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A48' to appendix A50', at least one of the display contents of the multiple specific information displayed during multiple specified periods can be presented on the second display means. For example, the display contents selected by the player from the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) can be presented on the second display means. In this case, the player can select the display contents to be presented on the second display means from the display contents of the multiple specific information, so that the player can confirm the display contents he or she desires. This allows the display contents to be confirmed effectively while avoiding confirmation of display contents such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that the display contents can be confirmed efficiently. In addition, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at once, so that the presented contents can also be confirmed efficiently in this case.

[Appendix A51']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A46' to Appendix A50', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix A52']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A51', wherein the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means for displaying a variable pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment.

The gaming machine according to appendix A51' and appendix A52' is provided with a first display means displayed during a specified period and a second display means displayed during a special period, and specific information is displayed by different display means during each of the specified period and the special period. Therefore, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means during the specified period, the display can be prevented from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is a variable display image display means, the visibility of the image (e.g., image performance) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, during the special period (e.g., standby state), the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the second display means such as a variable display image display means that displays a variable pattern. In general, the variable display image display means has a large display area, so that when the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, visibility is improved. In addition, the variable display image display means may be used to set various effects and characters executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, it becomes possible to have the variable display image display means present the display content of the specific information during the specified period by performing operations similar to those for performing various settings. Therefore, the convenience of displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix A53']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A8', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A53', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, and can be set, for example, to an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A54']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A53' is characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A54', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix A54' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix A55']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period;
The display system further includes a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A53', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order memory means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A55', the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of the multiple specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the multiple specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A56']
the plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A55', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A56', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, a display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A57']
The gaming machine according to appendix A56', wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A57', it is also possible to make a particular display sequence easier to select, and harder to select. In other words, unlike when all display sequences are selected with the same probability, it is possible to make it easier to identify a particular non-set value, and conversely, more difficult to identify a particular non-set value. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of a high setting value, the likelihood of a low setting value, and so on.

[Appendix A58']
The plurality of display orders includes a first display order in which the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is the lowest;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the first display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the first display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A58', the first display order, which has the lowest priority, is likely to be selected for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of a favorable judgment among multiple favorable judgment probabilities corresponding to multiple specific information. In other words, excluding the favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, specific information indicating specific numerical information having the lowest probability of a favorable judgment and being the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical information that is the most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, the possibility of the most disadvantageous favorable judgment probability for the player and the favorable judgment probability that is more advantageous to the player remains until the last specific information is displayed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the favorable judgment probability is the most disadvantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent early termination of play on the gaming machine and to prevent a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

[Appendix A59']
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of favorable determination among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities,
the plurality of display orders includes a second display order in which the first identification information and the second identification information have the lowest two priorities;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57' is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the second display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the second display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A59', the second display order is likely to be selected, in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of the multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information has a low priority. Therefore, as with the gaming machine according to appendix A58', it is difficult for the player to understand that the advantageous judgment probability is the most unfavorable to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine from being ended early and to prevent a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine. Furthermore, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the most favorable judgment probability among the multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information has a low priority. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand not only the advantageous judgment probability that is unfavorable to the player, but also the advantageous judgment probability that is favorable to the player. In this way, the priority of the two specific information indicating two specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability that is unfavorable to the player and an advantageous judgment probability that is favorable to the player is low, making it difficult to determine until the end which of the two opposing advantageous judgment probabilities is more favorable to the player, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix A60']
The multiple display orders include a third display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than a first favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than the first favorable judgment probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57' is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the third display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the third display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A60', the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of advantageous judgment higher than the first probability of advantageous judgment is set to a higher selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than that of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of advantageous judgment lower than the first probability of advantageous judgment. By setting such a high selection rate of the third display order, it is possible to make the player expect that the probability of advantageous judgment will be higher than the actual first probability of advantageous judgment up until just before grasping the first probability of advantageous judgment. This allows the player to enjoy guessing specific information (predetermined information) while hoping for the possibility that the probability of advantageous judgment will be high until just before grasping the first probability of advantageous judgment.

[Appendix A61']
The multiple display orders include a fourth display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than a first favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than the first favorable judgment probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57' is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the fourth display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the fourth display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A61', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is set higher than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability higher than the first advantageous judgment probability. By setting such a high selection rate of the fourth display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is left as hidden specific information just before the first advantageous judgment probability is grasped. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous judgment probability is the actual first advantageous judgment probability and the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability. As a result, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability advantageous to the player is finally grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so that the joy when the set value is grasped is improved.

[Appendix A62']
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', further comprising a display restriction means (51) for restricting the specific information from being displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during periods other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A62', the display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during periods other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for a player who has performed a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. This makes it possible to prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A63']
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A62', wherein the period other than the specified period is a standby period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A63', during the standby period when neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed, the specific information is restricted from being displayed on the display means. Here, players are generally replaced during the standby period. Therefore, by restricting the specific information from being displayed on the display means during the standby period, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A64']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A62' or Appendix A63', characterized in that the display restriction means (51) restricts the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period, during a period other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A64', during periods other than the prescribed period, the display of specific information previously displayed on the display means during the prescribed period is restricted. In other words, the specific information is only displayed during the prescribed period, and the display of the display history of past specific information is also restricted outside the prescribed period. This makes it impossible to check the specific information previously displayed based on the display history, and therefore more reliably prevents other players from taking advantage of the benefit obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information based on the display history.

[Appendix A65']
The gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A3', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the multiple specific information (numbers) in a first display order when a first specific condition is met during a specified period, and causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the multiple specific information (numbers) in a first display order different from the first display order when a second specific condition different from the first specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A65', when a first specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces are displayed on the display means in a first display order, and when a second specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces (numbers) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces is set according to the type of specific condition that is met. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information pieces from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents a player from quickly realizing that the probability of a favorable judgment is low when the probability of a favorable judgment corresponds to a low probability of a favorable judgment. As a result, even if the probability of a favorable judgment is low, early termination of play on the gaming machine is prevented, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine is prevented.

[Appendix A66']
the first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41);
The gaming machine described in Appendix A65', characterized in that the second specific condition includes that second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the multiple types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A66', the first specific condition includes first predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes second predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is specified based on the predetermined numerical information, and multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to the display order. In other words, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it also becomes possible to characterize the display of multiple specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A67']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied;
The display system further includes a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A65' or Appendix A66', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A67', the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of the multiple specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the multiple specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A68']
the display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A67', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A68', multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A69']
The device further includes a second display control means (41) for displaying predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information on a second display means (45),
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to a player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', wherein the predetermined information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A69', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted. That is, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one specific numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information during a specified period is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player. This allows the player to identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In addition, by displaying the specified information on the second display means provided at a position where player visibility is restricted, it is possible to prevent players from understanding the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the specified information can be understood by the amusement hall outside business hours. This allows the amusement hall to check the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the specified numerical information, the specified information showing the changed specified numerical information can be checked, making it easier to change the specified numerical information.

[Appendix A70']
The game machine further includes a game board (31) from which the game balls are shot out;
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A69', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the rear side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A70', specific information showing specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided on the front side of the gaming board, and predetermined information showing the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a second display means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, the specific information displayed on the first display means is easy to view, and the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be easily restricted.

[Appendix A71']
The game board (31) is fixed to a frame body (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A70', wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position that is visible when the game board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A71', a second display means is provided on the back side of a gaming board that is fixed to a frame so as to be able to be opened and closed. Therefore, by closing the gaming board, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the specific information displayed on the second display means, while by opening the gaming board, the specific information displayed on the second display means can be confirmed by the gaming hall. In this way, a state in which the specific information on the second display means is visible and a state in which visibility is restricted can be achieved by the simple task of opening and closing the gaming board.

[Appendix A72']
The second display control means (41)
The second display means (45) is controllable between a display state in which the predetermined numerical information is displayed and a non-display state in which the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the second display means (45),
When a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the game board (31) is controlled from the non-display state to the display state,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A70' or Appendix A71', characterized in that when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the gaming machine controls from the display state to the non-display state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A72', a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed can be selected by operating a specific operating means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the gaming hall, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping the predetermined information through the second display means, even when the gaming board is opened in the event of a ball jam or the like occurring in the gaming machine.

[Appendix B1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The specific condition can be established when the game ball passes through a specific area (373),
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1', a specific condition can be met by passing through a specific area, so the player can easily understand that the specific condition has been met. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the specific condition has been met. In addition, the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means by the gaming ball passing through the specific area. Therefore, even in situations where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by focusing on whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix B2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix B3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2' or Appendix B3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on the special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix B4']
Further provided is an outlet (373) for discharging the game ball to the rear side of the game board (31) from which the game ball is shot out;
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix B1' to Appendix B3', wherein the specific area is the discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix B5']
The machine further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) from which winning balls are paid out when game balls enter the winning hole,
The discharge opening (373) includes a first discharge opening (318) that discharges game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) to the rear side of the game board (31), and a second discharge opening (373) different from the first discharge opening (318);
The gaming machine described in Appendix B4', wherein the specific area is the second discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix B6']
The gaming machine described in Appendix B5', wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of receiving balls during the special game.

In the gaming machines according to appendix B4' to appendix B6', when a specific condition is met in a special game triggered by the passing of a game ball through a second outlet through which the game ball can enter, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the playability by focusing on whether or not the game ball enters the second outlet.

[Appendix B7']
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
The gaming machine described in Appendix B6', characterized in that the second discharge opening (373) allows the gaming ball that has passed through the variable winning opening (316) to pass through.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B7', when a specific condition is met triggered by the passing of a gaming ball through a second outlet through which a gaming ball that has entered a variable winning port can pass in a special game, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game, a gaming ball can be shot into the game area to enter the variable winning port, causing the gaming ball to pass through the second outlet. Therefore, by simply playing the special game normally, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring special skill. This prevents players from avoiding playing the gaming machine because of the possibility of a skill difference, compared to when a skill difference may occur to cause the gaming ball to enter the second outlet.

[Appendix B8']
A third outlet (378) through which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (316) can pass and which is different from the second outlet (373);
A distribution means (37) for distributing the game balls entering the variable winning opening (316) to either the second discharge opening (373) or the third discharge opening (378);
The gaming machine described in Appendix B7' further comprises:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B8', the distribution means distributes the gaming balls to the second outlet and the third outlet, so that the gameplay is provided in which whether or not a specific condition is met depends on the distribution of the gaming balls by the distribution means. This makes it possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the gaming balls in the distribution means in terms of whether or not a specific condition is met.

[Appendix B9']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices B1' to B8', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B9', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix B10']
The gaming machine described in Appendix B9', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B10', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix B10' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix C1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a prescribed period from a prescribed start timing to a prescribed end timing when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period;
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine characterized in that the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information showing the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy identifying the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix C2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1' is characterized in that, when the specific condition is met, the display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information during the specified period.

[Appendix C3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period when the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2' or appendix C3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows a part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix C4']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R special jackpot game state and a 16R special jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified;
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices C1' to C3', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information and thus the specific numerical information is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix C5']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C1' to Appendix C4', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C5', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix C6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C5', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C6', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix C7']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix C6' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C7', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information indicating specific numerical information can be obtained, which can make it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix C8']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The gaming machine according to claim C6' or C7', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C8', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix C9']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices C1' to C8', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C9', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix C10']
The gaming machine described in Appendix C9' is characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C10', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix C10' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix D1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
The specified period is set to a period during which the special game is being played.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1', specific information showing specific numerical information when a specific condition is satisfied is displayed on the display means during a specified period set during the execution period of the special game. This allows the player to enjoy identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix D2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1' is characterized in that, when the specific condition is met, the display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information during the specified period.

[Appendix D3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period when the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2' or appendix D3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix D4']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) ends,
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D3', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix D4', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix D5']
When the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays specific information (numbers) indicating at least the specific numerical information (non-set value) on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D4', wherein the specified period is set at least after the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D5', if a specific condition is met within a specified period, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed after the specified period has elapsed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the specific condition is met within the specified period, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the specific information displayed on the display means after the specified period has elapsed. This increases the interest in the game during the series of periods from the start of the specified period until the specific information is displayed after the specified period has elapsed.

[Appendix D6']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is to be transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D5' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the special game state to which the game is transferred when the result of the transition judgment in the first game state is to transition to the special game state. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is the first win. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last, regardless of whether it is the first win or the consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first win as a trigger, the end is set to the special game to be executed last, and the specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. This makes it possible to provide a game feature in which the period during which the special game is executed is effectively used to present the player with specific information indicating specific numerical information. In addition, in the case of consecutive wins, it is also possible to present the number (amount) of information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the consecutive wins all at once after the predetermined period has elapsed. This allows the player to check a lot of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the specified period has passed, improving convenience when identifying or inferring specific numerical information, and ultimately specific numerical information, based on specific information that indicates specific numerical information.

[Appendix D7']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game to be started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specific period has elapsed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D5' or Appendix D6', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to appendix D7' includes a specific period set for a special game that is started within a specified period. That is, when multiple special games are started in a specified period, such as a consecutive win, multiple special periods are set according to the number of special games that are started in the specified period. In addition, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, when multiple specific periods exist in a specified period, it is determined whether a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the specific information is displayed on the display means each time the specific period has elapsed. This allows the player to focus on whether a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and when the specific condition is satisfied, the player can focus on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest in the special game.

[Appendix D8']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-granting game is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D7', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D8', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is met for each specific period including the value-imparting game, and if the specific condition is met during that specific period, specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed after the value-imparting game ends. Therefore, in the value-imparting game, attention is focused on whether or not a specific condition is met, and if the specific condition is met, attention is focused on the content of the specific information in the ending after the value-imparting game ends. This makes it possible to effectively use the ending of the special game to provide a playful feature that displays specific information, and also increases the interest in the game by focusing attention on the progress of the game throughout the entire special game.

[Appendix D9']
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through a specific area (373) and a display lottery that is executed in response to the game ball passing through the specific area (373) is won.
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix D1' to Appendix D8', wherein the specified period is after the display lottery is won.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D9', the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery which is executed when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. By carrying out a display lottery as a condition for the specific information to be displayed on the display means in this way, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the display lottery has been won (whether or not the specific information is displayed), thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, when a display lottery is carried out as a condition for the specific information to be displayed on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty and variance with which the specific condition is satisfied (the difficulty and variance with which the specific information is displayed). This allows various playability to be imparted to the display of the specific information depending on the probability of winning the display lottery, the lottery method, etc.

[Appendix D10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices D1' to D9', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D10', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, and can be set, for example, to an order that makes it easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order that makes it easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix D11']
The gaming machine described in Appendix D10', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D11', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix D11' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix E1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the specific numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a prescribed period from a prescribed start timing to a prescribed end timing, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied during the predetermined period; and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1', when a specific condition is satisfied in a specified period, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the specified period. This allows the player to guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and by displaying all the specific numerical information, the player can identify all the specific numerical information. It is also possible to recognize the specific numerical information by identifying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, which increases the interest of the game. In particular, since the specific information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in a specified period, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the number of specific conditions satisfied, hoping that many specific conditions will be satisfied in the specified period.

[Appendix E2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix E3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2' or appendix E3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix E4']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E1' to Appendix E3', wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4', the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display content of the display means. This allows the player to easily grasp the specific information, and therefore makes it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix E5']
The specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information,
the information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of pieces of individual information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix E4', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays a number of individual information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period in the multiple display areas of the information display means.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E5', the specific information includes multiple individual pieces of information, and the information display means has multiple display areas for displaying the multiple individual pieces of information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display the multiple pieces of individual information required to identify the specific numerical information in any of the multiple display areas. This provides a gameplay that allows the difficulty of identifying or guessing the specific numerical information to be adjusted depending on which of the multiple pieces of individual information is displayed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Appendix E6']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E5', characterized in that each of the multiple display areas (segments A to G) displays individual information that corresponds to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E6', each of the multiple display areas displays corresponding pieces of individual information from among the multiple pieces of individual information, making it possible to identify or guess specific numerical information based on the correspondence. This allows the player to enjoy identifying or guessing specific numerical information while looking forward to seeing which of the multiple pieces of individual information will be displayed when a specific condition is met.

[Appendix E7']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5' or Appendix E6', wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E7', the information display means has a plurality of light-emitting regions. Such information display means can be realized by an easily available, low-cost display device, such as a seven-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with information display means that displays specific information, while preventing the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated and the manufacturing costs from increasing.

[Appendix E8']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5' or Appendix E6', wherein the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E8', since the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be identified or guessed, there are many options for the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be identified or guessed in a variety of patterns depending on the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. This improves the playability of identifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix E9']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E8' is characterized in that the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E9', a specific image is displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means required for the gaming machine without the need for a separate display means for displaying the specific image.

[Appendix E10']
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets using the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix E5' to Appendix E9', wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E10', the information display means is capable of displaying numbers or letters, and the specific information is displayed corresponding to the numbers or letters. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or letters, making it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and allowing players to easily enjoy identifying or guessing the specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge.

[Appendix E11']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine described in Appendix E4' is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the specific information on the individual display units (351-356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information depending on the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E11', the specific information is displayed in an individual display section corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section in which the specific information is displayed is specified for each specific numerical information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of individual display section in which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily identified. This increases the convenience when identifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix E12']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E11' is characterized in that the display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) to one of two states: a display state in which the specific information is displayed, and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E12', the individual display unit is controlled to one of two states, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily identified by the state of the individual display unit. This increases the convenience of identifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix E13']
The gaming machine according to appendix E11' or appendix E12', wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix E14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E11' to E13', wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In the gaming machines according to appendix E13' and appendix E14', it becomes possible to form information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Appendix E15']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1' to E14', wherein a start time of the predetermined period is set during the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E15', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix E16']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix E15', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E16', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game in the first game state in which the probability of the transition determination means determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is lower than in the second game state. In other words, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game of the so-called first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for one first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, so that at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information, and thus the specific numerical information, is guaranteed for one first win.

[Appendix E17']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to appendix E15' or appendix E16', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start of the special game and a start of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E17', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix E18']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E15' to E17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E18', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of players in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in the special game in addition to the start of the period, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is increased.

[Appendix E19']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix E18' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information can be obtained to identify specific numerical information, making it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix E20']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix E18' or appendix E19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, game value is not awarded and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix E20', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if a specific condition is met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix E21']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix E1' to Appendix E20', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E21', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix E22']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E21', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E22', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix E22' differs from conventional slot machines in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value, in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means.

[Appendix F1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a specified start timing to a specified end timing when a specific condition is satisfied during the specified period;
a display order determination means (51) for determining a display order in which the specific information is to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
When the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information during the specified period based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51);
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F1', when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a display order for displaying specific information on the display means is determined. In this way, the display order for displaying specific information is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby preventing the display order of specific information from becoming constant. This makes it possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly, and to prevent the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix F1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix F3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix F1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F2' or appendix F3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix F4']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine. Incidentally, the power of the gaming machine is often turned on before the opening of the amusement hall. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F5']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period is started.

In the gaming machine according to appended note F6', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined period begins. This allows the display order of the specific information to be determined for each predetermined period. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, thereby preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F7', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by the start of a special game. This determines the display order of the specific information for each special game. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F8']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-granting game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F8', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a value-granting game is started. This determines the display order of the specific information for each value-granting game. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, thereby preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F9']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51);
Further equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices F1' to F8', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F9', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of multiple pieces of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F10']
the display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine according to claim F9', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F10', multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix F11']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F10', wherein a start point of the predetermined period is set during the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F11', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix F12']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix F11', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F12', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the transition determination result is that the game state will be transitioned to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information, and thus the specific numerical information, is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix F13']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to appendix F11' or appendix F12', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start of the special game and a start of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F13', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix F14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F11' to F13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F14', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix F15']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix F14' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note F15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information indicating specific numerical information can be obtained, which can make it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix F16']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix F14' or appendix F15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix F16', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix F17']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices F1' to F16', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F17', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, and can be set, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F18']
The gaming machine described in Appendix F17', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F18', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix F18' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix G1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a first display control means (51) for displaying, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the specific numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information on a first display means (35, 39, 341) during a specified period from a specific start timing to a specific end timing;
a display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information to be displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
an operating means (21) operated by a player to cause the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) during a special period (e.g., a waiting state period) different from the specified period;
a second display control means (51) for causing the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by a player during the special period;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1', the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. This allows the player to display the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period on the second display means by operating the operating means during the special period. Therefore, when the player wants to check the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, when the player has forgotten the display contents or when a player is replaced, the player can check the display contents during the special period. As a result, the player can identify or guess the specific numerical information by checking the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and can decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine based on the identification or guess.

[Appendix G2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2' or appendix G3', not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the first display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the first display means. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix G4']
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G3', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G4', the special period during which the display contents can be confirmed during the specified period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is being played. This allows the player to carefully and thoroughly check the display contents at his or her own pace without being subject to time constraints, and to decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine.

[Appendix G5']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display contents of a plurality of pieces of specific information displayed during a plurality of different specified periods,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices G1' to G4', characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays at least one of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a specified operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix G6']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G5' is characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays on the second display means (35, 39, 341) the display content selected by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period from the display contents of the multiple specific information during the special period.

[Appendix G7']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G5' is characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays two or more of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a specified operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G5' to appendix G7', at least one of the display contents of the multiple specific information displayed during multiple specified periods can be presented on the second display means. For example, the display contents selected by the player from the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) can be presented on the second display means. In this case, the player can select the display contents to be presented on the second display means from the display contents of the multiple specific information, so that the player can confirm the display contents he or she desires. This allows the display contents to be confirmed effectively while avoiding confirmation of display contents such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that the display contents can be confirmed efficiently. In addition, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at once, so that the presented contents can also be confirmed efficiently in this case.

[Appendix G8']
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G7', characterized in that the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix G9']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G8', characterized in that the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means for displaying a variable pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment.

The gaming machine according to appendix G8' and appendix G9' is provided with a first display means displayed during a specified period and a second display means displayed during a special period, and specific information is displayed by different display means during each of the specified period and the special period. Therefore, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means during the specified period, the display can be prevented from being hindered. For example, when the second display means is a variable display image display means, the visibility of the image (e.g., image performance) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being hindered. On the other hand, during the special period (e.g., standby state), the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the second display means such as a variable display image display means that displays a variable pattern. In general, the variable display image display means has a large display area, so when the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, visibility is improved. In addition, the variable display image display means may be used to set various effects and characters executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, it becomes possible to have the variable display image display means present the display content of the specific information during the specified period by performing operations similar to those for performing various settings. Therefore, the convenience of displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix G10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices G1' to G9', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G10', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix G11']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G10', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G11', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix G11' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix H1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information, in a distinguishable manner, during a prescribed period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period;
Equipped with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information for the specified period in a predetermined display order;
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H1', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix H3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H2' or Supplementary Note H3', not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix H4']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period;
The display system further includes a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices H1' to H3', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H4', the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of the multiple specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the multiple specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H5']
the display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine according to claim H4', wherein the one display order is selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H5', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix H6']
The gaming machine according to claim H5', wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H6', it is also possible to make a specific display sequence easier to select, and harder to select. In other words, unlike when all display sequences are selected with the same probability, it is possible to make it easier to identify a specific non-set value, and conversely, more difficult to identify a specific non-set value. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of a high setting value, the likelihood of a low setting value, and so on.

[Appendix H7']
The plurality of display orders includes a first display order in which the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is the lowest;
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the first display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the first display order.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7', the first display order, which has the lowest priority, is likely to be selected for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of a favorable judgment among multiple favorable judgment probabilities corresponding to multiple specific information. In other words, excluding the favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, specific information indicating specific numerical information having the lowest probability of a favorable judgment and being the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical information that is the most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, the possibility of the most disadvantageous favorable judgment probability for the player and the favorable judgment probability that is more advantageous to the player remains until the last specific information is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the favorable judgment probability is the most disadvantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent early termination of play on the gaming machine and to prevent a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

[Appendix H8']
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of favorable determination among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities,
the plurality of display orders includes a second display order in which the first identification information and the second identification information have the lowest two priorities;
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the second display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the second display order.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H8', the second display order is likely to be selected, in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of the multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information is low. Therefore, as with the gaming machine according to the appendix H6', it is difficult for the player to understand that the advantageous judgment probability is the most unfavorable to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine from being ended early and to prevent a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine. Furthermore, in the second display order, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the most favorable judgment probability among the multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information is low. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand that the advantageous judgment probability is advantageous to the player as well as the advantageous judgment probability that is unfavorable to the player. In this way, the priority of the two specific information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability unfavorable to the player and the advantageous judgment probability that is favorable to the player is low, so that it is difficult for the player to judge until the end which of the two advantageous judgment probabilities is the most advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix H9']
The multiple display orders include a third display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than a first favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than the first favorable judgment probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the third display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the third display order.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H9', the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of advantageous judgment higher than the first probability of advantageous judgment is set to a higher selection rate for the third display order, which is lower than the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of advantageous judgment lower than the first probability of advantageous judgment. By setting such a high selection rate for the third display order, it is possible to make the player expect that the probability of advantageous judgment will be higher than the actual first probability of advantageous judgment up until just before grasping the first probability of advantageous judgment. This allows the player to enjoy guessing specific information (predetermined information) while hoping for the possibility that the probability of advantageous judgment will be high up until just before grasping the first probability of advantageous judgment.

[Appendix H10']
The multiple display orders include a fourth display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than a first favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than the first favorable judgment probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the fourth display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the fourth display order.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note H10', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is set higher than the selection rate of the fourth display order, which is lower than the selection rate of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability higher than the first advantageous judgment probability. By setting such a high selection rate of the fourth display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is left as hidden specific information just before the first advantageous judgment probability is grasped. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous judgment probability is the actual first advantageous judgment probability and the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability. As a result, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability advantageous to the player is finally grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so that the joy when the set value is grasped is improved.

[Appendix H11']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H1' to Appendix H10', wherein a start point of the predetermined period is set during the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H11', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix H12']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H11', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H12', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the transition determination result is that the game state will be transitioned to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information and thus the specific numerical information is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix H13']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to claim H11' or H12', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start of the special game and a start of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H13', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix H14']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H11' to Appendix H13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H14', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix H15']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state is ended.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note H15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that is transitioned to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information indicating specific numerical information can be obtained, which can make it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix H16']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to claim H14' or H15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the value-granting game ends.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, game value is not awarded and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix H16', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if a specific condition is met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix H17']
The gaming machine described in any of Appendices H1' to H15', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H17', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix H17' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix I1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
a display restriction means (51) for restricting the specific information from being displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the specified period;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1', the display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during periods other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for a player who has performed a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. This makes it possible to prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information.

[Appendix I2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix I3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix I2' or appendix I3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix I4']
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix I1' to Appendix I3', characterized in that the period other than the specified period is a standby period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I4', during the standby period when neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed, the specific information is restricted from being displayed on the display means. Here, players are generally replaced during the standby period. Therefore, by restricting the specific information from being displayed on the display means during the standby period, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information.

[Appendix I5']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1' to I4', characterized in that the display restriction means (51) restricts the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period, during a period other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I5', during periods other than the prescribed period, the display of specific information previously displayed on the display means during the prescribed period is restricted. In other words, the specific information is only displayed during the prescribed period, and the display of the display history of past specific information is also restricted outside the prescribed period. This makes it impossible to check the specific information previously displayed based on the display history, and therefore more reliably prevents other players from taking advantage of the benefit obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information based on the display history.

[Appendix I6']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1' to I5', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix I7']
The gaming machine described in Appendix I6' is characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I7', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix I7' differs from conventional slot machines in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting, in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means.

[Appendix J1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information, in a distinguishable manner during a prescribed period from a prescribed start timing to a prescribed end timing when a first specific condition or a second specific condition different from the second specific condition is satisfied during a prescribed period;
Equipped with
the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied, and causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a second display order different from the first display order when the second specific condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1', when a first specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces are displayed on the display means in a first display order, and when a second specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces (numbers) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces is set according to the type of specific condition that is met. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information pieces from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents a player from early realizing that the probability of an advantageous judgment is low when the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponds to a low probability of an advantageous judgment. As a result, even if the probability of an advantageous judgment is low, early termination of play on the gaming machine is prevented, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine is prevented.

[Appendix J2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix J3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J2' or appendix J3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows a part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix J4']
the first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41);
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1' to J3', characterized in that the second specific condition includes that second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the multiple types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appended note J4', the first specific condition includes first predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes second predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is determined by the predetermined numerical information, and multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to the display order. In other words, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. This allows the display order to be set based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it also becomes possible to characterize the display of multiple specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J5']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied;
The display system further includes a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1' to J4', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order memory means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J5', the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of the multiple specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the multiple specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J6']
the display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine according to appended claim J5', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J6', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J7']
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1' to J6', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J7', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or determining specific numerical information, and even guessing or determining specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix J8']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix J7' is characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J8', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the transition determination result is to transition to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information, and thus the specific numerical information, is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix J9']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to appendix J7' or appendix J8', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J9', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix J10']
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices J7' to J9', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J10', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix J11']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note J11', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information indicating specific numerical information can be obtained, which can make it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix J12']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The gaming machine according to claim J10' or J11', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, game value is not awarded and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix J12', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if a specific condition is met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix J13']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1' to J12', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J13', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J14']
The gaming machine described in Appendix J13', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J14', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix J14' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix K1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a first display control means (51) for displaying, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the specific numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information on a first display means (35, 39, 341) during a specified period from a specific start timing to a specific end timing;
a second display control means (41) for causing a second display means (45) to display predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information;
Equipped with
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to a player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to appended note K1', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted. That is, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one specific numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information during a specified period is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player. This allows the player to identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In addition, by displaying the specified information on the second display means provided at a position where player visibility is restricted, it is possible to prevent players from understanding the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the specified information can be understood by the amusement hall outside business hours. This allows the amusement hall to check the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the specified numerical information, the specified information showing the changed specified numerical information can be checked, making it easier to change the specified numerical information.

[Appendix K2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1', characterized in that the first display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix K3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1', characterized in that the first display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K2' or appendix K3', not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix K4']
The game machine further includes a game board (31) from which the game balls are shot out;
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1' to K3', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K4', specific information showing specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided on the front side of the gaming board, and predetermined information showing the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a second display means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, the specific information displayed on the first display means is easy to view, and the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be easily restricted.

[Appendix K5']
The game board (31) is fixed to a frame body (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine according to appendix K4', wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position that is visible when the game board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K5', a second display means is provided on the back side of a gaming board that is fixed to a frame so as to be able to be opened and closed. Therefore, by closing the gaming board, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the specific information displayed on the second display means, while by opening the gaming board, the specific information displayed on the second display means can be confirmed by the gaming hall. In this way, a state in which the specific information on the second display means is visible and a state in which visibility is restricted can be achieved by the simple act of opening and closing the gaming board.

[Appendix K6']
The second display control means (41)
The second display means (45) is controllable between a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed on the second display means (45),
When a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the game board (31) is controlled from the non-display state to the display state,
The gaming machine according to claim K4' or K5', wherein when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the gaming machine controls from the display state to the non-display state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K6', a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed can be selected by operating a specific operating means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the gaming hall, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping the predetermined information through the second display means, even when the gaming board is opened in the event of a ball jam or the like occurring in the gaming machine.

[Appendix K7']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendices K1' to K6', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K7', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix K8']
The gaming machine described in Appendix K7', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appended note K8', if the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to appended note K8' differs from conventional slot machines in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value, in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means.

[Appendix A1]
A transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed;
A display means (341) for displaying the result of the transition determination by a stationary display of a predetermined pattern (decorative pattern) displayed in a variable manner;
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to start the variable display of the predetermined pattern up to an upper limit number;
a pattern change execution means (51) for executing a variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right reserved by the reservation means (41) when a start condition for variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right is established;
a means (51) for setting a reserved information display area (75) in the display means (341) capable of displaying reserved information corresponding to the number of the rights reserved by the reservation means (41) and an expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to the special game state in a predetermined display mode;
A means (51) for setting a previously changed information display area (77) capable of displaying a predetermined number of previously changed information corresponding to the change display in which the change display of the predetermined pattern has started in a specific display mode in the display means (341);
Equipped with
the predetermined display mode includes at least a first display mode (e.g., blue), a second display mode (e.g., green) having a higher expectation level than the first display mode, and a third display mode (e.g., red) having a higher expectation level than the second display mode;
a means for restricting a change from the second display mode to the third display mode when the pending information displayed in the pending information display area (75) is in the second display mode, and restricting a change from the second display mode to the first display mode;
a predetermined state generating means (51) for generating a predetermined state which is more advantageous to a player when the changed information corresponding to a specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77) than when the changed information corresponding to the reserved information displayed in the third display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1, the display means in which the result of the transition judgment is displayed by the variable display and the stop display of the predetermined pattern is set with not only a pending information display area in which pending information corresponding to the number of rights to start the variable display of the predetermined pattern is displayed, but also a previously changed information display area in which the previously changed information corresponding to the pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has started is displayed. In this way, not only the pending information but also the previously changed information corresponding to the past pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has started is displayed, so that the past pending information can be used. This makes it possible to give meaning to the past pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has been executed in the progress of the game. And, when the display mode of the past pending information displayed as the previously changed information is such that there is a high expectation that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the special game state, even if the stop display mode of the predetermined pattern notifies that the result of the transition judgment is not to transition to the special game state, it is possible to give the player new interest by displaying the previously changed information corresponding to the past pending information, and the interest in the game is improved.

Here, the expectation that the result of the transition judgment when the reserved information is in the first display mode will transition to the special game state is lower than when the reserved information is in the second display mode and the third display mode. Therefore, for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode, there is not much expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to the special game state, and interest in the game decreases until the variable display of the specified pattern for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode is stopped and displayed. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to appendix A1, a specified state that is more advantageous to the player is generated when the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode is displayed, compared to when the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information displayed in the third display mode is displayed. Therefore, even if the variable display of the specified pattern is for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode, the player can enjoy the variable display for the specific reserved information while expecting the advantage of the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information being displayed after the variable display for the specific reserved information, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1, characterized in that the specified state occurs when the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) is a specified judgment result (jackpot, small win, sudden time reduction).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, the predetermined state is generated when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a predetermined determination result. In this way, by generating the predetermined state when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a predetermined determination result, even if the display mode of the pending information is unfavorable to the player, the already changed display information corresponding to the pending information is associated with the result of the transition determination, and a gaming machine with new playability in which the result of the transition determination is clearly or suggested by the past pending information can be realized, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix A3]
The gaming machine according to claim A2, wherein the predetermined judgment result is a judgment result advantageous to the player (a big win, a small win, or a sudden time reduction).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A3, the predetermined judgment result is a judgment result that is advantageous to the player. In this way, because the predetermined judgment result is a judgment result that is advantageous to the player, even if the display mode of the pending information is unfavorable to the player, a gaming machine with novel playability can be realized in which the past pending information clearly indicates or suggests that the result of the transition judgment is a judgment result that is advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix A4]
A performance setting means (51) is provided for setting a performance to be executed when the predetermined pattern is variably displayed on the display means (341),
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A3, characterized in that the specified state includes a state in which a specified effect (special reach effect, super reach effect, effect stock effect, timer effect, pre-reading effect) is set by the effect setting means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4, the predetermined state includes a state in which a predetermined effect is set as an effect to be executed when a predetermined pattern is variably displayed on the display means. In this way, by including a state in which a predetermined effect is set as an effect to be executed when a predetermined pattern is variably displayed on the display means, even if the display mode of the reserved information is disadvantageous to the player, the already-varied display information corresponding to the reserved information is associated with the effect, and a gaming machine with new playability in which a predetermined effect is clearly or suggested by past reserved information can be realized, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix A5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix A1 to Appendix A4, characterized in that the initial display mode when the already-changed information is displayed in the already-changed information display area has a correspondence relationship with the final display mode for the pending information corresponding to the already-changed information.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A5, the initial display mode when the already-changed information is displayed in the already-changed information display area corresponds to the final display mode for the reserved information corresponding to the already-changed information. In this way, the initial display mode when the already-changed information is displayed in the already-changed information display area corresponds to the final display mode for the reserved information corresponding to the already-changed information, so that the initial display mode of the already-changed information is set in a format that inherits the display mode when a change display of a predetermined pattern is executed for the reserved information. Therefore, for example, by generating a predetermined state, it becomes easier to visually grasp that the already-changed information is for the reserved information corresponding to the first display mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the third display mode, which has a higher expectation. This makes it easy to grasp that it is a change display that requires attention, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix B1]
A transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed;
A display means (341) for displaying the result of the transition determination by a stationary display of a predetermined pattern (decorative pattern) displayed in a variable manner;
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to start the variable display of the predetermined pattern up to an upper limit number;
a pattern change execution means (51) for executing a variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right reserved by the reservation means (41) when a start condition for variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right is established;
a means (51) for setting a reserved information display area (75) in the display means (341) capable of displaying reserved information corresponding to the number of the rights reserved by the reservation means (41) and an expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to the special game state in a predetermined display mode;
A means (51) for setting a previously changed information display area (77) capable of displaying a predetermined number of previously changed information corresponding to the change display in which the change display of the predetermined pattern has started in a specific display mode in the display means (341);
Equipped with
the predetermined display mode includes at least a first display mode (e.g., blue), a second display mode (e.g., green) having a higher expectation level than the first display mode, and a third display mode (e.g., red) having a higher expectation level than the second display mode;
a means for restricting a change from the second display mode to the third display mode when the pending information displayed in the pending information display area (75) is in the second display mode, and restricting a change from the second display mode to the first display mode;
A means for changing the display mode of the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area (77) to a different display mode;
a predetermined state generating means (51) for generating a predetermined state which is more advantageous to a player when the changed information corresponding to a specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77) than when the changed information corresponding to the reserved information displayed in the third display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the display means in which the result of the transition judgment is displayed by the variable display and the stop display of the predetermined pattern is set with not only a pending information display area in which pending information corresponding to the number of rights to start the variable display of the predetermined pattern is displayed, but also a previously changed information display area in which the previously changed information corresponding to the pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has started is displayed. In this way, not only the pending information but also the previously changed information corresponding to the past pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has started is displayed, so that the past pending information can be used. This makes it possible to give meaning to the past pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has been executed in the progress of the game. And, when the display mode of the past pending information displayed as the previously changed information is such that there is a high expectation that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the special game state, even if the stop display mode of the predetermined pattern notifies that the result of the transition judgment is not to transition to the special game state, it is possible to give the player new interest by displaying the previously changed information corresponding to the past pending information, and the interest in the game is improved.

Here, the expectation that the result of the transition judgment when the reserved information is in the first display mode will transition to the special game state is lower than when the reserved information is in the second display mode and the third display mode. Therefore, for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode, there is not much expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to the special game state, and interest in the game decreases until the variable display of the specified pattern for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode is stopped and displayed. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, a specified state that is more advantageous to the player is generated when the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode is displayed, compared to when the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information displayed in the third display mode is displayed. Therefore, even if the variable display of the specified pattern is for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode, the player can enjoy the variable display for the specific reserved information while expecting the advantage of the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information being displayed after the variable display for the specific reserved information, and the interest in the game is improved.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the display mode of the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area is changed to a different display mode. In this way, by changing the display mode of the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area to a different display mode, for example, when multiple pieces of already-changed information are displayed in the already-changed information display area, it becomes possible to control the occurrence rate of combinations of the display modes of these pieces of already-changed information. This makes it possible to control the occurrence rate of combinations of the display modes of the already-changed information depending on the level of the profit granted to the player, for example, when a profit is granted to a player according to a combination of the display modes of the already-changed information.

In addition, by changing the display mode of the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area to a different display mode, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, when a specified condition is not met, the player is given an advantage when already-changed information corresponding to specific pending information displayed in the first display mode is displayed in the already-changed information display area compared to when already-changed information corresponding to specific pending information displayed in the third display mode is displayed in the already-changed information display area.

[Appendix B2]
A gaming machine as described in Appendix B1, characterized in that when the display mode of the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area (77) is changed to the different display mode, a benefit is given to the player.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, when the display mode of the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area is changed to a different display mode, a benefit is given to the player. Therefore, when there is a benefit to be given to the player, by changing the display mode of the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area to a different display mode, a gaming machine with playability that can clearly indicate or suggest that a benefit will be given to the player can be realized, and the interest of the game is increased.

[Appendix B3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B2, wherein the benefit is an indication that the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B3, the benefit given to the player is a clear indication that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the benefit given to the player is a clear indication that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to a special gaming state, and by changing the display mode of the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area to a different display mode, a gaming machine with playability that can clearly indicate that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to a special gaming state can be realized, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix B4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B2 or Appendix B3, wherein the benefit is an indication of the expectation that the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, the benefit given to the player is an indication of the expectation that the result of the transition judgment will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the benefit given to the player is an indication of the expectation that the result of the transition judgment will result in a transition to a special gaming state, and by changing the display mode of the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area to a different display mode, a gaming machine with playability that can suggest the expectation that the result of the transition judgment will result in a transition to a special gaming state can be realized, and the interest in playing the game can be increased.

[Appendix B5]
The gaming machine according to claim B2 or B3, wherein the profit is an explicit or suggested gaming information regarding ball output performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B5, the benefit given to the player is the explicit or suggested gaming information related to ball-out performance. In this way, the benefit given to the player is the explicit or suggested gaming information related to ball-out performance, and by changing the display mode of the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area to a different display mode, a gaming machine with playability that can explicitly or suggest gaming information related to ball-out performance can be realized, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix C1]
A transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed;
A display means (341) for displaying the result of the transition determination by a stationary display of a predetermined pattern (decorative pattern) displayed in a variable manner;
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to start the variable display of the predetermined pattern up to an upper limit number;
a pattern change execution means (51) for executing a variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right reserved by the reservation means (41) when a start condition for variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right is established;
a means (51) for setting a reserved information display area (75) in the display means (341) capable of displaying reserved information corresponding to the number of the rights reserved by the reservation means (41) and an expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to the special game state in a predetermined display mode;
A means (51) for setting a previously changed information display area (77) capable of displaying a predetermined number of previously changed information corresponding to the change display in which the change display of the predetermined pattern has started in a specific display mode in the display means (341);
Equipped with
the predetermined display mode includes at least a first display mode (e.g., blue), a second display mode (e.g., green) having a higher expectation level than the first display mode, and a third display mode (e.g., red) having a higher expectation level than the second display mode;
a means for restricting a change from the second display mode to the third display mode when the pending information displayed in the pending information display area (75) is in the second display mode, and restricting a change from the second display mode to the first display mode;
a predetermined state generating means (51) for generating a predetermined state which is more advantageous to a player when the changed information corresponding to a specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77) than when the changed information corresponding to the reserved information displayed in the third display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined display mode of the pending information is different from the specific display mode of the already changed information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the display means in which the result of the transition judgment is displayed by the variable display and the stop display of the predetermined pattern is set with not only a pending information display area in which pending information corresponding to the number of rights to start the variable display of the predetermined pattern is displayed, but also a previously changed information display area in which the previously changed information corresponding to the pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has started is displayed. In this way, not only the pending information but also the previously changed information corresponding to the past pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has started is displayed, so that the past pending information can be used. This makes it possible to give meaning to the past pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has been executed in the progress of the game. And, when the display mode of the past pending information displayed as the previously changed information is such that there is a high expectation that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the special game state, even if the stop display mode of the predetermined pattern notifies that the result of the transition judgment is not to transition to the special game state, it is possible to give the player new interest by displaying the previously changed information corresponding to the past pending information, and the interest in the game is improved.

Here, the expectation that the result of the transition judgment when the reserved information is in the first display mode will transition to the special game state is lower than when the reserved information is in the second display mode and the third display mode. Therefore, for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode, there is not much expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to the special game state, and interest in the game decreases until the variable display of the specified pattern for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode is stopped and displayed. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to appendix C1, a specified state that is more advantageous to the player is generated when the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode is displayed, compared to when the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information displayed in the third display mode is displayed. Therefore, even if the variable display of the specified pattern is for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode, the player can enjoy the variable display for the specific reserved information while expecting the advantage of the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information being displayed after the variable display for the specific reserved information, and the interest in the game is improved.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, the predetermined display mode of the pending information is different from the specific display mode of the already changed information. In this way, by making the predetermined display mode of the pending information different from the specific display mode of the already changed information, it is possible to easily visually distinguish between the pending information and the already changed information. This makes it easy to know which change display is worth paying attention to, further increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix C2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1, characterized in that the specific display mode of the already changed information includes a display mode having something in common with the predetermined display mode of the pending information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C2, the specific display mode of the already-changed information includes a display mode that has something in common with the predetermined display mode of the reserved information. In this way, by the specific display mode of the already-changed information including a display mode that has something in common with the predetermined display mode of the reserved information, the display mode of the already-changed information is set in a format that inherits the display mode when a change display of a predetermined pattern for the reserved information is executed. Therefore, for example, by generating a predetermined state, it becomes easier to visually grasp that the already-changed information is for the reserved information corresponding to the first display mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the third display mode, which has a higher expectation. This makes it easier to grasp that it is a change display that deserves attention, further increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C2, characterized in that the common point between the specific display mode of the already-changed information and the specified display mode of the pending information is color.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C3, the common feature between the specific display mode of the already changed information and the predetermined display mode of the reserved information is color. In this way, the common feature between the specific display mode of the already changed information and the predetermined display mode of the reserved information is color, which makes it easier to visually grasp that the information is already changed for the reserved information corresponding to the first display mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the third display mode, which has a higher expectation, and therefore makes it easier to grasp that it is a noteworthy change display, further increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix D1]
A transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed;
A display means (341) for displaying the result of the transition determination by stopping a predetermined pattern (decorative pattern) displayed in a variable manner;
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to start the variable display of the predetermined pattern up to an upper limit number;
a pattern change execution means (51) for executing a variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right reserved by the reservation means (41) when a start condition for variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right is established;
a means (51) for setting a reserved information display area (75) in the display means (341) capable of displaying reserved information corresponding to the number of the rights reserved by the reservation means (41) and an expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to the special game state in a predetermined display mode;
A means (51) for setting a previously changed information display area (77) capable of displaying a predetermined number of previously changed information corresponding to the change display in which the change display of the predetermined pattern has started in a specific display mode in the display means (341);
Equipped with
the predetermined display mode includes at least a first display mode (e.g., blue), a second display mode (e.g., green) having a higher expectation level than the first display mode, and a third display mode (e.g., red) having a higher expectation level than the second display mode;
a means for restricting a change from the second display mode to the third display mode when the pending information displayed in the pending information display area (75) is in the second display mode, and restricting a change from the second display mode to the first display mode;
A means for erasing the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area (77) when a specific condition is satisfied;
a predetermined state generating means (51) for generating a predetermined state which is more advantageous to a player when the changed information corresponding to a specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77) than when the changed information corresponding to the reserved information displayed in the third display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the display means in which the result of the transition judgment is displayed by the variable display and the stop display of the predetermined pattern is set with not only a pending information display area in which pending information corresponding to the number of rights to start the variable display of the predetermined pattern is displayed, but also a previously changed information display area in which the previously changed information corresponding to the pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has started is displayed. In this way, not only the pending information but also the previously changed information corresponding to the past pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has started is displayed, so that the past pending information can be used. This makes it possible to give meaning to the past pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has been executed in the progress of the game. And, when the display mode of the past pending information displayed as the previously changed information is such that there is a high expectation that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the special game state, even if the stop display mode of the predetermined pattern notifies that the result of the transition judgment is not to transition to the special game state, it is possible to give the player new interest by displaying the previously changed information corresponding to the past pending information, and the interest in the game is improved.

Here, the expectation that the result of the transition judgment when the reserved information is in the first display mode will transition to the special game state is lower than when the reserved information is in the second display mode and the third display mode. Therefore, for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode, there is not much expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to the special game state, and interest in the game decreases until the variable display of the specified pattern for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode is stopped and displayed. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to appendix D1, a specified state that is more advantageous to the player is generated when the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode is displayed, compared to when the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information displayed in the third display mode is displayed. Therefore, even if the variable display of the specified pattern is for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode, the player can enjoy the variable display for the specific reserved information while expecting the advantage of the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information being displayed after the variable display for the specific reserved information, and the interest in the game is improved.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, when a specific condition is met, the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area is erased. In this way, when a specific condition is met, the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area is erased, which prevents, for example, when a player is replaced on a gaming machine, the new player from meaninglessly inheriting the already-changed information obtained by the previous player.

In addition, when certain conditions are met, the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area is erased, and even if the same player continues playing, the already-changed information starts to be displayed again, preventing the display of the already-changed information from becoming stale.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1, characterized in that the specific condition includes the passage of a predetermined time after the specified pattern is displayed stationary without the specified pattern being displayed in a variable manner and without the special game being started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2, the specific condition includes that a predetermined time has elapsed since a predetermined pattern is displayed in a stopped state without the display of a change in the predetermined pattern and without the start of a special game. That is, when a standby state in which no game is being played continues for a predetermined time, the changed information displayed in the changed information display area is erased. In this way, when a standby state in which no game is being played continues for a predetermined time, the changed information displayed in the changed information display area is erased, so that when a player is replaced on the gaming machine, the changed information obtained by the previous player is prevented from being meaninglessly passed on to the new player, and the new player can start displaying the changed information in the changed information display area from scratch from the start of his or her own game. Even if there is no change of player, the player can start displaying the changed information in the changed information display area from scratch by intentionally stopping play for a predetermined period of time.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine according to claim D1 or D2, wherein the specific condition includes that the special game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D3, the specific condition includes the execution of a special game. In this way, since the specific condition includes the start of a special game, when the display of the changes in a specified pattern that was interrupted by the execution of a special game is restarted, the display of the already-changed information in the already-changed information display area can be started from scratch.

[Appendix D4]
a means for awarding a profit to a player when, in the predetermined state, the changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information displayed in the reserved information display area (75) in the first display mode is displayed in the changed information display area (77);
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1, wherein the specific condition includes the awarding of a benefit to the player.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D4, the specific condition includes a benefit being given to the player when already-changed information corresponding to the specific pending information displayed in the first display mode in a predetermined state is displayed. In this way, by the specific condition including a benefit being given to the player when already-changed information corresponding to the specific pending information displayed in the first display mode in a predetermined state is displayed, it is possible to prevent a benefit from being given to the player consecutively when a benefit has already been given to the player through a special game, and it is possible to start displaying already-changed information in the already-changed information display area from scratch.

[Appendix E1]
A transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed;
A display means (341) for displaying the result of the transition determination by a stationary display of a predetermined pattern (decorative pattern) displayed in a variable manner;
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to start the variable display of the predetermined pattern up to an upper limit number;
a pattern change execution means (51) for executing a variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right reserved by the reservation means (41) when a start condition for variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right is established;
a means (51) for setting a reserved information display area (75) in the display means (341) capable of displaying reserved information corresponding to the number of the rights reserved by the reservation means (41) and an expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to the special game state in a predetermined display mode;
A means (51) for setting a previously changed information display area (77) capable of displaying a predetermined number of previously changed information corresponding to the change display in which the change display of the predetermined pattern has started in a specific display mode in the display means (341);
Equipped with
the predetermined display mode includes at least a first display mode (e.g., blue), a second display mode (e.g., green) having a higher expectation level than the first display mode, and a third display mode (e.g., red) having a higher expectation level than the second display mode;
a means for restricting a change from the second display mode to the third display mode when the pending information displayed in the pending information display area (75) is in the second display mode, and restricting a change from the second display mode to the first display mode;
a predetermined state generating means (51) for generating a predetermined state which is more advantageous to a player when the changed information corresponding to a specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77) than when the changed information corresponding to the reserved information displayed in the third display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in either a first transition determination state (a sure-win game state, a time-limited game state) or a second transition determination state (a normal game state) which is more disadvantageous to a player than the first transition determination state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the means (51) for setting the pending information display area (75) sets the pending information display area (75) on the display means (341) in the second transition determination state.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note E1, the display means in which the result of the transition judgment is displayed by the variable display and the stop display of the predetermined pattern is set with not only a pending information display area in which pending information corresponding to the number of rights to start the variable display of the predetermined pattern is displayed, but also a previously changed information display area in which the previously changed information corresponding to the pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has started is displayed. In this way, not only the pending information but also the previously changed information corresponding to the past pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has started is displayed, so that the past pending information can be used. This makes it possible to give meaning to the past pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has been executed in the progress of the game. And, when the display mode of the past pending information displayed as the previously changed information is such that there is a high expectation that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the special game state, even if the stop display mode of the predetermined pattern notifies that the result of the transition judgment is not to transition to the special game state, it is possible to give the player new interest by displaying the previously changed information corresponding to the past pending information, and the interest in the game is improved.

Here, the expectation that the result of the transition judgment when the reserved information is in the first display mode will transition to the special game state is lower than when the reserved information is in the second display mode and the third display mode. Therefore, for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode, there is not much expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to the special game state, and interest in the game decreases until the variable display of the specified pattern for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode is stopped and displayed. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to appendix E1, a specified state that is more advantageous to the player is generated when the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode is displayed, compared to when the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information displayed in the third display mode is displayed. Therefore, even if the variable display of the specified pattern is for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode, the player can enjoy the variable display for the specific reserved information while expecting the advantage of the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information being displayed after the variable display for the specific reserved information, and the interest in the game is improved.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, a pending information display area is set on the display means in a second transition judgment state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first transition judgment state. In this way, by setting a pending information display area on the display means in the second transition judgment state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first transition judgment state, it becomes possible to provide the player with an additional benefit in the second transition judgment state that is more disadvantageous to the player. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the game by providing an additional benefit in the second game state that is more disadvantageous to players who tend to feel bored, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1, characterized in that the means (51) for setting the pending information display area (75) limits the setting of the pending information display area (75) to the display means (341) in the first transition judgment state.

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E2, characterized in that the first transition judgment state (high probability mode) has a higher probability that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game than the second transition judgment state (low probability mode).

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E2, characterized in that the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) can be performed more frequently in the first transition judgment state (time-saving gaming state) than in the second transition judgment state (normal gaming state).

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes E2 to E4, the setting of the pending information display area on the display means in the first transition judgment state (for example, a gaming state in which the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means is more likely to result in a transition to the special game than in the second transition judgment state, and a gaming state in which the transition judgment by the transition judgment means can be executed with high frequency) is restricted. In this way, by restricting the setting of the pending information display area on the display means in the first transition judgment state, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an additional benefit in the first transition judgment state that is advantageous to the player, and to give the player an additional benefit in a limited manner in the second transition judgment state that is disadvantageous to the player.

[Appendix F1]
A transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed;
A display means (341) for displaying the result of the transition determination by a stationary display of a predetermined pattern (decorative pattern) displayed in a variable manner;
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to start the variable display of the predetermined pattern up to an upper limit number;
a pattern change execution means (51) for executing a variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right reserved by the reservation means (41) when a start condition for variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right is established;
a means (51) for setting a reserved information display area (75) in the display means (341) capable of displaying reserved information corresponding to the number of the rights reserved by the reservation means (41) and an expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to the special game state in a predetermined display mode;
A means (51) for setting a previously changed information display area (77) capable of displaying a predetermined number of previously changed information corresponding to the change display in which the change display of the predetermined pattern has started in a specific display mode in the display means (341);
Equipped with
the predetermined display mode includes at least a first display mode (e.g., blue), a second display mode (e.g., green) having a higher expectation level than the first display mode, and a third display mode (e.g., red) having a higher expectation level than the second display mode;
a means for restricting a change from the second display mode to the third display mode when the pending information displayed in the pending information display area (75) is in the second display mode, and restricting a change from the second display mode to the first display mode;
a predetermined state generating means (51) for generating a predetermined state which is more advantageous to a player when the changed information corresponding to a specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77) than when the changed information corresponding to the reserved information displayed in the third display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined number of the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area (77) is a predetermined fixed number.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note F1, the display means in which the result of the transition judgment is displayed by the variable display and the stop display of the predetermined pattern is set with not only a pending information display area in which pending information corresponding to the number of rights to start the variable display of the predetermined pattern is displayed, but also a previously changed information display area in which the previously changed information corresponding to the pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has started is displayed. In this way, not only the pending information but also the previously changed information corresponding to the past pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has started is displayed, so that the past pending information can be used. This makes it possible to give meaning to the past pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has been executed in the progress of the game. And, when the display mode of the past pending information displayed as the previously changed information is such that there is a high expectation that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the special game state, even if the stop display mode of the predetermined pattern notifies that the result of the transition judgment is not to transition to the special game state, it is possible to give the player new interest by displaying the previously changed information corresponding to the past pending information, and the interest in the game is improved.

Here, the expectation that the result of the transition judgment when the reserved information is in the first display mode will transition to the special game state is lower than when the reserved information is in the second display mode and the third display mode. Therefore, for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode, there is not much expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to the special game state, and interest in the game decreases until the variable display of the specified pattern for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode is stopped and displayed. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to appendix F1, a specified state that is more advantageous to the player is generated when the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode is displayed, compared to when the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information displayed in the third display mode is displayed. Therefore, even if the variable display of the specified pattern is for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode, the player can enjoy the variable display for the specific reserved information while expecting the advantage of the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information being displayed after the variable display for the specific reserved information, and the interest in the game is improved.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the predetermined number of pieces of already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area is a predetermined fixed number. In this way, since the predetermined number of pieces of already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area is a predetermined fixed number, when the change display for the pending information is started, the pending information displayed in the already-changed information display area is updated. Therefore, it is possible to realize new gameplay that provides benefits to the player based on the contents of the already-changed information display area that is updated by the start of the change display for the pending information, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming machine described in appendix F1, characterized in that the fixed number of the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area (77) is 2 or more.

[Appendix F3]
A gaming machine as described in appendix F2, characterized in that when the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area (77) is a predetermined combination, a profit is awarded to the player.

[Appendix F4]
The gaming machine according to appendix F3, wherein a type of benefit corresponding to the type of the predetermined combination is given to the player.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes F2 to 4, the fixed number of pieces of already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area is two or more. In this way, by having a fixed number of pieces of already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area be two or more, it is possible to realize a new gameplay that, for example, based on a combination of the display modes of a plurality of pieces of already-changed information, when the combination of the display modes of the plurality of pieces of already-changed information is a predetermined combination, granting the player a profit according to the type of the predetermined combination, thereby further enhancing the interest of the game.

[Appendix G1]
A transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed;
A display means (341) for displaying the result of the transition determination by a stationary display of a predetermined pattern (decorative pattern) displayed in a variable manner;
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to start the variable display of the predetermined pattern up to an upper limit number;
a pattern change execution means (51) for executing a variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right reserved by the reservation means (41) when a start condition for variable display of the predetermined pattern for the right is established;
a means (51) for setting a reserved information display area (75) in the display means (341) capable of displaying reserved information corresponding to the number of the rights reserved by the reservation means (41) and an expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to the special game state in a predetermined display mode;
A means (51) for setting a previously changed information display area (77) capable of displaying a predetermined number of previously changed information corresponding to the change display in which the change display of the predetermined pattern has started in a specific display mode in the display means (341);
Equipped with
the predetermined display mode includes at least a first display mode (e.g., blue), a second display mode (e.g., green) having a higher expectation level than the first display mode, and a third display mode (e.g., red) having a higher expectation level than the second display mode;
a means for restricting a change from the second display mode to the third display mode when the pending information displayed in the pending information display area (75) is in the second display mode, and restricting a change from the second display mode to the first display mode;
a predetermined state generating means (51) for generating a predetermined state which is more advantageous to a player when the changed information corresponding to a specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77) than when the changed information corresponding to the reserved information displayed in the third display mode in the reserved information display area (75) is displayed in the changed information display area (77);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific display mode for the predetermined number of already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area (77) indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note G1, the display means in which the result of the transition judgment is displayed by the variable display and the stop display of the predetermined pattern is set with not only a pending information display area in which pending information corresponding to the number of rights to start the variable display of the predetermined pattern is displayed, but also a previously changed information display area in which the previously changed information corresponding to the pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has started is displayed. In this way, not only the pending information but also the previously changed information corresponding to the past pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has started is displayed, so that the past pending information can be used. This makes it possible to give meaning to the past pending information in which the variable display of the predetermined pattern has been executed in the progress of the game. And, when the display mode of the past pending information displayed as the previously changed information is such that there is a high expectation that the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the special game state, even if the stop display mode of the predetermined pattern notifies that the result of the transition judgment is not to transition to the special game state, it is possible to give the player new interest by displaying the previously changed information corresponding to the past pending information, and the interest in the game is improved.

Here, the expectation that the result of the transition judgment when the reserved information is in the first display mode will transition to the special game state is lower than when the reserved information is in the second display mode and the third display mode. Therefore, for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode, there is not much expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to the special game state, and interest in the game decreases until the variable display of the specified pattern for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode is stopped and displayed. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to appendix G1, a specified state that is more advantageous to the player is generated when the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode is displayed, compared to when the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information displayed in the third display mode is displayed. Therefore, even if the variable display of the specified pattern is for the specific reserved information displayed in the first display mode, the player can enjoy the variable display for the specific reserved information while expecting the advantage of the already-changed information corresponding to the specific reserved information being displayed after the variable display for the specific reserved information, and the interest in the game is improved.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix G1, the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special gaming state is suggested by a specific display mode for a predetermined number of already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area. In this way, the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special gaming state is suggested by a specific display mode for a predetermined number of already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area, so that even if the result of the transition judgment does not transition to a special gaming state is not notified from the stopped display mode of a predetermined pattern, it is possible to realize a new gameplay that suggests the degree of expectation for the lottery result based on the already-changed information corresponding to the past reserved information, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix G2]
The predetermined number of the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area (77) is a plurality of pieces,
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1 is characterized in that, based on a combination of the already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area (77), the expectation level that the result of the transition judgment will result in a transition to the special game state is indicated.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G2, the expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special gaming state is suggested based on the combination of already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area. In this way, the expectation that the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special gaming state is suggested based on the combination of already-changed information displayed in the already-changed information display area, which makes it possible to realize new gameplay that suggests the expectation for the lottery result based on a combination of multiple already-changed information corresponding to multiple past pending information, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

10: Gaming machine 31: Gaming board 316: Variable winning port 341: Pattern display section 35: Lamp display section 351: First individual lamp section 352: Second individual lamp section 353: Third individual lamp section 354: Fourth individual lamp section 355: Fifth individual lamp section 356: Sixth individual lamp section 37: Clone device 373: Special out ball port 38: Gaming ball retention section 381: Retention lane 383: Stopper section 384: Special out ball sensor 39: 7-segment display section A to G: Segment 4: Main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
45: Setting value display section 46: Setting value change operation section 47: ROM
5: Audio and lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device 75: First pending image display section 751: First pending image display area 752: Second pending image display area 753: Third pending image display area 754: Fourth pending image display area 76: The changing image display section 77: Already changed image display section 771: First already changed image display area 772: Second already changed image display area 773: Third already changed image display area 774: Fourth already changed image display area

Claims (1)

An information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied;
A transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to a player is executed based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Equipped with
The transition determination means is configured to perform the transition determination in any one of a plurality of transition determination states each having a different transition rate for transitioning to the special game state,
A storage means for storing each of the numerical information corresponding to the plurality of transition determination states;
A setting means for setting which of the numerical information is used in the transition determination state to perform the transition determination;
a display control means for displaying a display corresponding to any one of the transition determination states set by the setting means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display control means
a numerical information storage means for storing one predetermined numerical information set from a plurality of types of numerical information;
and a means for displaying, in a specified area of the display means, multiple types of specific information displayed using numbers or letters corresponding to specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when at least a gaming ball enters a specific area and a specific condition is established,
This gaming machine is
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed in the predetermined area of the display means,
a display order of the plurality of types of the specific information to be displayed in the predetermined area of the display means during the specified period is set based on the type of the predetermined numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means ;
a display execution means for executing a specific display effect on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied based on the execution of a predetermined game by a player;
The display means is configured to display the plurality of types of specific information in the predetermined area of the display means according to a display order set when the specific performance display is executed,
a state switching means for switching between a predetermined valid state in which the entry of the game ball into the specific area is valid and a predetermined invalid state in which the entry of the game ball into the specific area is invalid,
During the predetermined valid state, a plurality of game balls entering the specific area are valid.
A display corresponding to the number of valid game balls that have entered the specific area during the predetermined valid state is configured to be executable,
one of the predetermined numerical information is set from the plurality of types of numerical information, and when the display of the plurality of types of specific information is executed in a predetermined order during the specified period, specific information of a second value, which is a value larger than the first value, can be displayed later than specific information of a first value;
The specified period is a period after the establishment of a reach state as a variable game performed based on the result of the transition determination,
A gaming machine, characterized in that the form of the predetermined numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means and the form of the specific information displayed on the display means are different from each other .

Images